irwm

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

GOVERNMENT OF INDIAMINISTRY OF RAILWAYS

(RAILWAY BOARD)

INDIAN RAILWAYSWORKS MANUAL

2 0 0 0

gË_{d OV{

F O R E W A R D

The procedures and practices in relation to the buildings and structures on

Indian Railways were laid down in the Indian Railways Way and Works Manual of

1967, which was to be revised into three different Manuals viz. P. Way, Bridges and

Works. While the P. Way and Bridge Manuals in their revised form were published in

1986 and 1998 respectively, Works Manual is now being published in the completely

updated and revised form. With the modifications in the functioning related to works

as well as due to introduction of new types of structures, some radical changes were

inescapable. The recent shift in emphasis on customer care, passenger amenities,

commercial exploitation of railway land and afforestation in the railway premises

required provisions in the Works Manual. Also, new methodologies now available

have been included in the Manual for the benefit of the civil engineers responsible

for the construction and maintenance of railway assets.

It is hoped that procedures and practices laid down in the Manual will be of

help to civil engineers in not only maintaining various buildings and structures with

better standards, economy and safety but also in generating much needed revenue

for Railways.

New Delhi, (V.K. Agnihotri)

02-2-2000. Member Engineering

Railway Board.

PREFACE

The Indian Railways Way & Works Manual was last published in 1967. On therecommendation of the Track Standards Committee vide Item No.678 of the 49th Report, it wasdecided to split the Manual into three separate parts, viz. Permanent Way, Bridges and Works.The Permanent Way Manual was published in 1986 and the Bridge Manual has been published in1998. With this Manual now being published, a long standing need has been fulfilled.

The work of revision was first undertaken by a Committee constituted vide Railway Board'sletter No.82/W-1/M-W/2 dated 30.3.87, consisting of Chief Planning & Design Engineers of fiveZonal Railways and Director, IRICEN. The Committee, however, could do only a part of the jobdue to retirement of several Members. However, Railway Board nominated a Select Committeevide letter No.82/W-1/M-W/2 dated 17.9.92. The revised draft Manual prepared by the Membersof this Select Committee was submitted to the Railway Board and was circulated to all the ZonalRailways and Construction Organisations for their comments. After due consideration of thecomments and suggestions received from various Units, the finally revised edition in the presentform was prepared by IRICEN. This includes addition of clauses related to maintenance ofroads, handing over assets, felling of trees, management of land, water proofing of roofs etc.

While revising this Manual, provisions of other Codes and Manuals of Indian Railwayshave been taken into account. As far as possible, provisions contained in existing Codes havenot been reproduced or repeated to avoid duplication leading to differing versions. Chapters onContracts, Engineering Stores & Accountal, Control over Expenditure and Deposit Works, whichexisted in the earlier Way & Works Manual, are now a part of the Indian Railways Code forEngineering Department,1993; hence not included in the present edition. Due consideration hasalso been given to codes and standards published by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) andNational Building Organisation(NBO).

All efforts have been made to make the instructions comprehensive. However, the ChiefEngineers of Zonal Railways may supplement or elaborate the practices and procedures containedherein wherever necessary to suit local conditions on their Railways. Such instructions or ordersshould not contravene the extant provisions of national Codes, Rules and guidelines as applicableto Indian Railways.

Railway Board will be glad to consider any comments and suggestions from the RailwayAdministrations.

(A.K. Yog) (V.K. Bahmani)OSD(Engineering) Executive Director Civil Engineering(G) Railway Board. Railway Board.

EXPLANATORY NOTES

1. Index letters for Codes - The following index letters are used for distinguishing the several IndianRailway Codes from each other -

A - Accounts DepartmentE - Engineering DepartmentF - Financial CodeG - Administration & Finance - an IntroductionR - Establishment CodeS - Stores CodeT - Traffic Department (Commercial)M - Mechanical Department (workshops)

2. Paragraph Numbers - For convenience of indexing of reference, the paragraphs have beennumbered according to 3 or 4 figures "Code", in which the last two figures give the number of theparagraph and the remaining figures the number of the Chapter. Thus paragraph 101 of any codeis paragraph I of Chapter 1 of that code and paragraph 1421, paragraph 21 of Chapter XIV.

3. Reference to paragraphs - Reference to paragraphs of a code is made by putting the paragraphnumber, suffixed by the index letter of the code concerned. Thus 1335-R means paragraph 35 ofchapter XIII of the Indian Railway Establishment Code Volume 1 and 5 Appendix VIII-RI meansparagraph 5 of Appendix VIII of the Indian Railway Establishment Code Vol.I.

4. Index to Correction Slips - To facilitate reference to correction slips that have been issued to theCodes, an up-to-date index of correction slips is published from time to time showing for eachCode the paragraph of rule numbers affected by correction slips and the numbers of such correctionslips. This index may be pasted inside the cover of each Code.

5. Reference year quoted against various codes and references mentioned in this Manual are thelatest available versions. These may be replaced by the subsequent versions whenever newversions are issued.

H H H H H H H

CONTENTSCHAPTER I

A. DUTIES OF ASSISTANT ENGINEER 1 - 4

General 101, Essential Duties of Assistant Engineer 102, Knowledge of Rules and Regulations 103, Co-ordination with Officials of other Departments 104, Inspection by Higher Officials 105, Inspection by AssistantEngineer 106, Execution and Monitoring of Works 107, Control Over Expenditure 108, Water Supply 109,Land Management 110, Training 111, Witnessing Payments to Staff 112, Inspection of Offices and Stores ofInspectors 113, Staff Matters 114, Relinquishment of Charge 115,

B. DUTIES OF SECTION ENGINEER (Works) 4 - 10

Duties 116, Knowledge of Rules and Regulations 117, Co-ordination with Permanent Way, Bridge and otherstaff 118, Inspections 119, Musters 120, Execution of Works 121, Measurement of Works 122, WorksAffecting Moving Dimensions 123, Imprest of Tools and Materials 124, Accompanying Important Inspections125, Witnessing Payment to Staff 126, Journal of Daily Duties 127, Establishment 128, Correspondence andRecords 129, Relinquishment of Charge 130.

Proforma for submitting Progress Report - Annexure 1.1(Para 107(b) ).

Progress Reports to be submitted by various Units - Annexure 1.2 (Para 107(b) ).

CHAPTER II

A. PLANNING AND GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 11 - 25

Siting of Buildings 201, Planning of Railway Staff Colonies 202, General Design Requirement of Buildings203, Water Supply to Stations and Staff Quarters 204, Scale of Fitments for Water Supply, Sanitation andDrainage 205, Plinth Area for Various Types of Quarters 206, Basic Amenities in Staff Quarters 207, Type ofFlooring, Wall Surface and Colour of Wood and Steel Work in General 208, Use of New Materials 209, Coloursfor Timber Steel-Work and Walls in General 210, Rest Houses 211, Allotment of Rest House 212, RailwayInstitute 213, Construction of R.M.S. Buildings in Railway Premises 214, Buildings for Railway Police 215,Construction of Quarters/Barracks for GRP Personnel by the Railway 216, Provision of Chicks and VenetianBlinds 217, Additions and Alterations to Quarters 218, Block Numbering of Buildings and Structures 219,Building Registers 220, Transfer of Buildings 221, Responsibilities of Staff Occupying Quarters 222,Vacant Railway Buildings 223,

B. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF BUILDINGS 26 - 29

Inspection and Repairs 224, Monitoring of Maintenance 225, Periodical Maintenance Works 226, StandardMeasurement Registers for Buildings 227.

i

C. INSPECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL AND TIMBER WORK 30-68 BY ASSISTANT ENGINEER AND SUPERVISORS

Periodical Inspection 228, Details of Inspection 229, Erection of Steel Work and Roof Trusses 230, Maintenanceof Roads 231, Handing Over of Commissioned Assets by Construction Organisation to Open Line 232.

Guidelines for Selection of Sanitaton System - Annexure 2.1 (Para 202(b) ).

Revised Scale of Plinth Area - Annexure 2.2 (Para 206).

Proforma for Details of Occupancy - Annexure 2.3 (Para 220(c) ).

Proforma for Inspection Register - Annexure 2.4 (Para 223(b) ).

Proforma for Petty Repair Book/Complaint Book - Annexure 2.5 (Para 224(a) ).

Schedule of Colour Washing and Distempering - Annexure 2.6 (Para 225(a) ).

Guidelines for Leak Proof Flat Roof - Annexure 2.7 (Para 226(d) ).

Register of Standard Measurement of Buildings - Annexure 2.8 (Para 227(a) ).

Structural Steel & Timber Work Inspection Register - Annexure 2.9 (Para 227(b) ).

CHAPTER III

MAINTENANCE OF SANITARAY & HYGIENIC CONDITIONS IN STATION BUILDINGS, YARDS & RAILWAY COLONIES 69-71

Sanitary Arrangements in Stations and Colonies 301, Railway Sanitation Committees 302, Constitution ofSanitation Committees 303, Record of Minutes of Meetings 304, Inspection by Sanitation Committees 305,Conservancy Work 306, Sanitary Protection of Installation 307, Precautions against Infectious Diseases andDisinfection Measures 308, Disinfection of Quarters 309.

CHAPTER IV

PASSENGER AMENITIES, STATIONS AND YARDS 72-90

General 401, Categorisation of Stations 402, Minimum Essential Amenities 403, Recommended level ofAmenities 404, Desirable Amenities 405, Allocation of Expenditure 406, Maintenance of Passenger Amenities407, Passenger Amenity Booklets 408, Booking Offices 409, Waiting Halls 410, Platforms 411, ShadyTrees on Platforms 412, Lighting 413, Drinking Water Supply 414, Latrines, Urinals and Dustbins 415,Platform Covers 416, Foot Over Bridges or Sub-ways 417, Waiting Rooms 418, Signages 419, VendingTrollies/Stalls 420, Retiring Rooms 421, Other General Items 422, Facilities for Physically Handicapped 423,Station Name Boards 424, Platform Sign Boards 425, Time Table Boards and Faire Lists 426, Pictogram 427,Design of Station Complexes 428, Station Buildings 429, Approach Roads and Circulating Area 430.Categories of Stations for provision of Passenger Amenities-Annex.4.1 (Para 402(b).

ii

Minimum essential Amenities at each category of Stations - Annexure 4.2 (Para 403).Scale of Minimum essential Amenities at Stations - Annexure 4.3 (Para 403).Recommended Amenities - Annexure 4.4 (Para 404 ).Desirable Amenities - Annexure 4.5 (Para 405).Passenger Amenities Details - Annexure 4.6 (Para 408).

CHAPTER V

A. WATER SUPPLY 91 - 92

General 501, Preparation of Schemes for New Water Supply/Augmentation of Existing Water Supply 502,Review of Water Supply Arrangements on the Railways 503, Data for a Estimating Requirements of Water504, Capacity of Source 505,

B. OPEN WELLS 93-94

Preliminary Measures for Sinking 506, Determination of Size 507, Improving Yield in Open Wells 508,Shallow Tube-Wells 509,

C. DEEP TUBE WELLS 94-96

Consultation with Geological Department 510, Stages of Work for Sinking 511, Checking Verticality of Tube-Wells 512, Failure of Wells and the Remedial Measures 513, Disinfection of Wells 514,

D. IMPOUNDING RESERVOIRS 96

Governing factors 515, Storage Capacity 516, Cracks in Reservoir Walls 517, Reservoir Management 518,

E. INFILTRATION GALLERIES AND WELLS 96 - 98

Infiltration Gallery 519, Infiltration Well 520, Radial Collector Wells 521, Intake Arrangements 522, WaterSupply from Outside Sources 523,

F. PUMPS 98-100

Types and Selection of Pumps 524, Pump Installation 525, Driving Units 526, Capacity of Pumping 527,Pump Horse Power 528,

G. AQUEDUCTS AND PIPELINES 100-102

Conveyance of Water from Source 529, Pipe Laying Fitting of Valves and Meters 530,

iii

H. WATER TREATMENT 102-104

Quality of Water 531, Water Samples for Analysis 532, Method of Treatment 533, Disinfection of Water 534,Residual Chlorine 535,

I. HIGH LEVEL STORAGE 104 - 105

Storage Capacity 536, Maintenance and Cleaning of Storage Tanks 537, Float Gauges and Scouring Sluices538, Protection Against Pollution 539,

J. DISTRIBUTION OF WATER 105 - 108

Distribution System 540, Layout of Distribution Systems 541, Rising Mains not to be used for Distribution542, Separate Supplies for Drinking and Other Purposes 543, Service Pipes from Mains 544, ResidualPressure 545, Preventive Maintenance 546, Protection Against Pollution Near Sewer and Drains 547,Carriage Watering System 548,

K. MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION OF WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATIONS108-114

Engineering Department's Responsibilities 549, Mechanical Department's Responsibilities 550, ElectricalDepartment's Responsibility 551, Inspections by Assistant Engineer and Staff 552, Water Supply Plans 553,Water Purification Works 554.

Check List for Water Supply Scheme - Annexure 5.1 (Para 502).Standards of Quality of Drinking Water - Annexure 5.2 (Para 531).

CHAPTER VI

A. DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE 115 - 116

General 601, Preparation of Schemes of Sewerage 602,

B. WATER-BORNE SEWERAGE 116 - 125

Adherence to Regulations 603, Sewerage Schemes 604, Designing of Sewers 605, Quantity of Sewage606, Alignment of Sewer 607, Velocity of Flow 608, Ventilation in Sullage 609, Size of Sewer 610, StormWater 611, Manholes 612, Choice of Material for Sewers 613, Laying of Sewer Pipes 614, Sewage Disposal615 , Septic Tanks 616, Aqua Privy Latrines 617, Bio-Latrines 618, Conservation of Water 619, RecommendedToilet Systems 620,

iv

C. MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE 125 - 127

General 621, Sewer Lines 622, Open Sullage Drains 623, Storm Water Drains 624, Disposal Works 625,House Connections 626, Conservancy and Sanitary Arrangements 627, Maintenance of Sewerage System628, Periodical Cleaning of Drainage System 629, Covered Stormwater Drains 630, Subsoil Drains 631,Responsibilities of the Assistant Engineer and Staff 632.

CHAPTER VII

GARDENS & PLANTATIONS, DISPOSAL OF GRASSAND OTHER NATURAL PRODUCTS

A. GARDENS AND PLANTATIONS 128 - 129Role of Engineering Staff 701, Planning for Plantation 702, Nursery 703, Planting and Care of Young Trees704, Maintenance of Gardens in Offices, Rest Houses and Colonies 705,

B. GARDENS IN OFFICERS' BUNGALOWS AND 129SENIOR SUPERVISORS' QUARTERS

Maintenance 706, Incidence of Service 707, Provision of Lawns and Hedges in New Bungalows 708,

C. SALE OF NATURAL PRODUCTS 130 - 132

By Auction or by Tender 709(a), To State Forest Corporations etc. 709(b), Division of Lots 709(c), Fixing ofReserve Price of Lots 710, Auction or Tender Notices and Agreement 711, Recording & Finalisation of Bids712, Register of Sales of Natural Products 713, Licensing of Tanks and Borrow Pits for Pisiculture 714,

D. FELLING OF TREES 132 - 134

Felling of trees obstructing view 715, Felling outside Railway Limits 716, Felling in Compound of StaffQuarters 717, Felling near Electrical or Telegraph Wires 718, Afforestation on Railway Land by ForestDepartment 719, Survey of Surviving Trees 720, Hasrvesting of Matured Trees 721, Maintenance of PrivateParties 722, Training of Staff 723.

CHAPTER VIII

A. ACQUISITION, MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL OF LAND 135 - 138

General 801, Ownership of Railway Land 802, Acquisition of Land 803, Relinquishment of Railway Land804, Outstanding Cases of Acquisition and Relinquishment of Land 805,

v

B. LAND RECORDS, DEMARCATION AND 138 - 149VERIFICATION OF RAILWAY BOUNDARIES

Land Records in CE's Office 806, Land Records in Divisional/Executive Engineer's Office 807, Demarcationof Land Boundaries 808, Boundary Stones 809, Boundary Pillars on Banks of Rivers 810, Construction ofBoundary Wall in Areas having Habitation 811(i), Provision of Fencing as a rule 811(ii), Other PreventiveSteps 811(iii), Land Plans 812, Verification of Land Boundaries 813, Removal of Encroachments 814,Division of Responsibility 815, Railway Land in Important Metropolitan & Commercial Cities 816, Maintenanceof Rights of Way 817, Religious Structures 818,

C. MANAGEMENT OF LAND 149 - 161

Basic Principles 819, Lease and License 820, Utilisation and Development of Available Land 821, Use ofSurplus Land 822, Licensing/Leasing of Railway Land to other Government Departments 823, Licensing ofRailway Land to Welfare Oraganisations, Private Schools etc. 824, Bulk Oil Installation on Railway Land 825,Laying of Oil Pipelines 826, Construction of Government and Private Buildings near Railway Land 827,Earning from Railway Land and its Monitoring 828.

Proforma for 'Land Boundary Verification Register' - Annexure 8.1(a)(Para 813(d) ).Plan showing Rly. Bounday Stones between Km… To…Annex.8.1(b)(Para 813(d)).Encroachment Inspection Register - Annexure 8.2 (Para 814(e) ).

CHAPTER IX

PREPARATION OF PLANS 162 - 176

General Procedure 901, Plans for Other Departments 902, Sizes of Drawings 903, Titles and Numbering ofDrawings 904, Scale of Drawings 905, Details on Drawing 906, Symbols and Colours on Drawings 907,Standard Drawings 908, Plans issued by the Chief Engineer's Office 909, Plans in Divisions/Dy. ChiefEngineer's, Assistant Engineer's and Section Engineer's Office 910, Completion Drawings 911, Care andFiling of Tracing 912.

Borders/Drawing Space as per BIS : SP-46-1988 - Annex.9.1(Paras 903(c) & 904(a).Folding of Drawing Sheets - Annexure 9.2(a) (Para 903(d) ).Folding of Drawing Sheets - Annexure 9.2(b) (Para 903(d) ).Abbreviations as per SP 46-1988 - Annexure 9.3 (Para 907(a) ).

vi

CHAPTER X

STORAGE AND USE OF EXPLOSIVES 177 - 182

General 1001, Issue of Instructions on Use of Explosives 1002, Observance of Rules 1003, Carriage ofExplosives 1004, Protection to Trains and RailwayProperty 1005, Precautions to be observed during Blasting 1006, Misfires with Electrical Method of Firing1007, Explosives Disposal 1008, Destruction of Explosives 1009.C H A P T E R XI

POLICE JURISDICTION AND 183 - 189SECURITY OF RAILWAY MATERIALS

General 1101, Police Jurisdiction 1102, Lodging of Complaints 1103, Cooperation with Government RailwayPolice 1104, Cognizable Offences 1105, Non-Cognizable Offences 1106, Powers of Arrest by Railway Staff1107, Warrants against Railway Staff 1108, Action by Railway Staff in cases of Attempted Sabotage 1109,Answering of Court Summons 1110, Prevention of Trespass 1111, Disposal of Human Bodies Found RunOver 1112, Disposal of Cattle found dead on the line 1113, Miscellaneous 1114.Proforma for Lodging FIR - Annexure 11.1 (Para 1103).

CHAPTER XII

BOOKS OF REFERENCE 190 - 103

Books of Reference 1201, Circulation of Technical Papers 1202.

List of Books of Reference - Annexure 12.1 (Para 1201).

H H H H H H H

vii

LIST OF ANNEXURES

Annexure No. Particulars of sketch/proforma Para reference Page No.

1.1 Proforma for Submitting Progress Report 107(b) 9

1.2 Progress Reports to be Submitted 107(b) 10by Various Units

2.1 Guidelines for Selection of Sanitation 202 (b) 33-35System

2.2 Revised Scale of Plinth Area 206 36-38

2.3 Proforma for Details of Occupancy 220 (c) 39

2.4 Proforma for Inspection Register 223 (b) 40

2.5 Proforma for Petty Repair Books/ 224(a) 41Complaint Book

2.6 Schedule of Colour Washing and 225(a) 42-43Distempering

2.7 Guidelines for leak Proof Flat Roof 226(d) 44-46

2.8 Register of Standard measurements 227(a) 67of Buildings

2.9 The Structural Steel and Timber-work 227(b) 68inspection Register

4.1 Categories of Stations for Provision of 402 (b) 85Passenger Amenities

4.2 Minimum Essentials Amenities at Each 403 86Category of Stations

4.3 Scale of Minimum Essential Amenities 403 87at Stations

4.4 Recommended Amenities 404 88

viii

LIST OF ANNEXURES

Annexure No. Particulars of sketch/proforma Para reference Page No.

4.5 Desirable Amenities 405 89

4.6 Passenger Amenities Details 408 90

5.1 Check list for Water Supply Scheme 502 111-113

5.2 Standards of Quality of Drinking Water 531 114

8.1(a) Proforma for Land Boundary 813(d) 159Verification Register

8.1(b) Plan Showing Railway Boundary Stones 813(d) 160

8.2 Encroachment Inspection Register 814(e) 161

9.1 Border and Frame detailing of Drawings 903 (c) & 904 (a) 171

9.2 Folding of prints for Storing in filing cabinet 903(d) 172

9.3 Abbreviations 907(a) 174-176

11.1 Proforma for Lodging FIR 1003 189

12.1 List of Books of Reference 1201 191-193

ix

1

DUTIES OF ENGINEERING OFFICIALS

CHAPTER IDUTIES OF ENGINEERING

OFFICIALS

A. DUTIES OF ASSISTANTENGINEER

101 General:- The Assistant Engineer isresponsible for the maintenance, execution andsafety of all works in his charge, for theaccuracy, quality and progress of new worksand control over all expenditure in relation tobudget allotments.

102 Essential Duties of AssistantEngineer:- The duties of the AssistantEngineer are detailed in various chapters ofthis Manual. The essential duties in respectof works are as under:

(i) Inspection of all structures and theirmaintenance in a satisfactory andsafe condition;

(ii) Preparation of plans and estimates;

(iii) Execution and measurement ofworks;

(iv) Verification of stores held by stock-holders;

(v) Submission of proposals forinclusion in the works programmeand revenue budget.

103 Knowledge of Rules andRegulations:- The Assistant Engineer shallobserve the rules and procedures relating tohis duties, as laid down in the General andSubsidiary Rules, various Manuals such as,the Indian Railways Permanent Way Manualand the Indian Railways Works Manual the

Indian Railways Bridge Manual, theEngineering Code and other DepartmentalCodes and Compendiums of Instructions.

He shall ensure that all staff under himis acquainted with the relevant rules andworking methods concerning their duties andthat they perform their allotted dutiesefficiently.

104 Co-ordination with Officials ofother Departments :- The Assistant Engineershould co-operate effectively with officers andstaff of other Departments in matters thatwarrant joint action.

105 Inspection by Higher Officials:-a) When the Assistant Engineer has to

accompany inspection of superior officers, heshould have with him the under-mentioneddrawings and registers for reference asrequired:

(i) Yard plans, colony plans showingservice and residential buildings;

(ii) Index plans and sections;

(iii) Progress reports on works;

(iv) Working time table;

(v) Inspection notes of higher officersand their compliance reports;

b) All inspection notes should receiveprompt attention.

106 Inspection by Assistant Engineer:-a) The Assistant Engineer shall conduct

inspection in his jurisdiction as per theschedules laid down by the Administration. Heshould maintain the records of the results

2


of his inspection and ensure compliance ofthe instructions.

b) The important inspections to be carriedout by Assistant Engineer are summarisedbelow -

i) Inspection of Buildings and StructuresThe Assistant Engineer shallsystematically inspect all buildings andstructures periodically as prescribed inpara 223, 227 and 228 of this Manual.He shall record brief details of repairworks to be carried out and plan to carryout the same.He should also examine the Petty RepairsBook maintained by Section Engineer(Works) at stations as prescribed in para224 of this Manual.

ii) Inspection of Water SupplyThe Assistant Engineer shall inspectwater supply installations as prescribedin para 554 of this Manual. He shallensure cleaning of overhead /underground storage tanks and properdisinfection of drinking water supply.

c) Inspection of Sewerage and DrainageSystem

Assistant Engineer shall inspectsewerage and drainage systems and ensuretheir efficient performance as prescribed videpara 632 of this Manual in association withthe concerned Officer of the MedicalDepartment.

d) Inspection of Railway affecting works/Railway affecting tanks (RAW/RAT)

Assistant Engineer shall jointly inspectwith civil authorities, all RAW/RAT before themonsoons every year and arrange for theirsafe maintenance to avoid any danger to

nearby tracks and structures. Records ofthese annual inspections should be kept inregisters as prescribed.

e) Assistant Engineer shall periodicallyinspect land and land boundaries in hisjurisdiction as detailed in paras 813 and 814of this Manual.

f) Assistant Engineer should associatehimself with various Committees and Groupssuch as the Colony Committee, the SanitationCommittee and the Station InprovementGroup as decided by the Administration andtake prompt action for items pertaining to hisjurisdiction.

107 Execution and monitoring ofWorks:-

a) The Assistant Engineer should ensurethat all works are carried out according to plansand specifications laid down. Important worksshould be set out personally by the AssistantEngineer.

b) Every work should be organised andso programmed that it progresses well and iscompleted in time. Periodical progress reportson works should be submitted to the DivisionalEngineer/Executive Engineer/Deputy ChiefEngineer on prescribed proforma as perAnnexure 1.1 to enable proper reporting andmonitoring at different levels as per Annexure1.2.

c) Copies of all contract agreement forworks should be maintained serially in theAssistant Engineer's Office. Before passingmeasurements recorded by Section Engineer(Works), he should carry out test check asspecified.

3


108 Control Over Expenditure - TheAssistant Engineer shall exercise due care inforwarding requisitions for materials and toolsto Divisional office for the execution of newworks and maintenance of works, ensuring inall cases that the expenditure is within thebudget allotment and provided for in thesanctioned estimate.

109 Water Supply : Adequate watersupply at each loco & coach water points,stations, platforms, staff colonies and servicebuildings should be ensured. In advance ofthe hot weather as well as during hot weather,when shortage of water is experienced incertain areas, the position at sources of supplyshould be carefully watched and timely actiontaken to deepen failing wells or to establishalternative sources of supply.

110 Land Management - The AssistantEngineer should take necessary action formanagement of land and shall preventencroachments and protect the land fromunauthorised use. He should organise treeplantation, and horticulture.

111 Training - The Assistant Engineershould interest himself in training allprobationers sent to him for training and seethat the training is given according to thespecified programme. He should periodicallyexamine the notes made by them.

112 Witnessing Payments to Staff - Asfar as possible, payments to staff shall bemade through cheques. Wherever cashpayments are made, the Assistant Engineershould witness payments to workmen underone or more Section Engineers every quarterby rotation. This should be done by surprise.

113 Inspection of Offices and Storesof Inspectors - The Assistant Engineer shallcarry out inspection of each SectionEngineer's office and stores at least once ayear. Surplus/inactive items should beidentified during such inspections and actionfor their disposal/redistribution taken.

When checking Stores, he should payparticular attention to the imprest stores andits distribution, engineering indicators,protection equipment and other important itemsof Stores.

114 Staff Matters - The AssistantEngineer will ensure, that -

(1) strict discipline is maintained withinthe frame work of the rules;

(2) service and leave records aremaintained correctly and upto date;

(3) appeals and representations aredealt with promptly;

(4) selections for the various posts likeartisans are held in time and thevacant posts promptly filled up;

(5) all the subordinates and otherstaff working under him receiveproper training in maintenancepractices, safety and protectionrules at the appropriate stage.

115 Relinquishment of Charge

a)Instructions regarding "Transfer-of-charge" contained in paras 143 & 144 of theIndian Railways Code for Engg. Deptt. (1993Edition) should be followed. The AssistantEngineers handing over and taking over

4


charge should carry out joint inspection ofworks as necessary.

Note: - Where Senior Scale Officers arethe lowest executive officers, their duties shallbe the same as prescribed for the AssistantEngineers in this Chapter.

B. DUTIES OF SECTION ENGINEER(Works)

116 Duties The duties of the SectionEngineer (Works) are detailed in the variouschapters of the Indian Railways Works Manual,the most essential being :-

(i) Inspection and maintenance of :

- Service buildings, staff quartersand other structures

- Approach roads;

- Water supply, drainage andsewerage systems;

(ii) Inspection of bridge works asassigned;

(iii) Execution of all new buildings/structural works;

(iv) Accountal and periodicalverification of stores and tools inhis charge;

(v) Maintenance of land boundaries, asspecified;

(vi) Removal of encroachments at hisheadquarters and at other places

in his jurisdiction as specified;

(vii) Afforestation and other horticultureworks.

(viii) He shall ensure proper training ofthe staff under him as prescribedin the training modules of the CivilEngineering Department.

117 Knowledge of Rules AndRegulations

a) He should be in possession of books,codes, manuals and compendium asprescribed in Annexure 12.1.

b) He shall be well acquainted with therules, regulations and procedures containedin these books concerning his work.

c) He shall ensure that all staff underhim are well acquainted with the relevant rulesand working methods and efficiently performtheir duties.

118 Co-ordination with PermanentWay, Bridge and other staff - The SectionEngineer (Works) should co-operate effectivelywith the permanent way, bridge, signalling,electrical staff, etc. where they are requiredto work jointly.

119 Inspections - The importantinspections to be carried out by SectionEngineer (Works) are summarised below:

a) The Section Engineer (Works) shallsystematically inspect all buildings andstructures in his charge and record briefdetails of repairs to be carried out, asprescribed in paras 223, 227 and 228 of thisManual.

5


The Section Engineer (Works) shallmaintain petty repair books at all stationbuildings and other important buildings asspecified in para 224 of this Manual and shallcheck them during his inspections and ensureprompt action/repairs.

b) The Section Engineer (Works) shallinspect bridge foundations and substructures.

c) Inspection of water supplyarrangements - Every Section Engineer(Works) shall have details of total requirementof water, sources of water and their yield,storage capacity and shortfall etc., along withcomplete water supply plans of yards and staffcolonies in his charge.

The Section Engineer (Works) shall alsohave complete history and data of tubewellsunder his jurisdiction and ensure testing ofyield of tubewells and other sources of water,once every year in co-ordination with Electricalstaff at the time when the sub-soil water is atthe lowest. According to the seasons i.e.summer or winter etc., water supply timingsand pumping hours should be decided inconsultation with the Electrical Department.At wayside stations, monitoring of pumpinghours should be entrusted to the StationMaster for effective control. He shall carry outperiodical review to assess the shortfall andplan for further augmentation. He shall controldistribution of water supply at main stations,while on way-side stations where engineeringstaff is not posted, the work may be assignedto pump drivers of Electrical /MechanicalDepartment.

The Section Engineer (Works) shallensure cleaning of overhead /undergroundstorage tanks. He shall be responsible for thedisinfection of water supply, wherever required.

d) Inspection of Sewerage and DrainageSystem - Senior Section Engineer (Works)shall periodically inspect sewerage anddrainage system and ensure their efficientperformance as prescribed vide para 632 ofthis Manual.

e) Section Engineer (Works) shallperiodically inspect land and land boundariesin his jurisdiction as detailed in para 813 and814 of this Manual and furnish necessarycertificates to the Assistant Engineer.

120 Musters

a) Each blank muster sheet before issueshould be initialled on the top by the AssistantEngineer. The attendance of artisans, helpersand other staff under him should be checkedby the Section Engineer (Works).

b) The leave availed of by staff shouldbe recorded in the leave register in the leaveaccount before the musters are despatchedto the Divisional office.

121 Execution of Works

a) The Section Engineer (Works) shallbe personally responsible for the accuratesetting out and execution of all works underhis charge according to approved drawingsand specifications.

b) He should plan every work, organiselabour in an efficient manner and maintaindetailed accounts of materials and toolsreceived and issued. He should exercisefrequent checks on the quality and quantumof work being done in his charge and submitprogress reports periodically as prescribed.

6


c) Additions and alterations to buildingsand structures carried out should be carefullynoted and quantities shown in the StandardMeasurement Register amended asnecessary with, the approval of theAssistant Engineer /Divisional Engineer.

122 Measurement of Works - EverySection Engineer (Works) shall be responsiblefor proper measurement of contractual worksas per powers delegated to him as per paras1315 to 1317 of the Indian Rlys. Code forEngg. Deptt. (1993 Edition). He shall maintainmovement register of Measurement Books andStandard Measurement Registers for works.

123 Works Affecting MovingDimensions - The Section Engineer (Works)shall refer to the Assistant Engineer forinstructions regarding works likely to affectmoving dimensions.

124 Imprest of Tools and Materials

a) The Section Engineer (Works) shallexamine all tools and plant with the artisansonce a month and replace the unserviceableor defective ones or arrange repairs.

b) He shall ensure that the materials andtools as per scales specified for maintenanceof building, water supply and drainage worksetc. are available and are adequatelydistributed at various points according torequirement. Recoupment of shortagesshould be effected without delay.

125 Accompanying ImportantInspections - When the Section Engineer(Works) accompanies a periodical or specialinspection, he should be in possession of thefollowing, besides the Works Manual, Scheduleof Rates and the Standard Specification for

Materials and Works etc.

(i) Plans and details of all importantworks, recently completed, on handor contemplated ;

(ii) Progress report of works; and anyother papers and plans that arelikely to be required for discussion;

(iii) Tape (15m & 2m ), and other toolsand surveying equipment requiredduring inspection.

126 Witnessing Payment to Staff

a) Payment to both permanent andtemporary staff will generally be made throughcheque. However, in case of cash payments,they will be made by the Pay Clerk in thepresence of the Section Engineer (Works) whois responsible for correct identification of thepayee and to satisfy himself that the correctamount is paid.

b) The certificate at the foot of thepaysheet should be filled in by theSection Engineer (Works) as payment of eachbatch of workmen is completed. If a personis not present, "Not paid" should beimmediately written against his name; whensubsequently payment is made, thekilometrage or place at which he is paid shouldbe entered and separately certified as suchon the paysheet.

c) If the witnessing official is notavailable, the Assistant Engineer mayauthorise another Subordinate to witnesspayment on the section.

127 Journal of Daily Duties - TheSection Engineer (Works) shall enter the works

7


performed daily in the T.A. journal showingtherein his movements by train, trolley or road-vehicle and submit the same to the AssistantEngineer every month.

128 Establishment

a) General conditions of Railway serviceand rules relating to the conduct and disciplineof Railway Servants are contained in the IndianRailway Establishment Codes, and Disciplineand Appeal Rules. Section Engineer (Works)should acquaint himself with these andmeticulously follow them.

b) Medical Examination - The SectionEngineer (Works) shall ensure that all Group'D' staff working under him are sent formedical examination for fitness for service.He should ensure that men in categories Aand B specified in Regulation No.3 of AppendixIII to the Indian Railway Establishment Codeare sent for periodical medical re-examinationas laid down in sub-rule 2 thereunder.

c) Service Books -(i) Service books forGroup 'D' staff should be prepared by theSection Engineer (Works) on the prescribedform as soon as appointments in temporary/permanent vacancies are made and submittedto the Assistant Engineer for verification andsignature. These should be carefullymaintained in the Assistant Engineer's orSection Engineer (Works)' office as may beprescribed.

(ii) All increments and promotions shouldbe noted in the service books, duly attestedby the Assistant Engineer.

d) Promotion to higher grades - TheSection Engineer (Works) should maintain inmanuscript form records of staff working under

him in which he shall enter awards or penaltiesof each staff as and when such entries arejustified.

e) Provisions in the Payment of WagesAct, the Workmen's Compensation Act andother regulations - The Section Engineer(Works) shall ensure that the rules laid downin the Acts and Regulations, as modified fromtime to time, are strictly complied with.

129 Correspondence and Records -The Section Engineer (Works) shall keep hiscorrespondence upto date and see that alloffice records, registers and stores ledgersare maintained properly and posted regularly.

130 Relinquishment of Charge

a) On relinquishing charge, the SectionEngineer (Works) shall prepare, in triplicate,the specified "Transfer-of-charge" statementwhich will briefly contain the following-

(i) Extent of section ;

(ii) Establishment matters (service andleave records);

(iii) Works in progress ;

(iv) Water sources that give trouble ;

(v) Certificate of stores check andcorrectness of stock;

(vi) General notes.

b) The statement referred in sub-para (a)should be signed by both the relieved &relieving Section Engineer (Works) Engineer,and two copies submitted by the relievingsubordinate to the Assistant Engineer who will

8


forward one copy to the Divisional/ExecutiveEngineer for record.

c) The relieving Section Engineer willexamine all books pertaining to rules andorders in vogue and all registers pertainingto the section to see that they are kept uptodate and initial them with date.

d) The Section Engineer (Works)handing over and taking over charge shouldtogether visit over the whole section, inspecteach work in progress, check staff, all toolsand plant and materials.

Errors and discrepancies, which arenoticed, should be recorded in the statementand the Assistant Engineer's special attentioninvited to them.

9


ANNEXURE 1.1Para 107(b)

PROFORMA FOR SUBMITTING PROGRESS REPORT

Progress report of sanctioned works for the month ......................

S.No. Plan Head Year of Sanction Name of Work State Division

1 2 3 4 5 6

Original Current Expenditure Outlay Target Date RemarksCost Cost upto previous year including

physical andfinancial

progress in%age

7 8 9 10 11 12

10



PROGRESS REPORTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY VARIOUS UNITS

S.No.Nature of Report By whom to be sent To whom sent

1. Progress report on itemised workssanctioned in Works Programme IOW AEN

2. Progress Report on itemised works in theWorks Programme/List of approved works. AEN DEN/Sr.DEN

3. Progress report on Deposit Works Sr.DEN CE

4. Progress report on Passenger Amenities Works Sr.DEN CE

5. Progress report of works under execution by CAO/C GM & PHODsconstruction units (irrespective of cost) Railway Board.

6. Flash Report for works costing over Rs.100 crores CAO/C Ministry ofProgrammeImplementationand to Rly.Bd.

11

PLANNING, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES OTHER THAN BRIDGES ANDHANDING OVER COMMISSIONED ASSETS BY CONSTRUCTION ORGANISATION TO OPEN LINE

CHAPTER II

PLANNING, INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE OF BUILDINGS ANDSTRUCTURES OTHER THANBRIDGES AND HANDING OVERCOMMISSIONED ASSETS BYCONSTRUCTION ORGANISATIONTO OPEN LINE

A. PLANNING AND GENERALINSTRUCTIONS

201 Siting of Buildings

a) Section 11 of the Indian Railways ActNo.24 of 1989 and the Government BuildingsAct No.IV of 1899 read in conjunction withSec.291 of the Cantonments Act No.II of 1924provide for the right to erect buildings on theirown land by Railways without having to obtainsanction of the Municipal or Cantonmentauthorities in whose area the site is situated.In urban areas, the Urban DevelopmentAuthority must be consulted and rules framedby them followed. Municipal or Local authoritiesmay, however, be consulted, whereappropriate, regarding water connections,sewer lines and sewage disposal and similarmatters.

b) The siting of buildings or otherstructures in the vicinity of tracks insidecurves should be avoided. The sites shouldbe carefully selected so as not to interferewith the visibility of drivers of trains or roadvehicles at level crossings. As far as possiblethe siting of buildings or other structuresshould be at boundary of land so as to avoidencroachment as also to ensure availabilityof land for future tracks.

c) Multi-storeyed quarters shall only beconstructed on consideration of land cost/landscarcity. For construction of independentbunglows, prior approval of General Managershall be obtained. In areas where bye-lawshave been notified by the Local Authorities,not withstanding the fact that the bye-laws arenot applicable for the Railway buildings, it wouldbe in the common interest to adopt such bye-laws as being good recommended practice.Where the provision exists in such bye-lawsfor fire-fighting arrangements, the provisionsindicated in National Building Code may befollowed.

d) In areas where bye-laws have not beennotified it will be desirable to adopt theprovisions of the National Building Code ofIndia 1983 Part III.

e) When a large number of Type 'I' and'II' type single storeyed quarters are to beconstructed, these should be built at least in2- unit blocks; subject to provision of adequatelighting and ventilation commensurate withoptimum land use.

202 Planning of Railway Staff Coloniesa) Orientation of buildings:- The chief aim

of orientation of buildings is to providephysically and psychologically comfortableliving inside the building by creating conditionswhich suitably and successfully ward offundesirable effects of severe weather to thebest possible extent.

From the point of view of lighting andventilation, the following climatic factorsinfluence the optimum orientation of thebuilding :-

12


(i) Natural light and temperature(ii) Prevailing winds(iii) Relative humidity

In the coastal areas, because of lessdiurnal variation of temperatures along withhigh humidity, the emphasis should be onprevailing winds.

In other areas, the emphasis should beon protection from solar radiation.

The best orientation from solar point ofview requires that the building as a wholeshould receive the maximum solar radiationin winter and the minimum in summer.

In important stations and where newcolonies are being set up as in the case ofnew Workshops the services of an architectmay be availed of for finalising the layout.

b) Water supply and drainage:- Adequatewater supply and sullage and storm waterdrains should be provided. The water supplysystem should be designed on the basis of atleast 200 litres/person/day (which includes 45litres for flushing requirements) due allowancebeing made for gardens. Where commonhydrants are provided, these may be equippedwith suitable anti-waste water taps. For multi-storeyed buildings, necessary static tanksmay be provided for fire fighting arrangementsin accordance with the regulations laid down.

Where water-borne sewerage ./ exists inthe vicinity, open drains and soak-pits shouldbe dispensed with and an adequateunderground system provided. For coloniesprovided with adequate piped water supply withoverhead storage facilities and where nosewerage system exists in the vicinity, anunderground sewerage system with one or two

septic tanks according to the layout of theground should be provided.

Guidelines for the selection of anappropriate sanitation system are given inAnnexure 2.1.

Groups of latrines or urinals should notbe located within 15 metres of living quarters,30 metres of any cook house or foodstall, 45metres of any well supplying drinking waterand should be located away from publicbuildings adjoining railway colonies.

c) Dust bins - These should beconveniently located with respect to thequarters and regularly cleared by theconservancy staff. In the case of multi-storeyed buildings garbage chutes may beprovided with opening in each floor witharrangements for closing the openings.

d) Shady trees - Shady trees likeGulmohur, Neem, should be provided alongservice roads at close intervals. Such treesshould be provided along the periphery ofparking areas and in the circulating areas inrailway stations. Some ornamental trees likeAlstonia, Kachnar, Bottlebrush, Cassia, Silveroak, Mulsari, Plumeria, Ashoka and shrubslike Chandani, Gardinia, Chinese Orange andJatruca may also be planted. Forbeautification of circulating areas of stations,service of the Horticulturist may be availedof. Gardens may be maintained in circulatingareas through voluntary agencies or businesshouses on terms and conditions to safeguardthe interest and rights of the railways.

f) Play grounds for children:- An openspace at an appropriate place in the colonymay be left for entertainment and sports ofthe employees and their wards.

13


g) Vendors' stalls / shops - These maybe constructed to scale, governed by localcircumstances and let out on rent to vendorsfor grain, meat, vegetable, fruit and generalrequisites. These should be constructed inrailway colonies only if shopping facilities arenot available within reasonable distance.General Manager's personal approval isrequired for such construction.

203 General Design Requirement ofBuildings

a) The plinth level of the building shouldbe carefully fixed based on the level of theland and general drainage features. Plinth levelshould be adequately higher than road level.Buildings at the time of their constructionshould be adequately protected againstdampness, treatment being governed by theparticular type of construction, location, soiland rain-fall.

b) Where considered necessary, anti-termite treatment should be done at the timeof construction.

c) Floor level of bathrooms should besuitably designed keeping in view the type ofsanitary fittings to be accommodated.

d) Location of sanitary fittings, inspectionholes, plumbing and other sanitary installationsshould be predetermined to avoid disfiguringand subsequent patching of the walls andfloors. Floor level should be suitably loweredto prevent water finding its way into the livingarea.

e) Mosquito proof shutters should beprovided in Type IV and higher type quartersand in the kitchen and toilets of all types ofquarters.

f) The position of conduits for concealedwiring and other service installations shouldbe determined in the initial stage inconsultation with Electrical and Signalling andTele-communication Departments.

g) Designs of important buildings, likehospitals, offices, station buildings, etc. shouldbe finalised in consultation with an Architect.

h) The layout of the kitchen in canteensand the serving counters therein, should besuch as to make the canteen functional.

i)No addition/alterations in an existingstructure should be carried out without theapproval of drawings and designs by the Hqrs.office. Particular care should be exercised tocheck the adequacy of the existing structureto withstand the loads further proposed to beimposed. No building drawing (including thatfor additions/alterations) should be approvedwithout the relevant designs being put up tothe concerned Engineer alongwith theDrawings. The designs should invariableinclude design of foundations.

The general arrangement drawing shouldhave the prior approval of an officers in Hqrs.not lower than the rank of SAG in the Office ofthe Chief Engineer(Open Line). Further, inStation Buildings and other importantstructures, no additions/alterations should becarried out without the prior approval of thegeneral arrangement plan by the concernedSAG officer in the office of Chief Engineer(Open Line).

j) It should be ensured that crossreference of the drawing and the designcalculations are endorsed on both of themand record should be maintained withequal care both for the design calculations

14


as well as drawings.

k) While checking the design, adequatedetails of physical condition of the existingstructure, details of any signs of distress,settlement, etc. as well as any relevant featurehaving bearing on the integrity and stability ofthe structure including type of soil should beintimated to the Hqrs.

204 Water Supply to Stations and StaffQuarters

a) The source, storage and distributionof water supply should be adequate and allinstallations maintained in a satisfactorymanner.

b) The question of adequacy in regard tothe source should be primarily consideredbefore preparing schemes for the expansionof a colony or for new colonies.

Before deciding on a new source ofsupply or when there is any doubt in regard topotability of water from an existing source,suitable test may be carried out in a reputedLaboratory. Medical Department may be calledupon to arrange periodical inspection ofexisting sources of water supply.

205 Scale of Fitments for WaterSupply, Sanitation and Drainage

a) At stations - as provided in para 414and 415 of this Manual.

b) The requirements for fitments fordrinking water drainage and sanitation in thecase of buildings other than residences shallbe in accordance with Table 2.1 for officebuildings and Table 2.2 for factories givenbelow -

15


TABLE 2.1 OFFICE BUILDINGS

________________________________________________________________________________SL FITMENTS FOR MALE FOR FEMALENO. PERSONNEL PERSONNEL(1) (2) (3) (4)________________________________________________________________________________i) Water-closets* 1 for every 25 persons 1 for every 15 persons

or part thereof or part thereof

ii) Ablution taps 1 in each water-closet 1 in each water-closet1 water tap with draining arrangement shall be providedfor every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water-closet and urinals.

iii) Urinals Nil, up to 6 persons1 for 7-20 persons2 for 21-45 persons3 for 46-70 persons4 for 71-100 personsFrom 101 to 200 persons add at the rate of 3 percentFor over 200 persons add at the rate of 2.5 percent

iv) Wash basins ← 1 for every 25 persons or part thereof →

v) Drinking water 1 for every 100 persons with a minimum of one onfountain each floor

vi) Cleaner's sink 1 per floor, minimum, preferably in or adjacent tosanitary rooms

* This may include adequate number of water-closets of European style, where desired.

16


TABLE 2.2 FACTORIES___________________________________________________________________________________________________SL FITMENTS FOR MALE FOR FEMALENO. PERSONNEL PERSONNEL(1) (2) (3) (4)___________________________________________________________________________________________________i) Water-closets* 1 for 1-15 persons 1 for 1-12 persons

2 for 16-35 persons 2 for 13-25 persons3 for 36-65 persons 3 for 26-40 persons4 for 66-100 persons 4 for 41-57 persons

5 for 58-77 persons6 for 78-100 persons

From 101 to 200 persons From 101 to 200 persons,add at the rate of 3% add at the rate of 5 %For over 200 persons, For over 200 persons,add at the rate of 2.5 % add at the rate of 4 %

ii) Ablution taps 1 in each water-closet 1 in each water-closet1 water tap with draining arrangements shall be providedfor every 50 persons or part thereof in the vicinity of water-closets and urinals.

iii) Urinals Nil, up to 6 persons1 for 7-20 persons2 for 21-45 persons3 for 46-70 persons4 for 71-100 personsFrom 101 to 200 persons, add at the rate of 3 percent.For over 200 persons, add at the rate of 2.5 percent.

iv) Washing taps with ← 1 for every 25 persons or part thereof →draining arrangements

v) Drinking water 1 for every 100 persons with a minimum of one onfountains each floor.

vi) Baths As required for particular trades or occupations.(preferably showers)

___________________________________________________________________________________________________Note 1 - For many trades of a dirty or dangerous character, more extensive provisions are

required than provided in item (iv) above.Note 2 - Creches, where provided, shall be fitted with water-closets (one for 10 persons or

part thereof) and wash basins (one for 15 persons or part thereof) and drinking water tap withdraining arrangements (one for every 50 persons or part thereof).___________________________________________________________________________________________________* Some of the water-closets may be of European style, if desired.

17


The above scales should be subject tofacilities being not less than those specifiedin Factories Act and the rules made thereunder.

In all cases of separate latrines usedby males and females, the indication boardsshould be conspicuously displayed.

206 Plinth Area for Various Types ofQuarters - The Plinth area to be adopted forvarious types of quarters by CentralGovernment departments is indicated in theMinistry of Works and Housing memorandumdated 14.08.1975, (copy of annexure to thememorandum is given in Annexure 2.2). TheRailways may adopt their own economical typedesign for each category of quarters keepingin mind the economics in construction. Thedesigns followed by Local bodies, HousingBoards, etc. will bring out the most economicallocal designs which could be referred forguidance.

207 Basic amenities in Staff Quarters:

All staff quarters should be provided withthe following basic amenities:-

(i) Kitchen

(ii) Individual bath room

(iii) Individual sanitised latrines.wherever individual latrines are notfeasible due to space constraints asin the case of back to back quarters,sanitised community latrines shouldbe provided.

(iv) Basic ventilation arrangements.

The above amenities may be providedon a programme basic wherever these are

not available.

208 Type of Flooring, Wall Surface andColour of Wood and Steel Work in General-The following standards should be generallyobserved unless otherwise directed by theChief Engineer :-

a) Hospitals and Dispensaries :

1) Important rooms and bathrooms :(i) Flooring .. Mosaic or terrazzo

or non-slipperyceramic tiles

(ii) Wall-surface.. Mosaic or Terrazzodado to 1200 mmin height anddistemper orceramic tiles onwalls anddistemper to ceiling

(iii) All woodwork .. White Paintand steel work

2) Unimportant rooms :(i) Flooring .. Cement concrete

except forbathrooms andtoilets wheremosaic is to beprovided.

(ii) Wall surface .. Cement dado to1200mm in heightand white wash onsides and ceiling.

(iii) All woodwork .. Painted buff or and steel work brown

18


b) Officer's quarters : (i) Flooring .. Mosaic flooring.

(ii) Wall surface .. Dado in bathroomswith same materialas flooring, orceramic tiles.

c) Other than officers' quarters : (i) Flooring.. Cement concrete.

(ii) Wall surface .. Dado in bathroomswith same materialas flooring. Skirtingin other rooms.

d) Staff canteens :(1) The kitchen, serving area, dish

washing place and dining hall -marble chip flooring or anti-slipperyceramic tile flooring and mosaic orceramic tiles dado of 1200mm inheight on the walls, of light colour.

(2) The kitchen and the dining areashould be white washed at closeintervals to prevent accumulation ofsoot etc., and exhaust fans shouldbe provided in the kitchen as perrequirements.

(3) In case, the kitchen is provided ina building with high ceiling viz. rooftrusses etc. a false ceiling with fireproof material, gypsum board etc.,may be provided so that the problemof having to clean dust, cobwebsetc. at places not easily accessibleis avoided.

(4) The following areas in the canteenmay be provided with suitablefinishing e.g. glazed tiles, so that

cleaning is easy:

(a) Serving counters

(b) Dish washing place in the kitchen

(c) About 1.2 metres high dado on thewalls above the kitchen counterslab.

(5) The slab counters provided in thekitchen for cooking purposes maybe covered with locally availablestone properly polished to enableeasy cleaning.

209 Use of New Materials: Newmaterials available in market may be used iffound suitable from the consideration of cost,contractability and aesthetic with the approvalof concerned SAG Officer.

210 Colours for Timber, Steel-Workand Walls in General - Colours for paintingof walls, timber work and steel work ofbuildings and structures may be as follows oras directed by the Chief Engineer :-i) All wood work - Oiled/polished or

in offices varnished orpainted withapproved brandof paints.

ii) Doors, windows - Frames of doorsand structural wood- and windowswork of Officer's and structuraland Senior Group C wood work white,Staff quarters cream, buff or

brown;correspondingvenetian andpanels cream or

19


light brown .Alternatively,doors andwindows ofOfficer's Quarters

may be polished orvarnished. Doorsand windowslikely to come incontact with watermay be paintedwith epoxy paintsof appropriatecolour.

iii)All woodwork of - Dark battleshipbuildings grey or buffand structures otherthan those under(i) and (ii) includingstation buildings andGroup C and D staffquarters.

iv)All steel work in - Aluminium or darkstation buildings, battleship grey

offices and residential quarters.

v) All steel work - Grey, aluminiumof platform shelters. or red.

vi)All steel work in - Dark battleshipfoot over, bridges, grey or red orsignal gantries goods aluminiumsheds and smallworkshops

vii)All steel work in - Dark battleshippower houses grey or aluminium.

and large workshops

viii)All steel work in - Dark battleshipwater tanks grey or red or

and stagings aluminium or black enamel.

ix)Water columns - Upper portion red,lower portionblack with bandabout 500 mmbelow pivot.

x) Plastered exterior - Pale creamof all buildings.

xi) Plastered interior - White/Pale Cream/of all buildings. Pale Green/Pale

Blue.

xii)Buffer stops - Structural part,black; buffer beamred

All exposed steel work should beprovided with a primary coat of red lead andappropriate final coats.

C.G.I. sheets should not be paintedunless they are in corrosion prone areas.

211 Rest Houses - Officers rest houseshould be separated from the subordinate resthouse. Provision should be made for dormitoryaccommodation for group 'D' staff.

Special attention should be paid by theAssistant Engineer and staff to the cleanlinessand satisfactory upkeep of all Rest Houses.

212 Allotment of Rest House.

The Rest Houses are primarily meant forRailway Officers/staff on duty. The allotmentof Rest House is regulated in terms of para1953 to 1955 of Engineering Code.

20


Railway Rest Houses should not beallotted to non-officials including Members ofParliament when their visits are not connectedwith Railway working. Railway Rest housescan be allotted under following conditions:-

(i) The occupation of Rest House byfamilies of railway officers accompanying himis permissible as per the following guidelines:-

(a) Earning or married children or closerelatives of the Railway officers whenaccompanying him (either on duty or on leave)may be permitted to stay in the rest house onpayment of charges to be fixed by the Railwayin consultation with the FA & CAO. The officerwill, however, have to accommodate them inthe accommodation allotted to him. Additionalaccommodation may only be provided at thediscretion of controlling officer when notrequired by other officers at the charges fixedby Railway in consultation with FA & CAO.

(b) Spouse and dependent children anddependents (as permitted in Pass Rules andclose relatives) when escorting/accompanying them may be permitted tooccupy the rest house if it is available for shortdurations not exceeding four or five days andonly occasionally. The charges to berecovered from the family will be as for theofficer on leave. For the other members thecharges are recovered as per (a) above. Inthis case also no additional accommodationwill be provided for the relatives. They willhave to be accommodated in theaccommodation allotted for.

(c) If an officer occupying a rest houseon duty is recalled to the headquarters andhis family has to stay in the rest house becausethey are unable to proceed with the officereither because of non-availability of

accommodation in the train or for any otheradministrative reason such as the officer flyingback etc., the family can continue to stay inthe rest house free of charge till they are ableto proceed separately on a special Pass or tillthe officer was due to return as per the originalschedule, whichever is earlier.

In case, however, the family wants to stayon for a few more days of their own, thecharges will have to be paid as at (b) above.

(d) When the officer is staying in a resthouse with proper permission at hisheadquarters station he is being permitted touse it as residence. Therefore, whenever heproceeds on duty the rest house continues tobe residence for his family.

(ii) Members of the ZRUCC and DRUCCincluding Members of Parliament attendingmeetings of respective Committees orparticipating in conducted tours organised bythe Railways can be provided accommodationin Rest House free of charge.

(iii) Railway Rest House can be allottedto the officers and staff of CRIS on paymentof normal charges applicable to railway staffon duty if rest house is not required by railwayofficers/staff and also the staff of CRIS aresolely engaged in specific assignment indevelopment and implementation of OISproject on production of certificate to this effectfrom their employer.

(iv) Railway Rest House can be allottedto the officers on transfer as per the followingguidelines:-

a) In case of permanent transfers, in thefirst instance, occupation of the Rest Houseshould be permitted for ten days only.

21


b) Use of Rest House accommodationfor residential purposes beyond ten days maybe permitted only on submission by the officer,of a certificate from the competent authorityto the effect that "the officer has formallyapplied for allotment of pooled accommodationand that the same is not available."

c) These instructions shall not apply inthe case of temporary transfers.

v) The Railway Rest House and RestRoom can be allotted to non-railwayGovernment officers on tour. The Rest Houseshould be booked not earlier than one monthin advance only if not required by railwayofficers. The Rest House should be bookedinitially for a period of 4 days only. If the officerfailed to occupy the Rest House, half rates forthe period of booking should be charged unlessthe room is taken up by some other officer.Following non-Railway government officerscan be permitted to occupy railway Rest Houseon duty:-

a) Officers of the Posts and TelegraphsDepartment having free duty passes in thearea covered by the (Railway) pass.

b) Officers of the Special PoliceEstablishment and Government RailwayPolice working on Railways.

c) All officers serving under theconciliation Officers, Railways and SupervisorRailway Labour.

d) The officers of the Audit Department(Railway Wing) and Special RailwayMagistrates.

e) The Officers of the Industrial SecurityInspection Team of the Intelligence Bureau

(Ministry of Home Affairs).

f) The Commissioners of DepartmentalEnquiries or other officers of Central VigilanceCommission when on duty in respect ofenquiries of Railway Officers.

213 Railway Institute

Railway Institute with its ancillariesshould be considered as a club provided andmaintained rent-free for the benefit of railwayemployees. The incidence of cost ofmaintenance and upkeep of railway institutesas between the Railway administration and theInstitutes shall be in accordance with theprovisions contained in paras 1937 and 1938of the Indian Railways Code for Engg. Deptt.(1993 Edition).

214 Construction of R.M.S. Buildingsin Railway Premises

The R.M.S building and maintenanceworks will be carried out by the Railways onthe following terms and conditions:-

(i) RMS building will be constructed bythe Railways according to theapproved design/plans to befinalised after mutual discussionbetween the Railway administrationand the Postal authorities. Funds forthis will be provided by Postaldepartment in instalmentsequivalent to the anticipated outlayduring the particular year.The Railway administration willcharge the usual supervisioncharges as per the extant rules fordeposit works. The building shallbe maintained by the Railway and

22


the maintenance charges for thesame will be borne by the Postaldepartment.

(ii) Rent, depreciation and maintenancecharges shall be governed inaccordance with para 1943 of theIndian Railways Code for Engg.Deptt (1993 Edition).

In the case of additions and alterationsto existing buildings constructed at Railway'scost for the R.M.S. the additions andalterations to them should be carried out atRailway's cost. In case such additions andalterations are substantial or require abnormalheavy repairs of the existing portion of thebuilding, the cost of such repairs/additions /alterations should be taken up as part of thecost of the building for purposes of reckoningits rent.

For buildings constructed at the cost ofthe Postal department, additions andalterations should however be carried out atthe cost of the Postal department only.

In the case of lateral extension of RMSbuildings to add additional plinth areas, theRailway will construct it as deposit work afterensuring that such extensions would bepermissible after taking into consideration thepresent and future traffic needs of Railways.As regards carrying out vertical extensionsto the existing RMS building constructed atthe cost of and owned by the Railways, suchextensions will be carried out as deposit workat the cost of Postal Department. Theownership of such vertical expansion will vestwith the Postal Department. The rent for theland in such cases will be fixed on the followingbasis in the ratio of area added to the totalarea available after addition. For example if

100 sq. metre is available in the existingrailway buildings and another 50 sq. metre isadded by way of vertical expansion as adeposit work, rent for the land will be charged,in the ratio of 50/150 = 1/3 i.e. one third of therent for land on which the existing buildingstands.

215 Buildings for Railway Police : Theoffice and residential buildings for GovernemntReserve Police shall be dealt in accordancewith para 1957 to 1959 of the Indian RailwaysCode for Engg. Deptt. (1993 Edition).

216 Construction of Quarters/Barracks for GRP Personnel by the Railway:

(i) Provision of barracks : Railway willcontinue to provide barracks for GRPPersonnel by including the works in theirWorks Programme, on need basis,subject to the usual checks as applicableto the other Works Programme proposals.

(ii) Provisions of quarters:

(a)Leasing of Railway land for quarters:

The responsibility of provision quartersto the GRP Personnel primarily rests with theState Governments. However, with a view toencourage State Governments to provide moreand more quarters to GRP, Railway landwherever sparable, may be leased to them ata concessional rate of 3% per annum of themarket value of land (both for covered andopen areas) for a period of 30 years for thespecific purpose of construction of quartersfor GRP. The lease charges for this purposewill, however, be subject to periodical revisionafter every 10 years based on updating of theland price.

23


Land to be leased should be based onminimum requirement consistent with theneed for quarters and should preferably belocated on the periphey of the Railwayboundary.

(b) Construction of Quarters:

Construction of quarters for GRP on theland so leased is to be done by the StateGovernment out of their own funds. Whileleasing land, it should be enjoined on StateGovernments that they construct the quarterswithin a specified time span failing which theland will revert back to the Railways.

If the State Governments are notprepared to construct the quartersthemselves, Railways may take up theconstruction work on deposit terms. Funds forthis purpose will be provided by the StateGovernment concerned in instalmentsequivalent to anticipated outlay during aparticular year. The Railway Administrationwill charge the usual supervision charges asper the extant rules for deposit works.

The quarters will be constructedaccording to the approved design/plans to befinalised after mutual discussion between theRailway Administration and the StateGovernment concerned in either case, i.e.,whether construction is done by StateGovernment on their own or by the RailwayAdministration on deposit terms.

iii) Ownership/maintenance of quarters:

The ownership of these quarters will vestwith the State Government concerned.

The quarters shall be maintained by the

Railway and the maintenance charges forthe same will be borne by the StateGovernment concerned.

Railway will, however, have the option toacquire the quarters at any time by payment fthe depreciated cost of the building inaccordance with the Railway rules, whichprovide for depreciation at the rate of 1/65 peryear at present.

217 Provision of Chicks andVenetian Blinds -

Chicks or Venetian blinds as consideredappropriate may, if considered necessary, beprovided to the following buildings, preferablyon the West and South sides:-

a) Hospitals

b) Rest Houses

c) Running Rooms

d) Offices at Railway headquarters

e) Officer's bungalows and quarters ofSenior Class III staff, if of open type.

In exceptional localities where shadetemperatures are high or in buildings close toa public thoroughfare, special sanction forprovision of chicks or Venetian blinds may beapplied for. Provision of chicks or Venetianblinds in quarters will be subject to recoveryof hire charges as per provisions of the IndianRailways Code for Engg. Deptt.

218 Additions and Alterations toQuarters

a) Additions and alterations to staff

24


quarters only of a temporary nature may bepermitted to be done by the occupant underpara 1976 of the Indian Railways Code forEngg. Deptt. (1993 Edition) with the priorapproval of the Senior Divisional Engineer andon the specific understanding that the occupantwill dismantle the same at the time of vacationof the quarters.

b) Additions and alterations of apermanent nature shall not be carried outwithout competent sanction. When an existingbuilding is to be enlarged or extended, theexternal architectural features of the oldstructures should be adhered to as far aspossible.

c) Additions and alterations to standardtype quarters should not be carried out,without the prior approval of the ChiefEngineer.

219 Block Numbering of Buildings andStructures

Every building or structure in a stationyard, railway colony, and between stationsshould be numbered according to suchinstructions as may be issued by the ChiefEngineer so as to facilitate reference incorrespondence, the correct number beingentered in the Building Register.

220 Building Registers - Buildingregisters in Chief Engineer's Office andDivisional Engineer's Offices shall bemaintained up-to-date and show completedetails of each structure as per para 1977 ofthe Indian Railways Code for Engg. Deptt.(1993 Edition). Replicas of these registerswill be maintained in the Accounts Offices.The Senior Divisional Engineers should advisethe Accounts Officers of the construction of

new structures and alterations or additions toexisting structures and the costs thereof, asand when carried out.

221 Transfer of Buildings

a) Each Department is responsible forthe allotment of staff quarters under its control,preference being given to essential staff. Thetransfer of vacant staff quarters from onedepartment to another should not be effectedunless approved by the Housing or QuartersCommittee.

b) In the case of transfer of staff quartersfrom one department to another, thedepartment concerned will carry out thetransfer in the presence of Section Engineer(Works) by giving due notice to the AssistantEngineer. The Section Engineer (works) shallmake out a handing over /taking over memo,listing out the details of deficiencies noticedand get it signed by the occupant. This memowill be forwarded to Divisional Engineerthrough Assistant Engineer after duly pricingthe damages, if any, to enable the departmentconcerned to recover the cost of damageattributable to the occupant.

c) In the case of occupation of quartersby a new occupant, the Section Engineer(works) will be contacted by the allottee withthe allotment order for obtaining the key ofthe quarters. The Section Engineer (Works)will prepare a handing over memo listing outthe fittings and deficiencies and get it signedby the occupant. One copy of the Memo willbe submitted to the Divisional Engineer throughthe Assistant Engineer. One copy will be givento the occupant, one page will be earmarkedfor each residential quarters to record detailsof occupancy. Signature of the occupants will

25


be obtained on this register, whenever thereis a change of occupancy. The proforma forthis register in given Annexure 2.3.

d) In the case of new service buildings,the Assistant Engineer will fix a date forhanding over of the building for use to thedepartment concerned, who will arrange fortheir representative to be present for inspectionand taking over of the building. The SectionEngineer (Works) shall be deputed torepresent the Engineering Department forhanding over.

e) In the case of buildings constructedby the Construction Department, the open linewill take over the same after joint inspectionat the level of Assistant Engineers. The Openline Assistant Engineer will allot a number tothe building and enter the details of the buildingin the building register duly intimating allconcerned.

222 Responsibilities of StaffOccupying Quarters

a) All staff are under obligation to keeptheir quarters and compounds in a clean andtidy state and to obey all sanitary rules thatare in force.

Before occupying railway quarters, theoccupant should satisfy himself of theircondition and sign the prescribed form.

b) Cooking except in kitchens or placesspecially provided is forbidden.

c) The occupant is responsible fornotifying the vacation of his Quarters and forgiving reasonable notice to the Works,Electrical and telecom staff for inspecting it inhis presence. The Works and ElectricalSupervisor in-charge should inspect thequarters and submit an estimate of damagesattributable to the occupant to enable thedepartment concerned to recover the cost. Ifthere is an interval of time from date ofvacation of quarters to next occupation, theSection Engineer (Works) should makenecessary arrangements for its safe custody.

It is the responsibility of the Engineeringstaff or Special staff where appointed to seethat the occupants adhere to the instructionslaid down. Any breach of instruction shouldbe reported to the occupant's immediatesuperior.

223 Vacant Railway Buildings

a) As far as possible, no railway quartersshould be allowed to remain unoccupied. TheSection Engineer (Works) should send a returnon buildings lying vacant at the end of everymonth through the Assistant Engineer to theDivisional Engineer who will take necessarysteps in regard to their occupation.

b) A return of vacant buildings should besent by the Divisional Engineer's Office to theAccounts Department /allotment authority atthe end of every month.

26


B. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OFBUILDINGS

224 Inspection and Repairs

a) All buildings shall be systematicallyinspected by the Section Engineer (Works)and particulars for repairs submitted to theAssistant Engineer. Repairs requiring urgentattention should be carried out expeditiously.

b) The inspection will be recorded in theInspection Register as per proforma given inAnnexure 2.4. One page will be allotted foreach building.

c) The insides of staff quarters shouldbe inspected in the presence of or with priorconsent of the occupants.

d) The Assistant Engineer should inspectas many buildings as possible particularlythose requiring heavy repairs and arrange forall repairs to be carried out in good time.

e) Section Engineer (Works) shouldinspect all the buildings, water supplyinstallations, sewerage installations anddrainage arrangements once a year.

f) All structures (including those carryingadvertisement hoardings) situated alongsidethe running lines, particularly in the suburbansections, should be thoroughly inspected bythe Section Engineer (Works)/Junior Engineer(Works) once in 6 months by rotation in orderto ensure the integrity of their components withspecial reference to fitments like corrugatediron sheets which are likely to get loose andbe impelled towards the adjacent track bygusts of wind or by the aerodynamic forcesgenerated by the passage of fast trains in theirproximity.

g) In monsoon period, repairs orrenovation works should not be carried outexcept pointing and work considered to beurgent.

h) Requisition for repairs and renovationworks should specify the dates of previoussuch works without which work orders shouldnot be issued.

i) Planning of repairs should be basedon the inspections carried out as mentionedabove and should be completed well in timeto enable the repairs being done under theannual zonal contract which commences from1st July of each year.

225 Monitoring of Maintenance

a) Petty repair books at stations - At eachstation, a "Petty repair book " shall bemaintained as per proforma given in Annexure2.5. In this, the station Master will enterrepairs required to service buildings and staffquarters as brought to his notice. The SectionEngineer (Works) should inspect the booksfrequently and attend to the repairs. Actiontaken on the Station Master's notes should bebriefly recorded in the book itself. Items ofdays to day maintenance only shall berecorded by the staff in the petty repair books.Any request for major additions or alterationsin the buildings shall be addressed toDivisional/Asst.Engineer. The DivisionalEngineer and Assistant Engineer shouldexamine and initial the registers during theirinspections and issue such instructions asconsidered necessary.

b)(i) In major stations and colonies where theSection Engineer (Works) isheadquartered, a complaint book maybe kept in his office wherein the

27


occupants of staff quarters can enter thecomplaints. This book is to be seen bythe Section Engineer (Works) frequently.

(ii) Colony Committees should be formed inbig colonies having more than onethousand quarters normally. Committeewill be different from Station ImprovementGroups and the Housing Committeealready working at various stations. Oncertain stations there may be more thanone colony committee. They should beorganised in such a way that eachcommittee has well defined functions tolook after.

(iii) The following persons shall constitute theColony Committee.

(i) Assistant Engineer will be thechairman of the Committee

(ii) Assistant Divisional Medical Officer

(iii) Health Inspector

(iv) Section Engineer (Works) in chargeof the colony maintenance

(v) Foreman/chargeman incharge ofthe electric maintenance

(vi) One representative of each of thetwo recognised unions

The representatives of the unions will beresidents of that colony and their nominationwill be done in consultation with the concernedstation branch of the union.

Periodicity and agenda for the meetings: This Colony Committee will hold meetingonce in every two months by giving 7 days

notice to the members. Other colony residentsmay be co-opted also to attend these meetings.The following items will fall under the purviewof the colony committee:

(i) Upkeep of the colony includingcleanliness of quarters, theirmaintenance, roads, drains, watersupply, sanitation, boundary wall,street lighting, etc; priority beingaccorded in the following order :

- repairs to ensure structural integrityof building

- repairs to leaky roof

- repairs to outside doors & windows

- water supply

- drainage arrangement

- roads & others

(ii) Improvement to substandardquarters;

(iii) To arrange disposal of waste fromcolony;

(iv) Prevention of encroachments byoutsiders as well as by railwaymen;

(v) Prevention/action for eviction ofencroachment with the assistanceof RPF staff;

(vi) Prevention of cattle nuisance in thecolony;

(vii) Subletting of quarters.

28


c) A list of passenger amenities providedat each station is kept with the station master.The Section Engineer (Works) inspecting thestation will verify if the amenities indicated inthe list are maintained properly and take actionfor repairs wherever required.

d) Colony Committee for maintenance:-Colony Inspection Committees shall be formedfor large colonies as specified by the RailwayAdministration. These shall normally consistof representatives of Engineering, Medical,Operating and Electrical Departments andrecognised Trade Unions. The inspection shallbe once in three months and Inspection reportsubmitted to the respective branches forattention. The Section Engineer (Works) shouldattend to the inspection notes pertaining toEngineering items and action taken should bebriefly recorded in the Building InspectionRegister.

e) Service Improvements Group'sinspection of stations :

Service Improvement Groups (SIG) shallbe formed at various levels for inspecting allthe important stations. Representatives ofEngineering, Medical, Operating and ElectricalDepartments shall be the members of the SIG.The Section Engineer (Works) being a memberof this group, has a part to play in this schemeby attending to the following items:

(i) Checking up of the water tapsprovided for their working conditionand water stagnation around thetaps as well as on the platform;

(ii) Clearing up of platform walls ifdefaced by pasting of unauthorisedposters;

(iii) Ensuring repairs of platform drainsand washable aprons and sidedrains; expeditiously;

(iv) Maintenance of toilet facilities inWaiting Halls, Waiting Rooms,Retiring Rooms, as well as checkingup of availability of water, arrestingwastage of water in the taps, andhydrants for carriage filling byplugging leaks in time;

(v) Ensuring periodical painting/distempering/white washing of theRefreshment Rooms and kitchen,and attending to repairsexpeditiously.

226 Periodical Maintenance Works

a) Exterior and interior walls : As far aspossible, plastering to exterior of brickmasonry should be avoided. No colourwashing should be done to the outside ofstructures built with coursed or uncoursedrubble stone. The schedule of distemperingcolour washing and white washing of buildingswill be as indicated in Annexure 2.6.

b) Painting of wood work and steel work:-Painting of the interior wood or steel workshould normally be done once in 5 to 7 years.Doors, windows and ventilators of kitchensand pantries may be painted once every twoyears or more frequently at the discretion ofthe Assistant Engineer. Steel columns offootings when buried in ground should beencased in cement concrete well above groundlevel. This is to be done in the case of footover bridges, columns of platform shelters,water tank stagings, etc.

c) Maintenance of (valley gutters, vertical

29


down take pipes of service buildings andplatform covers) should be attended beforecommencement of monsoon to ensure properdrainage.

d) Guidelines for a leak proof flat roof isindicated in Annexure 2.7 .

227 Standard Measurement Registersfor Buildings

a) Standard measurement registers in theformat given in the Annexure 2.8 shall bemaintained in the offices of the DivisionalEngineer, Assistant Engineer and the SectionEngineer (Works). Authorised copies of thesewill be maintained in the Accounts Office forreference and checking of quantities enteredin measurement books for annual repair workscarried out.

b) The entries made in the registersshould be correctly amended when alterationsor additions to structures are carried out orwhen new structures are built. (Annexure 2.9).

c) The block Nos. entered in the standardmeasurement registers should correctly tallywith the corresponding entries in the buildingregisters.

d) The measurement books from whichthe entries are carried into the standardmeasurement registers should be securelypreserved in the Divisional Engineer's Office.

e) Standard measurement registers maybe utilised for the estimating of quantitiesfor periodical white-washing or colour washingand painting as and when required. Particularsof repair works should be carefully scrutinisedby the Assistant Engineer before applying forsanction.

f) Date of whitewashing and paintingdone blockwise should be indicated on thebuilding.

30


C. INSPECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL AND TIMBER WORK BY ASSISTANTENGINEERS AND SUPERVISORS

228 Periodical Inspection -

a) Every structure on the Section/Sub-division shall be inspected in detail by the SectionEngineer (Works)/Assistant Engineer as indicated below:-

By Sectional By AssistantEngineer (Works) Engineer

i) Structures such as workshops, One a year during One fifth everyrunning sheds, platform covers the prescribed year on a pro-and foot over bridges months. gramme basis.

ii) Cast iron, wrought iron or Once a year onpressed steel plate water tanks a programme As required.and stagings whether of steel basis.sections or rails.

iii) Structures with roof trusses Once a year 10% to 20% testduring the check inspectionprescribed of structuresmonth. under each group.

iv) Other structures in which timber,rail or steel work is used to support -do- -do-any part of the structure.

v) Tie rods of arched roofs excluding -do- ------jack arches.

vi) Wrought iron or mild steel tanks on -do- ----sleeper cribs at temporary wateringkilo-metreages

b) The Section Engineer (Works) shallrecord results in ink in the structural steel andtimber work inspection register in the formgiven in Annexure 2.8. and submit the sameby the prescribed date to the AssistantEngineer who should scrutinise the entries,issue such orders as deemed necessary and

return the Register. Prompt action shall betaken to carry out repairs required.

The Section Engineer (Works) shallaccompany the Assistant Engineer on thelatter's inspection of structures carried outduring the prescribed period.

31


c) The Assistant Engineer shall recordresults of his inspection in ink in the

Structural Steel and timber-workinspection register in form given in Annexure2.8, maintained by Senior Engineer (Works)and ensure expeditious compliance of notesrecorded.

d) Structures , the condition of whichwarrant special attention, should beinspected more frequently.

e) Entries in column "Condition ofstructure at the time of inspection" should bein the nature of statements. A defect, oncementioned, should not be omitted in futureyears unless it has been eliminated throughrepair in which case a note should be made tothat effect.

f) When, during inspection of buildings,the Section Engineer (Works) notices thebuilding to be unsafe for occupation he shallforthwith advise the occupant of the fact andalso advise the assistant engineer to get anotice issued to the occupant for vacation ofthe premises and to apprise the controllingofficer of the occupant of the premises.

229 Details of Inspection - Duringinspection, the following points should receiveattention:-

a) The condition of paint.

b) Whether any corrosion in steel ordecay in timber is taking place.

In the case of steel work connected tomasonry such as tie rods of arched buildingsand roof trusses, whether any corrosion isapparent near the masonry.

The condition of welds,rivets, bolts andtie rods particularly of water storage tanks;cast iron tank plates should be examined forany cracks.

Whether any deformation of the structurehas occurred.

Foundations and bearings with particularreference to tightness of anchor bolts.

The inspecting official shall make athorough examination of every part of astructure in all respects, using ladders andscaffolding for examining portions beyondreach from the ground. If so considerednecessary, the assistance of the Bridge staffmay be requisitioned for the purpose.

230 Erection of Steel Work and RoofTrusses -

The assembly and erection of steel workfor structures and roof trusses shall be carriedout in accordance with approved plans and"methods of erection" as drawn up by theEngineer-in-charge and shall comply with theIndian Railway Standard Specification for"Steel structures (other than girder bridges)".

231 Maintenance of Roads :

Maintenance of roads needs carefulplanning. Though repairs like filling up of potholes, resurfacing atbroken patches, shallcontinue to be done as per the condition ofthe road at site, the tendency to carry out aroutine resurfacing just to improve the outwardlook of the road should be avoided when it isnoted that such resurfacing has, in the past,not been durable. Such a situation may beindicative of an inherent weakness in thedesign of road structure vis-à-vis the vehicular

32


loads plying over it, or it could be due to poordrainage or a weak sub-grade. Therefore,when it is seen that the road resurfacing ingeneral is not standing well, the adequacy ofthe road structure design vis-à-vis loading andother aspects like drainage, sub-gradestrength, etc. need to be carefully analysed.Costs estimated of road reconstruction vis-à-vis repairs through resurfacing etc. taking intoaccount the respective life cycle costs shouldbe gone into before taking up any repairs.

232 Handing over of commissionedassets by Construction Organisation toOpen Line:

All structures and assets constructedand commissioned by ConstructionOrganisation as per the sanctioned estimatesshould be taken over by Open Line within 90days of commissioning of the said assets.

Joint inspections at the Inspectors' andOfficers' level between the Construction andOpen Line Organisations should be completedwithin this period. Any uncompleted work ordeficiencies noticed and jointly endorsed forcompletion/rectification by Construction andOpen Line should be listed out (alongwithanticipated cost wherever the works are to betackled by Open Line) and duly signed by theofficers of the 2 organisations not below therank of JA Grade. The SAG Officers ofConstruction and Open Line concerned shouldjointly decide the time schedule for makinggood the deficiencies and providing theresources i.e. manpower and material,required to the Open Line by the ConstructionOrganisation. On no account, the taking overof assets by Open Line shall be delayedbeyond 90 days of commissioning of theassets.

33


Extract of Railway Board's letterNo.91/lm(l)/20/1 dated 11th July 1991.

RDSO have circulated a monogramtitled "Technical Guidelines for disposal ofhuman waste "Vide their letter NO. CBS/BMC/W&S dated 28.2.91. The document deals withthe technical aspects of various types ofhuman waste disposal systems.

1.1. Proceeding from this monogram, otherliterature and the extant instructions,guidelines given in the following parasshould be adopted for selectingappropriate sanitation systems.

2. RATIONALEFollowing points are relevant while

selecting a human waste disposal system:-

2.1 Standard (cistern) flushing systems aremeant primarily to transport human wastefrom the toilet to the treatment plantusually located a few kilometres away,so as to provide a self-cleansing velocityin the sewers. Therefore, this standardflushing system is, appropriate onlywhere underground sewerage systemexists. The transported waste is treatedin a centralised (off-site) treatment plantin following steps:-

(i) Sedimentation (primary' treatment)of the highly diluted waste yieldingsupernatant and primary sludge.

(ii) Aerobic ('secondary') treatment ofthe supernatant from sedimentationtank, yielding treated waste water

(which is used for irrigation, or letinto waste bodies) and secondarysludge.

(iii) The primary and secondarysludges, i.e the concentrated wasteis treated by Anaerobic digestion,yielding digested (i.e treated) slurryand biogas.

2.2 Modern septic tank system is an on-sitedisposal method, which too uses'standard' flushing. The septic tank actsas sedimentation-cum-digestion tank:anaerobic digestion of the settled sludgeoccurs in its bottom zone, and thesupernatant has to undergo treatment('secondary') in a soakpit/filter bed. Useof septic tanks without follow-uptreatment is not permitted as the effluentfrom the septic tanks is hazardous frompoint of view of health and pollution. Sinceit is usually not possible to provide asoakpit/filter bed in built up urban areas,here septic tank system would not beappropriate.

2.3. The other on-site systems of sanitizedtoilets are:-(i) Bio-latrines (improved aqua

privies): In these a digester(anaerobic) is provided for similartreatment as used in a sewagetreatment plant. Only handflushingis allowed i.e. no tap or flushingsystem in the toilet.

(ii) Pour flush type: In these a soakpitis provided for treatment of thewaste. Here the handflush is


GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF SANITATION SYSTEM

34


allowed. This would not be suitablefor built-up urban areas and pitwould also require care andmaintenance by the users.

2.4 A minimum retention of 30 days isrequired for anaerobic digestion, while aseptic tank provides retention only for 2-7 days and hence the effluent from theseptic tank must have its main treatmentin a soakpit/filter while effluent from adigester can be discharged directly in adrain system.

2.5 There is a general shortage of watersupply in India and in some parts evendrinking water is scarce. Therefore, it hasto be seen that water is conserved tothe maximum extent possible and that itis not polluted; and the waste disposalsystems should be designed with theseends in view. This applies to both groundwater and surface water. In case of non-residential toilets at stations etc., andcommunity toilets provided with 'standardflushing' arrangements, instead of

flushing cisterns of 3 gallons capacity,the use of 'coach' handles should bepreferred so that only the required amountof water is used. In case of urinals,instead automatic flushing cisterns,dripping ferrules may be used toconserve water.

2.6 For providing soakpit /filter bed withseptic tanks the water table must be wellbelow their depth and the rain water fromsurface also should not interfere with theirfunctioning. Hence, these are not usuallysuitable where water tables are high orwhere ground slopes are flat.

3. Directions for selecting appropriate typeof toilet systems:

Based on the above rationale, directionsfor selecting appropriate toilet system aresummarised below:-

a) Where an underground seweragesystem can be connected, use a 'flush' typetoilet as under:-

_______________________________________________________________________________(i) Residential With no water Cistern flushing, (use good quality

toilets shortage cisterns preferably the newermodels using less than 3 gallons water/use)

(ii) -do- With water 'Coach' handle flushing shortage

(iii) Non-residential - 'Coach' handle flushing.toilets However, for toilets in retiring

rooms, rest houses, samearrangement as for residentialtoilets

35


c)In case of urinals at stations do notuse automatic flushing cisterns drippingferrules may be used.

4. All toilets on the Railways must besanitised on top priority programmebasis. Thus only flush toilets with under-ground sewerage, flush toilets with septictank systems (with soakpit/filter-bed forthe septic tank effluent and bio-latrines(also acquaprivy) are the approvedsanitised toilet systems for use on theRailways. Hence -

- all 'dry' (service type) toilets must besanitised.

- all septic tanks, if not provided withprescribed soakpit/filter-bed, they mustbe provided with these, if possible, orconverted into digesters by minimisingthe flushing so that the same tank canprovide clear minimum 30 days retention(in addition to the space for digestion atthe bottom).

b) Where an underground sewerage system is not available:-

(i) In built-up areas or in Bio-latrinesall other areas wheresoakpits or filter bedsare not feasible

(ii) On roadside stations -do-

(iii) In sparsely inhabited May provide Bio-latrines ornon-roadside stations septic tank system (with coachwhere filter beds are handle type of flushing)feasible (see para 2.6)

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________

36


ANNEXURE 2.2Para 206

Annexure to Ministry of works and Housing O.M.No.17020(4) /72-W.2 dt.14.8.75.

REVISED SCALE OF PLINTH AREA____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Type Area staircase Sleeping Cycle Remarks*

of circulation out shedunit balcony scooter

Garage_____ _____ _____ _____SQ.M SQ.M SQ.M SQ.M

________________________________________________________________________________________________________I. 34.00 5.00 7.45 2.50 Cycle shed 100%

II. 45.00 5.00 7.45 2.50 -do-

III. 55.75 5.00 7.45 4.20 Scooter shed 100%

IV. 83.60 5.50 7.80 4.20 -do-

V. 139.35 6.00 9.85 18.00 5% garage

Servants 18.60 4.50 - - -Qrs.attachedto main units.____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Notes:

1. These plinth areas standards shall beapplicable to the construction ofresidential accommodation in all placesin India.

2. Plinth areas proposed above are basedon the wall thickness achieved by usingthe standard brick size 9"x 4.5" x3"(nominal). When standard size bricksare replaced by modular bricks (20cm x10cm x 10cm) in course of time the plinth

areas specified above will not change.Where wall thickness has to be more fortechnical reasons, plinth areas may besuitably increased. In places where stoneconstruction is more economical and isnormally adopted. The plinth areas maybe suitably increased to add for additionalthickness of walls. In areas wherestandard size of brick is 10" increase ofplinth area to the extent of 4% in case oftype I, II and III quarters and 2.5% incase of type IV and V quarters will beallowed. In areas where local

37


specifications permit use of thinner wallssuch as 'accra' walling or timberconstruction, the plinth areas would bereduced suitably.

3(a) Sleeping out balconies shall be providedin regions of hot and dry climate and forconstruction which is more than twostoreyed. In the case of regions, with hotand humid climates, i.e, coastal regionswhere it is not customary to sleep outduring summer, sitting balconies with halfof the areas stipulated above, shall beprovided in lieu of sleeping out balconiesin places other than Bombay and Calcutta(for which reduced standards as indicatedat 3(b) will apply). In region of coldclimate, viz. hill stations glazed verandahin lieu of sleeping out balconies may beprovided with half the areas of sleepingout balconies. Where sleeping outbalconies are provided, facility for use ofterrace by occupants need not beprovided.

(b) The area of sitting out balconies inBombay and Calcutta will be 1.5 sq.mt

(16.15 sq.ft) for Type I, 2.5 sq.mt (26.90sq ft) for type II 3.5 sq.mt (37.65 sq.ft)for type III 4.5 sq.mt (49 sq.ft) for typeIV and 5.50 sq.mt (60 sq.ft) for type V.

(c) Areas of sleeping and sitting outbalconies may vary with the type design,depending on architectural and structuralconsiderations. The areas stipulated inthis statement are maximum that will beallowed.

(d) In hot and dry regions, sitting outbalconies must be provided for twostoreyed construction.

4 In the case of type I,II and III quarters,the standard plinth area may be exceededupto 2% when found necessary onarchitectural considerations. This is toallow for some flexibility in architecturalplanning.

5. In type V quarters, car garages will beprovided for 75% of the number of unitsto be constructed. Out of these 1/3rd. ofthe garages will be partitionedtemporarily, so as to provide scootersheds for remaining 50% of the allotees.Provision in planning and layout shouldbe made for construction of additionalgarages for cars to an extent of 25% ofthe number of residential units.

6. In the case of double-storeyed quarters,cycle or scooter sheds shall not beprovided. Also no scooter/ cycle shedswill be provided in Bombay and Calcutta.

7. In the case of main buildings, areas forstaircase/ circulation area is based on astair width of 3'-6" where bye-laws requiremore width than this, areas to be providedwill be increased suitably, for 4' wide stair,areas for stair shall be 6.5 sq.m.

8. Where local bye-laws so require,additional area for fire escape staircasewill be allowed.

9. Sanitary pipe shafts open to sky,wherever provided are not to be includedwithin the standard plinth areas.

10. Area required for services, such asgarbage chutes, electric sub-stations,pump room etc. wherever necessary willbe allowed over and above the standardplinth areas.

38


11. In multi-storeyed flats, where lifts arenecessary additional areas over andabove the standard plinth areas for thedifferent types, will be allowed for theprovision of one or more lifts and liftlanding.

12. In the case of construction of fourstoreyed and above in places other thanBombay and Calcutta in respect of typeI and IV, cycle/scooter sheds may beprovided separately or one or morequarters on the ground floor may beearmarked for covered parking of cyclesand scooters.

39


ANNEXURE 2.3Para 220(c)

Proforma for Details of Occupancy

RAILWAY

Divn:_______________ Station ____________

Area of the building Type_________ No. of Units_____in terms of No. of Rooms with dimensions:- Assessed rent per month

Rs._____Name of Building ____________ Rent on Electric Installation

per month Rs._____________Registered No. Capital cost of each Unit:

Assessed monthly rent :Pooled cost of each Unit:No.of taps outside :Inside :Latrine Common/Separate

______________________________________________________________________________________No. of Units Name of Occupant Designation Whether DeficienciesOccupied Married

orSingle

______________________________________________________________________________________(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________Rateof pay Date of Date of Remarks including Deficiencies/damage

Occupa- vacation date & nature of at time of vacationtion. repairs executed.

______________________________________________________________________________________(6) ( 7) (8) (9) (10)______________________________________________________________________________________

40


ANNEXURE 2.4. Para 223(b)

Proforma for Inspection Register

Division......................SECTION ENGINEER (WORKS)/................ Section ....................Sub Division .....................

Quarters No. ............. Situation .............Type Unit ................Building No. ............. Station ............._______________________________________________________________________________________________Sl. Date of Official Condition Condition of Condition ofNo. inspection inspected of roofs. doors/windows flooring/

plastering(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)_______________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________Initial of Nature of Details of Initials Initials Remarks ofInpsecting repairs to repairs of the of the InpsectingOfficials be attended done occupant IOW Officials

with date(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)_______________________________________________________________________________________________

Separate pages should be allottedfor each quarters/service buildings.

41


ANNEXURE 2.5Para 224(a)

PROFORMA FOR PETTY REPAIR BOOK/COMPLAINT BOOK_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Date : Sr. : Quarter : Name of occupant : Nature of : Repairs : Remarks for : Signature

No. : No : and designation : complaint : attended : not doing : of Section: : : : : on____ : repairs : Engineer: : : : : : : (Works)

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

42



Schedule of Colour Washing and Distempering

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Colour washing Interior White Interior

exterior plastered white washing distemperingsurface washing of kitchen

________________________ including and pantryAreas with Areas ceilingnot less with lessthan than1500 mm 1500 mmrainfall fallper year per year

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

I.Service Building:

1. Hospitals Once a Once in Once a Once in Once inyear 2 years year 6 months 2 years

2. Refreshment -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-rooms

3. Rest Houses -do- -do- Once in Once a -do-for Officers 2 years yearand Sub-ordinates.

4. Running -do- -do- Once a Once in -do-rooms year 6 months

5. Station Buildings:-

(a)Concourse, -do- -do- -do- - -do-waiting hallwaiting roomand bathroom

43


(b)Other -do- -do- Once in -- -do-rooms 2 years

6. Offices -do- -do- -do- -- -do-

7. Work shops -do- -do- -do- -- --and runningsheds etc.

8. Goods Sheds -do- -do- -do- -- --Transhipmentsheds,repackingsheds etc.

9. Gate-lodges, Once a Once in Once in -- --cabins etc. year 2 years 2 years

10.Schools -do- -do- Once a year -- --

11.Institutes -do- -do- Once in Once a Once inand clubs 2 years year 2 years

II.Residential Buildings:-1. Officers' Once in Once in Once in Once a Once in

Bungalow 2 yrs. 2 yrs. 2 years 2 yrs 2 years

2. Class III -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-staff Qrs.

3. Class IV -do- -do- Once a -do- --Staff Qrs. year

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Note: (1) Polishing mosaic or wooden parquette and red ochre flooring, replacing coloured

or white glazed tiles in bath room and lavatory, plastering external and internal surfacesand enamel painting, painting/varnishing wood work and painting steel work will becarried out only on condition basis.(2) "Building/Structures such as Cinema Houses, Latrines, Canteens, dining Halls-Maintenance of which is governed by the Statutory Acts such as Factories Act, MadrasCinema (Regulations) Act, etc. should be white washed/Colour washed at the intervalsas laid down in these Acts."(3) Colour Washing or White washing may be done to the interior of residential buildingson account of disinfection. When there is a change of tenancy, white washing may bedone to the kitchen and bathroom at the discretion of the Assistant Engineer.

44


1. Water proofing system on the roofsget deteriorated due to weathering effect andmay become ineffective due to developmentof cracks/debonding/ disintegration of waterproofing material etc. Stagnation of water dueto undulation in roof surface, provision of lessno. of drainage pipes or choking of same andimproper detailing at junction of parapet androof etc., are other major contributors inmaking the roof leaky.

2. BASIC REQUIREMENT OFARRESTING LEAKAGE OF ROOFS:

2.1 Provision of adequate slope:

It is absolutely essential that roofs areprovided with adequate slope to ensureeffective drainage. The slope of roof shouldbe such that the water gets drained off quicklyby achieving adequate velocity under influence

of gravity. A slope of 1 in 100 or steeper,depending upon the type of water proofingsystem, is required for effective drainage.

2.2 Provision of adequate openings:

Adequate openings in numbers and size,are necessary to allow the water to get drainedoff quickly. The number and size of openingsdepends upon the area of roof and intensity ofrain fall of the region in which building issituated. Rain water pipes having bell mouthinlet at the roof surface, give better drainageeffect. The spacings in between outlet pipesshould not be more than 6 m. The size of rainwater pipes, depending upon the average rateof rain fall and roof area, should be as givenin Table-1. Average rainfall intensity may beobtained from local office of Indianmeteorological deptt.

Annexure 2.7Para 226(d)

GUIDELINES FOR LEAK PROOF FLAT ROOF

Table-1Sizes of Rainwater Pipes for Roof Drainage

Dia of pipes Average rate of Rainfall in mm/h(Roof area, m2)

50 m2 75 m2 100 m2 125 m2 150 m2 200 m2

50 13.4 8.7 6.6 5.3 4.4 3.365 24.1 16.0 12.0 9.6 8.0 6.075 40.8 27.0 20.4 16.3 13.6 10.2100 85.4 57.0 42.7 34.2 28.5 21.3125 - - 80.5 64.3 53.5 40.0150 - - - - 83.6 62.7

45


2.3 Proper detailing at junction of roof withparapet wall:

Junction of roof with parapet wall is avulnerable location for leakage. It is necessarythat detailing at the junction of roof and verticalface of parapet wall is done very carefully.Following should be ensured:

I) The fillet (angular or concave, not convex)of 75mm should be provided all along thejunction of parapet wall with roof.

ii) Coping on top of the parapet wall shouldalso be provided with adequate slopealongwith the provision of drip course oneither side.

iii) Water proofing system should beextended from roof to parapet wall for aminimum height of 150 mm with a chase.General arrangements at junction of roofwith parapet are given in fig.1.

2.4 Expansion Joints:

Expansion joints in buildings/ otherstructures may become source of perennialseepage due to failure of expansion joint fillersand sealants. Expansion joint should betreated with suitable non-absorbent,compressible, non-brittle and water tightsealants so that no leakage occurs throughjoint. Joint fillers should confirm to IS: 3414 -Code of Practice for Design & Installation ofJoints in Buildings or IS:1838 (Pt.I or Pt.II)-Specification for Preformed Fillers forExpansion Joint in Concrete Pavement andStructures. Sealing compound should confirmto IS: 1834 - Specification for Hot AppliedSealing Compounds for Joints in Concrete.

General Arrangements for an expansion jointare shown in Fig. 2.

2.5 A water proofing system should havethe following properties:

a) It should be impermeable or should havevery low permeability.

b) It should have strong adhesion withsubstrata.

c) It should be sufficiently elastic so as towithstand expansion and contraction ofsubstrata due to temperaturefluctuations.

d) It should have high resistance to abrasionand cracking.

e) It should be resistant to ultra violet rays.

f) It should be breathable i.e. permit vapourtransmission.

g) Its application should be easy..

h) It should be durable.

3. PREVALENT WATER PROOFINGSYSTEM FOR ROOFS:

3.1 Various water proofing systemprevalent in our country are as under:

i) Lime concrete terracing

ii) Mud-Phuska treatment.

iii) Water proofing using polyethylene films.

46


47


48


iv) Water proofing using polymercementitious slurry coatings.

v) Water proofing using polymer modifiedbitumen membranes.

vi) Water proofing using bitumen felts.

3.2 Lime Concrete Terracing:

3.2.1 This system consist of laying,ramming & compaction of lime concrete to adesired slope . Lime concrete used in thissystem is a mixture of hydrated fat lime(conforming to IS 712) pozzolanic material(calcinated clay pozzolana conforming to IS1344) and concrete aggregate (broken burntclay bricks conforming to IS: 3068 or naturalstone aggregate conforming to IS 383)havingmaximum size 25mm. This system is suitablefor new as well as old roofs.

3.2.2 Application Procedure:

Various steps involved in this systemare as under:

i) Preparation of Lime Concrete:- Onepart of slaked lime and two parts of burntbrick pozzolana, by volume , shall bemixed on a water tight platform. This shallthen be sprinkled with required quantityof water and well ground in a mill or usingmechanical grinder to obtain limepozzolana mortar. Coarse aggregateand lime pozzolana mortar, in proportionof 21/2 :1 parts by volume, shall be usedfor preparation of lime concrete. In caseof hand mixing, coarse aggregate shallbe staked to an even surface on theplatform and lime pozzolana mortar shallthan be evenly spread over the aggregateand the whole thoroughly mixed in just

sufficient quantify of water to obtainconcrete of uniform consistency. Themixing shall be done by turning it overand over several times - until all theaggregate are covered with mortar anda concrete of uniform consistency isobtained. In case of machine mixing, twoand a half parts by volume of cleansaturated surface dry coarse aggregateshall first be fed into the mixer and thenone part, by volume, of lime. Pozzolanamortar shall than be added to the mixerand the content mixed well. Mixing shallbe continued until there is a uniformdistribution of the material. Finaladjustment of water, to obtain concreteof required consistency may be made byadding clear water, if necessary, andturning the ingredients in the mixer.

ii) Laying, ramming & compaction of limeconcrete:- Before laying of limeconcrete, all preparatory work describedin IS 3067 i.e. cleaning of roof surface,attention to cracks by filling with cementsand slurry, provision of adequatenumbers of opening and fillet at thejunction of roof and parapet wall shall becompleted. Roof surface should be maderough to develop sufficient bond betweenlime concrete and base concrete. Aftercleaning, roof surface shall be paintedwith hot bitumen 80/100 @ 1.7 kg/m2blended with coarse sand. Subsequently,laying of lime concrete shall be startedfrom a corner of a roof and proceeddiagonally towards centre and other sidesconsidering the slopes required fordraining the rain water smoothly. Theaverage thickness of lime concrete shallnot be less than 100mm. On flat roof,slope of 1 in 60 shall be given. However,in heavy rainfall area, slope of 1 in 40 is

49


recommended.

After laying it shall be initially rammedwith a rammer weighing not more than 2 kgand the finished to the required evenness andslopes. Further consolidation shall be doneusing wooden 'thapies' with rounded edges.The workmen will sit close together and beatthe surface lightly. The beating will normallyhave to be carried on for at least seven daysuntil the 'thapi' makes no impression on thesurface and rebounds readily from it whenstruck. In order to achieve more progress,ramming and compaction of lime concrete canbe done mechanically with the help of atamping machine developed by C.B.R.I.,Roorkee.

During compaction the surface shall besprinkled liberally with lime mortar and smallproportion of sugar solution (i.e. solutionprepared by mixing, 3 kg of jaggery, 11/2 kgof Bael fruit to 100 litre of water by boiling) ora solution prepared by soaking drynuts ofterminalia chebula in water, for obtainingimproved water proofing of concrete. Oncompletion of beating, the mortar that comeson the top shall be smoothened with a trowelor float.

iii) Curing:- The lime concrete aftercompaction shall be cured for a minimumof 10 days or until it hardens by coveringwith a thin layer of grass or straw whichshall be kept wet continuously.

iv) Treatment at junction of roof andparapet:- All along the junction of roofsurface with parapet wall, a strip of limeconcrete fillet shall be laid and finishedsmooth. Typical detail of treatment atjunction between lime concrete water

proofed roof finish and masonry walls areillustrated in the fig. 3.

v) Finish:- In case of accessible roof, onelayer of burnt clay flat terracing tiles(according to IS:2690 Part-1 and Part-2)may be laid over a thin layer of limemortar. However, in the extremecondition where there is considerableexpansion and contraction, two layers oftiles may be put on the top of limepozzolana concrete. These tiles shouldbe joined with non-shrinking imperviouscement mortar.

3.2.3 For more details, IS: 3036 - LayingLime Concrete For Water Proofed Roof Finish,may be referred.

3.3 Mud-Phuska Treatment:

3.3.1 Mud phuska treatment is a commoninsulating cum water proofing treatment usedin comparatively hot dry region i.e. Punjab,U.P. etc., where rainfall is not heavy. Thistreatment usually consist of the followingcourses:

I) A layer of hot bitumen 80/100 orequivalent.

ii) A coat of mud phuska of 100 mm averagethickness consisting of puddled clayconforming to specification as laiddown under IS: 2115.

iii) A layer of 25mm mud plaster consistingof puddled clay mixed with chopped straw30 to 35 kg per cubic meter of soil.

iv) One or two layer of tile laid on a bed ofmud mortar and pointed in 1:3 cementsand mortar.

50


51


3.3.2 Material:

i) Soil for Mud Phuska: The soil for mudPhuska shall be free from gravel andcoarse sand (of particle size greater than2mm), vegetable matter and fine kankarparticles. The soil shall also be free fromharmful and efforescent salts. The coarsematerial shall not exceed 25% by mass.The plasticity index of the soil shall bebetween 10- 15 percent. Generally soilsuitable for brick making is suitable formud-phuska.

ii) Soil for Mud Plaster and Mud Mortar:The soil shall be free from vegetableroots, gravel and coarse sand of particlesize greater than 2mm. The coarsematerial shall not exceed 10% by mass.The soil shall also be free from harmfuland efforescent salts. The plasticityindex of the soil shall be between 10-15percent.

iii) Mud Plaster: The mud plaster shall beprepared from soil conforming to aboveii). The dry soil shall be reduced to finepowder and mixed with water in a pit,adding wheat straw 6% by mass andcowdung 12% by mass. The mixtureshall be allowed to rot for a period of notless than 7 days. During this period, itshall be pugged manually using spades,if necessary, to get a homogeneous massfree from lumps and clods.

The consistency of the mortar shall beadjusted by taking it in a trowel andobserving how it slides off the face oftrowel. The mortar shall readily slide off,but at the same time shall not be so wetas to part into large drops before falling.Alternatively, slump test may be

performed in accordance with theprocedure laid down in IS: 1199. Theslump should be about 70mm.

iv) Mud Mortar: Mud mortar, used asbedding under brick tile layer, shall beprepared in the same manner as mudplaster but without any addition of fibrousreinforcing material and binding material.The mud mortar may be usedimmediately without any rotting period.

v) Brick Tiles: These shall conform to therequirements given in IS: 2690 (Part-1)or IS: 2690 (Part-II).

3.3.3 Application Procedure:

Various steps involved in this systemare as under:

i) Preparatory Works: Prior to applicationof treatment, preparatory works likefilling of cracks by cement sand slurry,provision of adequate number of drainoutlets, provision of 75mm fillet atjunction of roof slab with parapet wall,provision of a groove / chase in parapetwall etc. as described in IS: 3067- Codeof Practice for General Design Details &Preparatory Works for Damp Proofingand Water Proofing of Buildings, shall becompleted.

ii) Cleaning of Roof Surface: The surfaceof roof and the part of the parapet andgutters, drain mouths, etc. over whichthe water proofing treatment is to beapplied shall be thoroughly cleaned of allforeign matter, namely fungus and dustetc. by wire brushing and dusting.

52


iii) Application of Bitumen over CleanedRoof Surface: After cleaning of roofsurface, a coat of hot bitumen (Residualtype bitumens 80/100) over the roofsurface shall be applied evenly over theentire surface without any gap. Bitumencoat is extended over the verticalsurfaces meeting with the slab. Bitumencommonly used is residual typepetroleum bitumen of grade 80/100 or hotcut back bitumen. Residual type bitumenis heated to a temp of not less than 165oC and not more than 170o C. Thequantity of bitumen to be spread per 10sqm. of the surface is approx. 17 kg.

iv) Laying of Mud -Phuska:

a) Preparation: The soil shall bestacked in required quantities inabout 300mm high stacks over alevel ground and the top surfacedivided into suitable compartmentsof convenient size by bunding. Theestimated quantity of watercorresponding to optimum moisturecontent shall be added about 12hours before the use and allowedto soak. The stacks of soil shallthen be worked up with spades andhands to ensure proper distributionof moisture at the time the soil is tobe used.

b) Laying:The Mud-Phuska preparedas above shall be carried to thesurface to be covered and laid inloose thickness not greater than150mm. The surface shall then bebrought to the slope of 1 in 40. Itshall then be rammed manually

with wooden rammers and 'thappies'so as to obtain maximum density.Normally a Mud Phuska layer, laidto a compacted thickness of not lessthan 100mm, is consideredadequate.

The surface shall be allowed to dry for aperiod of not less than 24 hours. If any cracksappear, these shall be filled with a grout ofthe binder material.

v) Applying Mud Plaster: After laying themud phuska, mud plaster shall be laid toa total thickness of not less than 25mmover the surface. The plaster may beapplied in a single coat or two coats of15mm and 10mm.

After the application, the coat of plastershall be allowed to dry. The surface shall bechecked once more for slope and evennesswith a straight edge and spirit level and madeup wherever necessary by application of theplaster.

vi) Paving with Brick Tiles: Afterapplication of mud plaster, the brick tilesshall be laid flat on a thin layer of mudmortar. The tiles shall be laid close toeach other and the thickness of jointsshall not be less than 6mm and not morethan 15mm. It shall be ensured whilelaying tiles that mud mortar risesvertically in joints to a height of about15mm. The brick tile shall be allowed todry for a period of 24 hours beforegrouting the joint. After drying, the jointshall be grouted with cement sandmortar (1:3). It shall be ensured that thejoints are completely filled by mortar. Themortar shall be allowed to set for a

53


minimum of 12 hours before furtherpointing of the joints which need to bedone only if necessary. Before pointing,the grouted joints shall be brushed cleanwith a soft brush. Typical details for thetreatment are given in Fig. 4.

vii) Curing: The surface of finished roof shallbe kept wet for a period of not less than7 days.

3.3.4 For more details IS: 2115 - Codeof Practice for Flat Roof Finish: Mud- Phuska,may be referred.

3.4 Water proofing using polyethelenefilm:

3.4.1 It consist of laying of polyethylenefilm on slopped roof surface. This system issuitable for new as well as old roofs. Thistreatment generally consist of application offollowing courses:

i) A coat of bitumen primer conforming toIS: 3384 applied to the prepared surfaceat the rate of 0.3 to 0.5 kg/m2 .

ii) Application of hot applied bitumen(straight run bitumen conforming to IS:73 ) at the rate of 0.70 kg/m2 minimum.

iii) Laying of polyethylene film conforming toIS: 2508 with cold cutback adhesive inoverlaps.

iv) Laying of 100 gm brown kraft paperlaminated insitu over the film with semihot layer of straight run bitumen.

v) Application of semi hot applied bitumenat the rate of 0.7 kg/m2 dusted with finesand.

vi) Laying of finishing layer of tiles or IndianPatent Stones i.e. 1:2:4 cement concretewith 10mm down aggregate or cementconcrete.

3.4.2 Application procedure:

Various steps involved in this system areas under:

i) Provision of slope and completion ofpreparatory works:- Prior to applicationof water proofing treatment roof surfaceshall be provided with a minimum slopeof 1 in 100 with cement concrete orcement sand mortar or lime surkhymortar. After provision of slope allpreparatory works like filling up ofcracks in roof structures by cement sandslurry, provision of adequate number ofdrain outlets, provision of 75mm fillet atjunction of roof slab with parapet wall.,provision of a groove/ chase in parapetwall etc. as described in IS:3067-1988"shall be completed.

ii) Method of laying:- After completion ofpreparatory works, a coat of primer shallbe applied on the prepared roof surfaceby brushing and allow it to dry for 6 to 12hours. Then a coat of hot bitumen shallbe spread on the roof surface andallowed to cool to a temperature so thatthe film may be laid without any damageto it.

The polyethylene film shall be carefullylaid and pressed on the bituminous layer. Thefilm shall be pressed down with the help of agunny cloth so as to prevent any damage tothe film. The next length of the polythelenefilm shall be similarly laid down with properlongitudinal and end overlaps firmly pressed

54


55


on the bituminous layer. The joints andoverlaps shall be carefully sealed with the helpof cutback bitumen applied over the uppersurface of lower layer of polyethylene film.Minimum width of lap shall be 10 cm betweenadjacent films and at the ends. As far aspossible for flat roof the film shall be laid atright angles to the direction of flow of waterwith overlap facing downwards. Width of filmshould be selected in such a way so that no.of laps are minimum.

On polyethelene film 100 gm brown kraftpaper shall be fixed with semi hot layer ofstraight run bitumen. The technique of fixingkraft paper to polyethelene film is to paint semihot bitumen on the paper, reverse it andlaminate over the film.

Kraft paper shall be coated with semihot applied bitumen at the rate of 0.7 kg/m2dusted with fine sand. After finishing roofsurface, treatment shall be applied to parapet,gutters and drain mouth.

iii) Treatment at the junction of roof withparapet wall:- Typical details oftreatment at junction of roof with parapetwall are shown in Fig.5. Where downwater pipes are provided to drain off therain water, extra piece of polyethylenefilm shall be provided in the openingcovering the edge of the water pipe andcovered with cement plaster 1:6.

iv) Surface Finish:- After completion oftreatment, roof shall be provided withany one of the following:

a) Cement concrete flooring tilesconforming to IS: 1237;

b) Burnt clay flat terracing tiles

conforming to IS: 2690 (Part-1) orIS: 2690 (Part-2);

c) Indian Patent Stone i.e. 1:2:4concrete 40mm thick with 10 mmdown aggregate.

Typical details for complete treatment fornew roofs are shown in Fig. 5. For old roofs,details are shown in Fig. 6.

3.4.3 Precautions in layingpolyethelene film:

i) The roof surface should be reasonablysmooth so as to avoid puncturing of film.Primer should not be applied on wetsurface.

ii) Excessive bitumen should not be usedfor bonding the film to the preparedsurface, which may otherwise result inthe film sliding and wrinkling.

iii) Over stretching of the film shall beavoided at the time of laying, whichotherwise leads to wrinkles when the filmretracts.

iv) The laying of the film should beimmediately followed by subsequentoperations of covering with bituminouscompositions. It is found that if the filmis left, exposed, it can lead to softeningof bitumen layer underneath causingwrinkles, which may possibly lead todamage. The work should not be carriedout at high temperature.

v) The workman should preferably walkbarefooted or with canvas shoes toprevent damage to the film.

56


57


58


3.4.4 For more details IS: 7290 -Recommendations for Use of PolyethyleneFilm For Water Proofing of Roofs, may bereferred.

3.5 Polymer modified cementitiousslurry coating:

3.5.1 Polymer modified cementitiousslurry coatings are applied over the baseconcrete. This technique of water proofing islatest development in the field of waterproofing. Polymer imparts significantimprovement in impermeability. Polymermodified cementitious slurry have coefficientof expansion very similar to concrete therebyit does not get cracked due to thermal variationof concrete.

Polymer modified cementitious slurrycoatings consist of a liquid blend and a dryblend. The liquid blend consist of the polymer,liquid additives and clean water. Dry blendconsist of locally available portland cementand aggregates. These blends are mixed inspecified ratio generally 2:1 (cement :polymer) by weight and applied by brush on aprepared clean surface. Generally, two coatsare provided. However, manufacturer'srecommendations should be followed in thisregard. To impart more flexibility, it is desirableto use some reinforcement like fibre glass clothsandwitched between two coats. This coatingshould be covered by screed concrete toprotect it against physical damage. Thissystem can be used over new as well as oldroofs.

3.5.2 Application of polymermodified cemenetitious slurry coating :-Broadly following steps are involved inapplication of this system.

i) Preparation of roof surface:- Thesurface shall be cleaned to remove alldust, foreign matters, lose materials orany other deposits of contamination.Cracks and depression shall be filled upby fillers (cement sand mortar as perrecommendation of suppliers). Preparedsurface shall be thoroughly prewetted forone hour.

ii) Preparation of polymer modifiedcementitious slurry:- Dry blend andliquid blend shall be mix into the desiredratio as per recommendation of supplier.The mix shall be stirred thoroughly, untilno bubbles remain in the mix. Any lumpfound in mix shall be removed.

iii) First coat of polymer modifiedcementitious slurry shall be applied bybrush on wet cleaned surface.

iv) Subsequently, fibre glass cloth shall belaid over first coat of polymer modifiedcementitious slurry.

v) Second coat of polymer modifiedcementitious slurry shall be laid overfibre glass cloth.

vi) Polymer modified cementitious brushtopping shall be applied over second coatof polymer modified coating.

vii) On brush topping, screed concrete, 1:2:4admixed with suitable integral waterproofing compound 25 to 40mm thick toa min. slope of 1 in 100 with aggregatesize down 10mm with maximum watercement ratio 0.45, shall be laid.

Above system may slightly differ fromcase to case depending upon the instruction

59


of supplier of water proofing system. Thereis no relevant Indian standard/ other code ofpractice for this system. Therefore , workshould be carried out as per manufacturers'/suppliers instructions. Users are advised tocollect complete literature from manufacturerand study carefully prior to application oftreatment. A typical diagram for this system.is given in Figure 7.

3.5.3 Since, there are no relevant Indianor any other standards available, this systemneeds to be adopted carefully.

3.6 Water proofing using polymermodified bituminous membrane:

3.6.1 Addition of polymer in bitumenimproves its workability characteristics,penetration and softening behaviour, tensileand fatigue properties and capacity to bridgemovement of cracks/ joints in the substrate.Non-woven fibre glass mat and non-wovenpolyester mat are generally used asreinforcement to improve their characteristicslike lap joint strength, tensile strength andflexibility. Polymer modified bituminousmembrane are obtained by sand-wiching non-woven polyester fabrics or fibre glass matbetween layers of high quality polymer modifiedbituminous. These membranes have highsoftening point, high tensile strength, high tear& puncture resistance, high joint strength andlow water vapour transmission. This systemis suitable for new as well as old roofs.

3.6.2 Method of application :- Stepsinvolved in this water proofing system maybe as given below:

i) Provision of slope and cleaning of roofsurface:- Prior to application of waterproofing treatment roof surface should be

provided with a minimum slope of 1 in100 with plain cement concrete. Afterprovision of slope all preparatory workslike filling up of cracks by cement sandslurry, provision of adequate number ofdrain outlets, provision of 75mm fillet atjunction of roof slab with parapet wall.,provision of a groove/ chase in parapetwall etc. as described in IS:3067 shouldbe completed.

ii) Laying a coat of cold applied bitumenprimer @ 0.2 to 0.4 l/sqm on entire roofsurface.

iii) Laying 85/25 grade hot blown bitumen@ 1.2kg/sqm all over the surface.

iv) Laying 2.5-3mm thick polymer modifiedbituminous membrane with non-wovenpolyester fibre glass mat reinforcement,applied by torch with sealing all thejoints.

v) Laying 85/25 grade hot blown bitumen@ 1.2 kg/sqm all over the surface.

vi) Final finish with china mosaic tiles on a15mm thick grey cement plaster bed.

Method of application may slightly differdepending upon product and manufacturers'recommendations. As there is no relevant IScode of practice for this water proofingsystem, work should be carried out as permanufacturers' recommendations. Users areadvised to collect complete literature frommanufacturers and study completely prior toapplication of treatment.

A typical scheme for laying of bitumenmembrane is shown in sketch 8.

60


61


62


3.6.3 Since there are no relevantIndian or any other standards available, thissystem needs to be adopted carefully.

3.7 Water proofing using bitumen felts:

This system consists of laying of bitumenfelts over sloped roof surface. Life of thistreatment is limited to 4-6 years only. Thus,recurring cost is very high. Therefore, thissystem should not be adopted for waterproofing.

4. MEASURES TO PREVENT LEAKAGEIN NEW CONSTRUCTION:

In new construction, the problem ofleakage can be prevented by extending roofbeyond supporting walls by 30 cm or so , inorder to prevent locations having combinedvertical and horizontal joints and by satisfyingbasic requirement of water proofing of roofsat design & construction stage. Extension ofroof will eleminate chances of leakage onsupporting walls, as the vertical joint onsupporting wall is eliminated. Basicrequirement of water proofing of roofs i.e.provision of adequate slope, no. of openings,proper detailing at junction of roof & parapetwall, proper treatment at expansion joint &provision of effective water proofing systemhave been described in para 2.

5. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEFOR LEAKY ROOFS:

5.1 Before taking any decision regardingremedial measures to be adopted for leakyroofs, it is necessary that the roofs areinspected thoroughly. The inspection shouldpreferably be done during rainy season. Basedon the observations, future course of action

should be decided depending upon thecondition of leakage in the roofs. Minor repairsat isolated locations may be carried outimmediately on dry day and performance ofrepair should be observed after next rainfall.Major repairs, like complete replacement ofwater proofing system, may be carried outafter rainy season prior to next monsoon.

5.2 Thorough inspection:- Theinspection of roof should cover all theessential aspects which may affect waterproofing system and may cause leakage inthe roofs. Following aspect should bespecifically covered:

a) Availability of adequate slopes(minimum 1 in 100)

b) Provision of 75mm fillet at the junctionof roof and parapet walls.

c) Provision of adequate number and sizeof openings.

d) Provision of slope and drip course incopings.

e) Any source of permanent leakage ofwater like

• over head water storage tanks

• leaking water supply pipe

• broken down water drainage pipes

• leakage at joints of down waterdrainage pipes (causes wetness inwalls)

f) Undulations/ minor depression in roofsurface where water may stagnate.

63


g) Growth of plants on the roof.

h) Condition of water proofing treatment,especially development of cracks/debonding etc.

i) Condition of ceiling/ walls below the roofetc.

5.3 Attention to roof leaking atisolated points:

5.3.1 During inspection, if it is observedthat the leakage through roof is at isolatedlocation, then such location should be carefullystudied. It should be examined whether basicrequirement for water proofing has beenfulfilled. If basic requirement for a leak proofroof as mentioned in para -2 are not fulfilled,any type of water proofing system will not worksatisfactorily. Thus, first of all, action shouldbe taken to ensure that basic requirement ofleak proof roof are fulfilled. Leakage atisolated locations may be due to some defectsat that particular location. Depending upon thewater proofing system adopted on roof, actionshould be taken to rectify the defect. In caseof roofs provided with bitumen felt, there maybe debonding or leakage through joints. Inthat case, defective location have to beidentified, cut and removed and new layer ofbitumen felt may be provided duly keepingdesired overlap length. Similarly, in otherbituminous treatment, existing bituminouslayer may be removed and fresh layer may belaid. In case of roofs provided with limeterracing with tiles, there may be depressionon roof surface or loss of cement mortarbetween tiles. Such defects may be rectifiedby fresh pointing/ plaster. Preferably pointingshould be done with non-shrink polymermodified cement mortar. In case wetness isobserved on the wall just below the junction

of roof & parapet wall, condition of fillet & drainoutlets need to be examined. Broken pipesmay be replaced and fillet may be constructedagain after dismantling old fillet. Plaster onwalls and coping should also be examined andrepaired, if necessary.

5.3.2 Course of action for roofs leakingat isolated points:

Following course of action shouldnormally be followed for repairs of roofsleaking at isolated points:

i) Cleaning of roof surface andopenings:- First of all, entire roof surfaceand all the openings should be cleanedso as to ensure effective and un-obstructed flow of rain water through theopenings provided on the roofs. Weedsand any other foreign material on roofsurface should be removed. Theblockage in the openings should becleared. It should be ensured thatopenings are functional.

ii) Arresting permanent leakage of waterfrom its sources:-If continuous leakageof water is observed on roof from anysource, like over head water storage tankor leaking water supplying pipe lines etc.,the same should be arrested by repairingover head water storage tank/ pipeline.

iii) Identification and attention tolocations of stagnated water:- Leakageof roof takes place only when water doesnot drain off quickly and stagnates overthe roof surface. Generally, waterstagnates over the depression formed inthe roof surface. Thus, locations havingdepression in roof surface should be

64


attended. Subsequently, it should beensured that there is no location on roofswhere water stagnates.

iv) Repair of filet at junction of roof onparapet wall:- Condition of fillet atjunction of roofs on parapet wall shouldbe examined and any damage/ defectiveportion should be repaired.

v) Repair to joints of tiles :- Condition ofpointing at joints in between tiles shouldbe examined and wherever mortar hascome out, fresh pointing in cementmortar 1:3 should be done. After pointingcuring should also be ensured.

vi) Repair to plaster and coping onparapet:- Broken/ decayed plaster onparapet wall should be replaced by freshplaster. Coping should also be attendedalongwith provision of slope.

vii) After taking above steps, behaviour ofroof surface should be watched and ifleakage still persists, following stepshave to be taken:

a) Removal of complete top surface andrepair of lime concrete:-

Entire top surface which may beconsisting of tiles and bitumen felts etc. shouldbe removed and condition of the layer below iti.e. lime concrete/ mud plaster should beexamined. Minor cracks should be sealed withcement sand slurry or bitumen compoundsafter making 'V' groove in case of limeconcrete. Defective concrete should bereplaced by fresh lime concrete. In case ofmud-phuska, minor cracks may be filled upby bituminous compound. Decayed mudplaster and mud phuska should be replaced

by fresh mud-phuska and mud-plaster.

b) Provision of adequate slope:-Manyof the old roofs may not have adequate slope.For lime concrete terracing, a minimum slopeof 1 in 60 is necessary. Therefore, afterremoval of top surface, slope of existing roofshould be examined and if necessary, re-grading of roof surface should be carried outusing lime concrete/ cement concrete. Priorto regrading of roof surface, level should bemarked on roof and parapet . Subsequentlyexisting lime concrete surface should be maderough. After that re-grading work should betaken up. After re-grading, top surface shouldbe made smooth using cement plaster 1:3 andsurface should be cured for 7 days. Similarly,on mud-phuska roofs a slope of 1 in 40 shallbe ensured. If necessary, roof surface shouldbe re-graded using mud-phaska and mudplaster. After re-grading, layer of mud-plastershould be allowed to dry before relaying oftop surface.

c) Re-laying of top surface:- Aftercompletion of re-grading, a layer of burnt claytiles should be laid. Old tiles may be used ifthey are in good condition. Tiles should belaid over 20 mm cement mortar 1:3. Tilesshould be joined with impervious cementmortar.

5.4 Attention to roofs leaking heavily:

If heavy leakage is observed at large no.of location on the walls and on the ceiling,. itis an indication of ineffective water proofingtreatment. In such cases, it will be necessaryto remove entire existing water proofingmaterial like bitumen felts/ mastic etc. Afterremoving the existing water proofing material,fresh water proofing treatment has to beprovided. In case of lime concrete terracing,

65


tiles needs to be removed first. After removalof tiles, condition of lime concrete should beexamined. If large number of cracks areobserved, it is desirable to remove completelime concrete. If lime concrete is in goodcondition with few isolated cracks, thesecracks should be filled up with cement slurryor bituminous caulking compound conformingto IS:1580. Subsequently, if necessary, re-grading of roof should be done as suggestedunder para 5.3.2 (vii). After re-grading freshwater proofing system may be provided. Waterproofing treatment may be any among varioussystems as mentioned in para 3 exceptbituminous felt treatment.. While providingfresh water proofing system, care should betaken that instructions as given in relevantstandard/ literature are strictly followed. Priorto provision of fresh water proofing system,provision of basic requirement of waterproofing of roof should also be ensured.

6. STANDARDS & CODES OFPRACTICE DEALING WITH WATERPROOFING OF ROOFS:

Following is the list of various IS Codeswhich deals with water proofing of roofs:

i) IS 1322:1993 Specification for bitumenfelts for water proofingand damp proofing(Fourth Revision)

ii) IS 1346:1991 Code of practice for waterproofing of roofs withbitumen felt (ThirdRevision).

iii) IS 1580:1991 Specification forbituminous compound forwater proofing and

caulking purposes (FirstRevision)

iv) IS 2115:1980 Code of practice for Flatroof finish; Mud- Phuska.

v) IS:2527-1984 Code of practice for fixingrain water, gutters anddownpipes for roofdrainage.

vi) IS:2645-1975 Specification for integralwater proofing cementcompound.

vii) IS:3036:1992 Code of practice forlaying lime concrete for awaterproofed roof finish(Second Revision).

viii) IS 3037:1986 Specification for bitumenmastic for use in water-proofing of roofs (FirstRevision).

ix) IS 3067:1988 Code of practice forgeneral design details andpreparatory work fordamp-proofing and waterproofing of buildings(First Revision).

x) IS 3384:1986 Specification for bitumenprimer for use inwaterproofing and damp-proofing (First Revision).

xi) IS 4365:1967 Code of practice forapplication of bitumenmastic for water-proofingof roofs.

66


xii) IS 4911:1968 Glossary of termsrelating to bituminouswaterproofing and damp-proofing of buildings(First Revision)

xiii) IS 7193:1974 Specification for glassfibre base bitumen felts.

xiv) IS 7290:1979 Recommendations foruse of polyethylene filmfor water-proofing of roofs(First Revision).

xv) IS 9918:1981 Code of practice for in-situ waterproofing andd a m p - p r o o f i n gtreatments with glassfibre tissue reinforcedbitumen.

xvi) IS 13182:1991 Recommendations forwaterproofing of wetareas in building.

xvii) IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 1):1993 Method of test Part 1

Breaking strength test.

xviii)IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 2):1993 Method of test Part 2

Pliability test.

xix) IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 3):1993 Method of test Part 3

Storage sticking test..

xx) IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 4):1993 Method of test Part 4

Pressure head test.

xxi) IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 5):1993 Method of test Part 5

Heat resistance test.

xxii) IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 6):1993 Method of test Part 6

Water absorption test.

xxiii)IS 13826 Bitumen based felts-(Pt 7):1993 Method of test Part 7

Determination of bindercontent.

Note:Wherever IS specification has beenquoted in this chapter, its latest versionshould be referred.

H H H H H H H

67



Register of Standard measurements of Buildings.

Station/Kilometrage ...................

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________Particulars Area in square Metres

Block No. of of buildings ______________________________________________No. units and out-houses White White Painting Distem-

washing washing wood- peringinside outside work inside

Officeror SeniorGroup Cstaff Qrs.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________Sources from Dated signature in

Plan which the quantities token of correctness Remarks DivisionalNo. are taken Engineer's

_________________ __________________ initials.M.B Page Section AssistantNo. No. Engineer. Engineer.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

68


ANNEXURE 2.9.Para 227 (b)

THE STRUCTURAL STEEL AND TIMBER-WORK INSPECTION REGISTER.

Section No_________ Sub-Division ____________ Division _____________

1. Description of structure ___________________________________________________________

2. Block No________________________ Station or Kilometrage __________________________

3.Type of truss/column _____________________ Span/Height ___________________________

(If timber, kind of timber ___________________________________)

4. Height of staging __________________________________________

5.Type of High level service tank____________________Capacity ________________________

6. Type bed blocks or pedestals with details of fixture __________________________________

7. Date painted (to be shown progressively)

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Date of Condition of structure at Action Initials ofinspection the time of inspection taken Inspecting Officials _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

69

MAINTENANCE OF SANITARY & HYGIENIC CONDITIONS IN STATION BUILDINGS, YARDS & RAILWAY COLONIES

CHAPTER III

MAINTENANCE OF SANITARY &HYGIENIC CONDITIONS IN STATIONBUILDINGS, YARDS & RAILWAYCOLONIES

301 Sanitary Arrangements in Stationsand Colonies -

For Sanitary arrangements in stationsand colonies, the allocation of responsibilitiesof the Operating, Medical and Engineeringdepartments are as laid down by theAdministration and a copy of detailedinstructions should be in the possession ofthe Assistant Engineer and concerned staff.

302 Railway Sanitation Committees

a) Railway Sanitation Committees areappointed at such important stations asdecided by the General Manager to assist inthe supervision and control of sanitaryarrangements in station buildings, yards andresidential colonies. The Committee functionsnot only as advisory body but as monitoringbody also.

The existence of such Committees shallnot however relieve any Department of theduties ordinarily devolving on that Department.

b) At less important and way-sidestations where Sanitation Committees do notexist, the Station Master shall be primarilyresponsible for maintaining sanitary andhygienic conditions in station yards, staffcolonies and their surroundings.

303 Constitution of SanitationCommittees -

The constitution of each SanitationCommittee and its functions shall be asprescribed by the General Manager. Meetingswill be convened by the Chairman of theCommittee at specified intervals.

304 Record of Minutes of Meetings -

Minutes should be recorded in a Minutes-Book kept at the station in the custody of theStation Manager/Station Master unlessotherwise prescribed. Copies of minutes ofmeetings should be sent to the Chief MedicalOfficer, Divisional Officers, Members of theCommittee, the Assistant Engineer and thesupervisors concerned. The Chief MedicalOfficer/Chief Medical Superintendent will takeup various matters at the appropriate level withthe Departments.

305 Inspections by SanitationCommittees -

The Committees will carry out inspectionof the premises before/after the meeting. Theinspection will be directed with regard tosanitary and hygienic conditions of thefollowing items:-

(i) Conservancy - The adequacy andcleanliness of latrines, receptacles, dustbins,incinerators, trenching-grounds, septic tanks,effluent disposal beds, soapiest, sumps,disposal of flood and sullage water, theadequacy and condition of conservancyequipment's

(ii) Drinking water supply arrangements- Reservoirs, filter beds, wells, drinking watertanks and their protection from pollution

70


(iii) Quarters - The stabling of cattle, useby occupants of any quarters leading toinsanitary conditions detrimental to the healthand well being of the occupants

(iv)The sanitary conditions ofcompounds, court-yards and surroundings ofquarters, excavation of earth from any part ofthe surroundings of quarters whereby floodor waste water may accumulate, the growthof excessive vegetation and of creepers liableto damage the structure of buildings

(v) Shops - Cleanliness of licensedshops; the proper storage of meat, grain andother foodstuff; the cleanliness of choppingblocks and implements in butchers' stalls,efficient protection against flies and the promptand proper disposal of blood, hides, offal andother refuse

(vi) Presence of stray dogs and ofvicious and diseased animals

(vii) Presence of any other nuisance,such as rats or conditions detrimental to thehealth and well being of residents

Every subject dealt with at meetingsshould be recorded by the Committee andexpeditious action taken by Departmentsconcerned. In subsequent meetingscompliance on items of earlier meetings shouldbe pursued by the members.

306 Conservancy Work -Conservancywork is classified as - (i) indoor conservancyand (ii) outdoor conservancy.

(i) Indoor conservancy - This comprisesthe cleaning of indoor sanitary installations,the collection of refuse generated in theindividual quarters like floor sweeping,

domestic refuse etc. and transporting it intothe refuse bins. This is the responsibility ofthe occupants of quarters.

(ii) Outdoor conservancy - Thiscomprises cleaning of colony area, railwayyards etc.

The responsibility for "OutdoorConservancy" will devolve on the Medical,Engineering or Operating Department as perthe Railway Board's instructions and shallinclude jobs like cleaning of drains, sewers,septic tanks, storm water drains, soak pits,dust bins etc.

307 Sanitary Protection of Installation

a) Reservoirs/Ponds:

(i) The reservoir/ponds should befenced to prevent any outside orunauthorised use.

(ii) The water in the reservoir shall notbe used for any unauthorisedpurposes like bathing, washingclothes, cleaning of utensils etc.

(iii) The water shall be periodicallytreated with bleaching powder or adisinfecting agent.

b) Overhead Tanks:

(i) The tanks should be cleaned andlime applied on walls as per laiddown schedule.

(ii) The water shall be regularlydisinfected.

71


c) Protection of wells used for drinking:

(i) The exposed area of wells outsideand inside shall be plastered to asufficient depth to preventpercolation of water into the wellthrough the steining at shallowdepths.

(ii) Parapets should be sufficiently highto prevent entry of spilled-water andwater flowing at ground level. Thetop of steining should be edge-finished (triangular shape) to avoidbuckets or vessels being keptthereon.

(iii) There should be a paved platformaround the parapet of the wells, witha drain to lead the spill-watersufficiently away.

(iv) The ground around the well for aradius of at least 50m should bekept thoroughly clean to guardagainst pollution.

(v) No bathing or washing of clothesshould be permitted near a wellsupplying drinking water. Devicesfor drawing water should be suchas to prevent pollution.

(vi) Open wells should be cleaned whennecessary, preferably during dryseason. The sides should bescrapped to clear moss and othervegetation growth. Desilting of wellsshould be done as necessary. Quicklime should then be applied to thesides and bottom of the well(wherever dry). This work should becarried out by the Section Engineer(works) and a report sent to the

Assistant Engineer.

(vii) Disinfection of well should be carriedout as often as necessary. The workis usually undertaken by the staffof the Medical Department. At gangquarters and gate lodges betweenstations, the Section Engineer(Works) should arrange for thedisinfection of staff-wells.

308 Precautions against InfectiousDiseases and Disinfection Measures

Infectious disease may be combated onthe following lines:

(i) Ensuring hygienic water supply;

(ii) Efficient disposal of sewage.;

(iii) Extermination of flies, mosquitoesetc.;

(iv) Isolation of suspected infectiouscases and of contacts;

(v) Protective inoculations andvaccinations;

(vi) Measures against collection ofdecaying refuse or carcasses ofanimals within railway limits or in thevicinity and disposal by burning inan incinerator or by trenching refuse& decaying matter.

309 Disinfection of Quarters -

The supervisors responsible for thedisinfection of quarters should keep a suitablestock of necessary materials, obtaining themfrom the Divisional Medical Officer.

H H H H H H H

72

PASSENGER AMENITIES, STATIONS AND YARDS

CHAPTER IV

PASSENGER AMENITIES, STATIONSAND YARDS

401 GENERAL -

As stations and their environs are thefirst point of contact between Railways andtheir customers, special importance isrequired to be given to the facilities providedto passengers in regard to their adequacy,quality and maintenance.

While planning for provision/augmentation of stations, due considerationneeds to be given to the importance of thestation from point of view of passenger traffic.

402 CATEGORISATION OF STATIONS

(a) Annual Passenger earnings:- This isan important parameter for deciding upon thecategory of a station. It consists of earningsfrom both reserved and unreservedpassengers.

(b) Stations have been categorised in sixcategories, A,B,C,D,E & F depending upon theearnings, which is an indicator of thepassenger traffic. Criterion for categorisationof stations are as per Annexure 4.1.

(c) The categorisation of stations shallbe reviewed every five years starting from1995-96.

(d) All suburban stations have beenincluded in Category 'C' in order to accord ahigher priority to these stations in view of alarge number of passengers using them.

403 MINIMUM ESSENTIAL AMENITIES

The Minimum Essential Amenitiesrequired in each category of station shall beas per Annexure 4.2. Scale of MinimumEssential Amenities is prescribed in Annexure4.3. Availability of these amenities at theprescribed scale will have to be ensured.

404 RECOMMENDED LEVEL OFAMENITIES:

Once the essential amenities asprescribed in Annexure 4.2 and 4.3 areavailable at a station to the prescribed levels,further augmentation of these amenities canbe made eeto higher recommended norms.These norms are recommendatory and effortsshall be made to provide the amenities as perthe norms given in Annexure 4.4.

405 DESIRABLE AMENTITIES

(a) Desirable amenities are those whichare considered desirable to further improvecustomer satisfaction and interface processat the station. The quantum of these amenitieswould depend upon the category of the station.A comprehensive list of the DesirableAmenities is given in Annexure 4.5.

(b) The provision of Desirable Amenitiesneed not wait for complete provision ofAmenities to levels recommended in Clause404. The amenities out of the list given inAnnexure 4.5 should be provided based onthe need and relative importance of the station.

406 ALLOCATION OF EXPENDITURE

Minimum Essential Amenitiesas prescribed in Annexure 4.2 and 4.3 shall

73


always be provided as a part of the concernedPlan Head at the time of construction of newstations. Augmentation of any facilitythereafter at station shall, however, becharged under Plan Head "Passenger AndOther User Amenities".

407 MAINTENANCE OF PASSENGERAMENTITIES

Amenities provided at all the stationsshall be maintained in good working order atall times. Maintenance staff shall carry outrepairs needed immediately after receipt ofinformation from the Station Master/StationSupdt.

408 PASSENGER AMENITYBOOKLETS

Additions/Modification to the PassengerAmenities available at the stations should beincorporated in the database and PassengerAmenities Management System (PAMS) andprinted in the form of Passenger AmenityBooklets of each division at the end of thefinancial year. The details of PassengerAmenities available at stations shall beupdated and sent every year to Board infloppies and hard copies (sample proforma atAnnexure 4.6).

409 BOOKING OFFICES

(a) The Booking Windows may bedistributed function wise or destination wiseby the Commercial Department.

(b) The Booking Windows should be solocated that the circulation at the entrance orexit from the station or the waiting hall is notaffected by the queues in front of the BookingWindows. The length of the queue can be

estimated at the rate of half a meter perperson waiting in the queue.

(c) A standardised layout for the BookingWindows may be formulated on the basis ofthe following design parameters:

(i) Size of a cubicle : 1.8m x 1.5m

(ii) Counters : Width 0.6m., Heightabove floor level 1 m

(iii) Ticket Tubes : On both sides of thecounters

(iv) Furniture : Chairs with caned seats,revolving type with short back andfacility for seat adjustment

(d) Partitions between Passenger -Booking Clerk : Toughened sheet glass orclear acrylic sheet with a hole for inter-communication at suitable height above thecounter top and a suitable gap between thepartition and the counter for collection of fareand issue of tickets, the partition beingprotected on the passenger side with steel grill.

(e) The Enquiry and Booking officesshould be specially brightened up at all thestations.

410 Waiting Halls

(a) Waiting Halls should not be builtdetached from the main buildings. At smallstations where some shelter is available forthe passengers near the Booking Office, thenet Waiting Hall area in the form of coveredarea on the Platforms may be provided. Theabove mentioned net area should be workedout after deducting the waiting area in front of

74


the Booking Windows from the gross WaitingHall area determined on the basis of Annexure4.4.

(b) Waiting Halls are meant for the paidpassengers and hence should have entry fromthe platform side only.

(c) At suburban stations, extensions ofplatform shelter in lieu of construction ofWaiting Hall may be done.

411 Platforms

a) Length of Platforms : The length shouldbe adequate to accommodate the longest trainreceived at the station.

b) Width of Platforms :

i) The width should be determined on

the basis of the clearance specifiedin the Schedule of Dimensions. Theplatform widths should be adequateto permit a free unhamperedmovement of passengers.

ii) The capacity of station platforms indischarging passengers per metrewidth of un-obstructed passage formovement in both directions can betaken as :

Suburban Passengers : 60 per minute.

Non-Suburban Passengers: 40 per minute.

c) Height of Platforms : The level ofplatform shall be as mentioned as Annexure4.2 for various categories at the stations. Theheights for various levels of platforms shallbe as under:

Level B.G. M.G.

High Level 760 mm above Rail level (840mm 405mm aboveabove Rail Level in case of Suburban Rail Levelstations and stations in cutting)

Low Level 455 mm above Rail Level 305mm aboveRail Level

Rail Level At Rail level At Rail Level

d) Platform Surfaces :

(i) The platform surfaces should be ofsuch material that it is dust free indry weather and mud free in rains.At important stations, surface ofmain platforms should be paved withKota stone or interlocking pavers.To keep platform surface smoothand clean, all trollies plying at thestation be provided with rubber tyredwheels.

(ii) In the case of single face platforms,the platform surface should have aslope of 1 in 60 away from thecoping upto the edge of the berm,with the berm and the slope of theplatform filling being protected byturfing or pitching as consideredadequate.

(iii) In the case of two face (island)platforms the platform surfaceshould have a slope of 1 in 60 away

75


from the centre of the platform uptothe coping on either side.

(iv) The ends of the platforms shouldbe provided with ramps at a slopenot steeper than 1 in 6.

(v) A demarcation line should be drawn1.8 m from the edge of platform. Inthe area so demarcated, trolleysshall not be allowed to enable freemovement of passengers in thatarea.

e) Platform Fencing : All single faceplatforms should be provided with a suitablefencing or hedging of a height of 1.8m with aberm of at least 600 mm beyond the fencingor the hedging.

f) Whenever Platforms are extended,washable aprons, if already existing, shall alsobe extended simultaneously.

412 Shady Trees on Platforms

a) The planting, protection and upkeepof the trees will be the responsibility of theEngineering Department. Traffic Departmentshould associate in watering of plants atwayside stations wherever feasible.

b) The species and spacing of the treesshould be properly decided.

c) The trees should be so planted thatthey do not obstruct the visibility of signals orinfringe Schedule of Dimensions or infringethe overhead electric wires (Traction orGeneral Service) or obscure the platform lightsor signs.

d) If the trees are already in existence,

the positioning of the new equipment shouldbe so adjusted as to avoid cutting of trees asdistinct from trimming their branches.

e) It would be advantageous to providesuitable raised masonry platforms around thefully grown trees as an additional seatingaccommodation for the passengers.

413 Lighting

a) Where electric supply is available allthe lighting arrangements with the associatedequipment including the lamp posts with theirfixtures for the platforms, sign-boards,buildings etc. will be provided and maintainedby the Electrical Department.

b) Where electric supply is not available,the provision, repairs and maintenance of thelamp posts will be the responsibility of theEngineering Department. The provision,maintenance and repairs of the oil lamps andtheir lighting will be the responsibility of theOperating Department.

c) Lamp posts should ordinarily be placedalong the centre line of platforms where widthof platform is 18 metres and above. The lampposts should not be less than 4.5 metres clearfrom platform face and not less than 3 metresclear of the face of the station building. Wherethe station building is less than 7.5m from theplatform face, the lamps should be supportedon wall brackets. Such lamp brackets can beused upto a distance of 9 m from the platformface.

c) The heights and spacing of the lampsshould be determined by the level ofillumination required, the area to be illuminated,etc. apart from the obligatory locations overthe station name boards, water taps and other

76


passenger facilities required to be illuminated.

414 Drinking Water Supply

a) Where piped water supply is possible,potable drinking water should be supplied onplatform by provision of taps at the rate ofone tap for two coaches. On island platformsif the trains are expected to be received onboth sides at the same time, number of tapsshould be doubled.

b) At small stations, as determined bythe Commercial Department, where provisionof piped water supply is technically andeconomically not feasible, tube-wells with handpumps should be provided. The size, numbersand locations of such tube wells should bedetermined by the Engineering Department,based on the quantum of passenger traffic atthe station.

c) In addition, potable drinking watershould be supplied through mobile orstationary water containers. The number,size, type and deployment of such mobilecontainers should be determined by theCommercial Department who shall alsoprocure & maintain them.

415 Latrines, Urinals and Dustbins

(a) Latrines and Urinals shall be providedas per scale laid down in Annexure 4.4

(b) Out of total no. of Latrines and Urinalsas determined in manner indicated above,one third may be reserved for Ladies.

(c) All toilets should be graduallyconverted into Pay & Use system.

(d) The urinals may be suitablydistributed on platforms and waiting halls.

(e) Toilet should be provided near StationMaster's office for easy maintenance at D&Ecategory stations.

(f) All latrines and urinals should besanitised. Water-borne sanitation shall beprovided as far as practicable.

(g) An adequate no.of dustbins beprovided at the suitable locations on theplatforms.

416 Platform Covers

a) Depending on the climatic conditions,number of passengers and nature of traffic,Platform Covers should be provided as perscale laid down in Annexure 4.4.

b) Large-scale covering of platformsshould be confined to

(i) Junction stations

(ii) Stations at Civil DistrictHeadquarters

(iii) Stations at cities and towns with apopulation of more than 1 lakh

(iv) Stations in heavy rainfall areas

(v) Suburban stations

c) At important and suburban stations,the whole platform should be covered.

d) The Platform Covers should beprovided in terms of standard bays and thearea under the Platform Covers may therefore

77


marginally exceed the area required to beprovided.

e) Platform shelters should be extendedupto the landings of the foot-over bridges. Atsmall stations, platform shelters should beprovided in front of the station building as faras possible. At locations where there is anuncovered space of platform between theshelter and the foot-over-bridge, as far aspossible, a covered pathway should beprovided to the foot-over-bridge.

417 Foot-Over-Bridges or Sub-ways

a) Foot-over-bridges or sub-ways asconvenient and techno-economically feasibleshould be provided keeping in view thefollowing factors:

(i) Interconnection between high levelor low level platforms;

(ii) The total number of passengersdealt with at the station;

(iii) Frequency of train services;

(iv) Blocking of the lines betweenplatforms by freight trains.

Stations with high level platforms shouldnormally be provided with foot- over-bridgeson a programmed basis.

b) The design and location of the foot-over-bridges and the sub-ways should beguided by the criterion of a rapid dispersal ofthe passengers through the identified exitpoints and keeping in view the future expansionof station building.

c) The width of the foot-over-bridge orthe sub-way should be adequate to permit afree unhampered movement of thepassengers. The capacity of the foot-over-bridges and sub-ways and their componentstructures in discharging passengers permetre width of unobstructed passage formovement in both directions can be taken as:

___________________________________________________________________________________Capacity

(No. of Passengers /Minute/Metre Width )

______________________________Location Suburban Non-suburban___________________________________________________________________________________Level portion 60 40Stairway (Upward) 55 35Stairway (Downward) 60 40Stairway (Both Upward & Downward) 50 30Ramp (1 in 10 Gradient : 55 35both Upward & Downward)___________________________________________________________________________________

78


d) The design for the foot-over-bridgeshould provide for covering which shouldpreferably be provided at the initial stage itself.

e) At stations where there is more thanone platform without any foot-over-bridge orsub-way connecting them, a pathway forpassengers should be provided connecting theends of the platforms. The pathways shouldhave a minimum width of 2 m and shouldensure that it is clear of all obstructions suchas signalling equipment, etc. which should besuitably bridged. Notices in the prescribedlanguages should be prominently displayednear such pathway crossings, to warn theusers to look out for trains before using thepathways.

f) For foot-over-bridges, sub-ways andpathways, the lowest overhead clearance forthe movement should be of 2.75m.

g) At important suburban stations,thedesign for the stairways should be such as tofacilitate installation of escalators in future forwhich the standard slope required is 30°. Atmajor important stations, provision ofescalators should be considered for speedydispersal of commuters.

418 Waiting Rooms

a) Waiting Rooms need not be providedat suburban stations i.e. Category 'C' Stations.

b) At non-suburban stations other thanjunctions and terminal stations, Waiting Roomsshould be considered only if the number ofupper class passengers dealt with daily is 25or more. If however, the bulk of the traffic isbooked or received by night the provision ofthe Waiting Rooms could be considered even

with fewer passengers.

c) At non-suburban junctions and terminalstations, the facility should be based on thevolume of traffic changing over and the timethe passengers have to wait as determinedby the Commercial Department.

d) If the area to be provided for theWaiting Rooms is sufficiently large, theCommercial Department may provideseparate Waiting Rooms for the general andfemale passengers and passengers of differentclasses.

419 Signages

(a) Standard signages shall be providedat the stations.

(b) For location of signages, a plan shouldbe made for each station.

420 Vending Trollies/Stalls

(a) Modular stalls shall be provided tosave space on platforms.

(b) Efforts should be made to make thestations cooking free and reduce the numberof trolleys.

(c) Minimum trolleys and catering stallsunder the covered shed should be allowed.

(d) Automatic vending machines shouldbe encouraged to replace existing vendingstalls.

79


421 Retiring Rooms

a) Retiring Rooms should be providedonly where a minimum of 60% occupation isexpected by the Commercial Department.

b) Size and location of the RetiringRooms may be decided taking into accountthe climatic conditions, the importance of thestations, availability of space etc. Asdormitory type of Retiring Rooms offeraccommodation at cheap rates to thepassengers, keeping in view the demand fromdifferent types of clientele, local conditions ofthe place, availability of comparable type ofaccommodation in the vicinity and any otherfactor considered relevant by the CommercialDepartment, preference may be given forprovision of dormitory type of Retiring Rooms.

422 Other General Items

(i) All stations irrespective of their classshould be sealed from all directions so thatthere is specified exit and entry and incidenceof unauthorised entrants is reduced, to avoidunnecessary pressure on amenities.

(ii) For mela and fairs traffic, additionaltemporary facilities may be provided.

423 Facilities For PhysicallyHandicapped

Railways are to provide convenience tothe physically handicapped persons to complywith the provision of "The Persons withdisabilities (Equal Opportunities; protection ofrights and full participation)" Act, 1995. Asper provisions of this Act, equal opportunitiesare to be given to handicapped persons in

terms of employment, access to variousplaces and services. The items concerningEngineering Department are as under:

(i) Section 44(b) of the Act states that"Establishments in the transport sector shall,within their limits of the economic capacityand development, for the benefit of personswith disability take special measures to adapttoilets in rail compartment, vessels, air-craftsand waiting rooms in such a way to permit thewheel chair users to use them conveniently."

(ii) Section 45(d) of the Act states that"The appropriate government and localauthorities shall, within the limits of theeconomic capacity and development, providefor engraving edges of railway platforms forthe blind or for the persons with low vision".

(iii) Section 45(e) of the Act states thatthe "The appropriate government and localauthorities shall, within their limits of theeconomic capacity and development, providefor devising appropriate symbols for disability."

(iv) Section 46 of the act states that "Theappropriate government and local authoritiesshall, within their limits of the economiccapacity and development, provide for

(a) Ramps in public buildings

(b) Adaption of toilets for wheel chairusers

(c) Braille signals and auditory signalsin elevators/lifts

(d) Ramps in hospitals, primary healthcentres and other medical care andrehabilitation institutions. "

80


424 Station Name Boards

a) Station names should preferably beengraved and painted on the principal nameboards made of stone or reinforced cementconcrete. The principal name boards paintedon both faces should be fixed at both the endsof the platform and generally oriented at rightangle to the track without in any way infringingthe Schedule of Dimensions. The actual angleat which the name boards are fixed should bedetermined by the site conditions ensuring thecriterion that the name board is clearly visiblefrom the approaching trains.

b) In the case of long platforms and atstations so identified by the EngineeringDepartment, additional secondary nameboards at convenient intermediate positionsusually at the rate of one for two coaches maybe fixed parallel to the length of the platform.Such secondary name boards can be madeof framed metal, asbestos or wooden sheetsand painted on the sides (one or both) facingthe track.

c) The length and width of the principaland secondary name boards will bedetermined by the total written material to beengraved or painted on the name boards. Theheight of the lower edge of the principal andsecondary name boards should be 2m abovethe platform level.

d) At large stations to be identified bythe Commercial Department, tertiary nameboards of sizes smaller than the principal/secondary name boards should be providedfacing the adjacent track as fixtures to thelamp posts or other fixed structures. Theyshould be fixed in a position parallel to thetrack. On suburban sections, such tertiaryname boards may be provided on enamel

plates. Where such tertiary name boards areprovided it may not be necessary to provideadditional secondary name boards mentionedhere in above.

e) The spacing of tertiary name boardsshould be such that at least one name boardis visible from any compartment of a standingtrain. The board should preferably be squarein shape and fixed with its diagonal axis in ahorizontal position. The length and width ofthe name board will be determined by thetotal written material and their arrangement.The central horizontal axis of the boardshould be at a height of 2m above theplatform surface.

f) Subject to the modifications as orderedby the Railway Board from time to time, thestation names on all types of name boardsshould be provided in the manner indicatedhere in under :-

(i) The names and their spellings indifferent languages shall be asapproved by the State Government.

(ii) The station names shall be exhibitedin the following order: RegionalLanguage, Hindi and English,except for Tamil Nadu where theuse of Hindi will be restricted toimportant stations and pilgrimcentres as determined by theCommercial Department. Wherethe Regional language is Hindi, thename boards will be in twolanguages, Hindi and English,except for provision of Urdulanguage as specified here in below.

(iii) Stations name boards of stations

81


falling under the following Districtsshall also be displayed in Urdu:

Dharbanga, Purniya, Sitamari andKatihar, Bhopal, Khandwa, Morena,Gwalior, Guna, Sagar, Ratlam,Devas, Dhar, Indore, Khargone,Rajgad, Sehore, Raysen, Jabalpur,Siwni, Bareli, Bijnor, Lucknow,Meerut, Murabad, Muzaffar Nagar,Rampur, Saharanpur, Pilibit,Baharaich, Gonda, Barabanki,Basti, Gurgaon, Balasor, Cuttack,Puri, Bardwan, Hugli, Chitur,Kuddapa, Ananthpur, Adilabad,Guntur, Kurnul, Karim Nagar,Khamman, Mehboob Nagar, Metak,Nellore, Nalgonda, Warangal,Nizambad, Prakaram, Rangreddyetc. (All the regions of Hyderabadincluding Hyderabad NagarMahapalika), North Arcot,Ambedkar, Dharampuri,Sabarkanya, Khoda, Panchmahalsand Baruch, Bellari, Bidar, Bijapur,Dharbad, Gulbarga, Kolar, Raichur,Simago, North Kanara, Kodgu,Dhane, Raygad, Ratnagiri, Nasik,Dhule, Jalgaon, Ahmednagar,Purne, Solapur, Aurangabad,Parbani, Bid, Nanded, Usmanabad,Buldhana, Ankola, Amarabati,Yawatmal and Nagpur.

(iv) At locations, where any otherlanguage in addition to the above isconsidered necessary, theCommercial Department maydecide the matter in consultationand with approval of the appropriateRailway Users ConsultativeCommittee and the concernedState Government.

(v) The script for the station names inHindi shall be Devnagari and forother languages as adopted by therespective State Governments.

(vi) The size of the letters and theirprominence for all the scripts shallbe uniform and conform to thefollowing :

Principal & Height of letters 300mmSecondary thickness in proportion toName Boards: the style of the script

Tertiary Height of letters 75mmName Boards: and thickness in

proportion to the style ofthe script.

Colour (Non- Letters in Black on TrafficSuburban Yellow background forStations): Principal, Secondary and

Tertiary name boards.

Colour Letters in Black on Traffic(Suburban Yellow back-ground forStations): Principal name boards.

Tertiary name boards tohave a distinguishingtarget of a ring bisectedby one or two bands on awhite background. Thecolours of the target ring,bands and letters shouldbe chosen by theEngineering Departmentbased on the tradition ofthe Railway and the needfor proper contrasting toensure a clear visibilityfrom a running train.

82


g) All station name boards shall beproperly illuminated so that they are legible atnight. Special importance is to be given tothe principal name-boards which may bespecially illuminated with a bright electric lampso that the whole of the board is clearly visibleand legible at night.

h) Station names in the same scripts asspecified here in above may also be displayedon the following structures so as to be visiblefrom a running train, the letters being in Blackon Traffic Yellow or White background :

(i) Lamp shades in letters of 75 mmheight

(ii) High service tanks and other TallStructures in letters of 300 mm to600 mm height

(iii) Cabins in letter of 300 mm heightilluminated with a bright electriclamp where the cabin is electrified.

425 Platform Sign-Boards

a) Indication sign boards - For largerstations, the following colour scheme shouldbe adopted :-

(i) Bright red letters on whitebackground for important officessuch as Station Superintendent,Deputy Station Superintendent,Enquiry, Telegraph and Railway MailService etc.

(ii) Blue letters on white background forpassenger amenities such asrefreshment rooms, waiting rooms,retiring rooms and platformlavatories etc.

(iii) Black letters on white backgroundfor other offices.

(iv) Blue arrows should be painted at 1.5metres above platform level or300mm above the dado level onthe walls directing passengers toWaiting, Refreshment and RetiringRooms. Red arrows should bepainted to direct passengers toStation Superintendent, DeputyStation Superintendent, Enquiryand Telegraph offices.

The lettering should be of size,suitable for the requirement.

(v) Every sign-board be painted on oneside with the name of the office inHindi and on the other in Englishand the regional language. Theboard should be erected at rightangles to the building andimmediately over the door of theoffice or room to which it refers.

(vi) The wording on sign-boards, thedirection of arrows and platformnumbers should be decided byDivisional Officers of theEngineering, Operating andCommercial Departments.

(vii) All notice boards shall be erectedand maintained by the EngineeringDepartment. Where notices arefastened to walls, proper fixturesshould be provided.

For smaller stations, black lettering onwhite background may be used for all kindsof sign boards which may be painted on one

83


side only and fixed to the wall.

b) Platform number signs - These maybe on enamel plates to the followingspecifications :-

Size of board .. 600 mm squareSize of letter .. 300 mmColour - .. white figure on blue

background.

At stations having a large number ofplatform signs, these should be fixed at rightangles to the track and staggered horizontallyso as to give a clear direction from a distance.The height of platform number signs may varyto suit local conditions.

426 Time Table Boards And Fare Lists-

Boards or cement plaques, with orwithout wire-netting, should be provided atsuitable places, in consultation with theCommercial Department, for posting timetables and fare lists thereon.

427 Pictogram -

At major stations and places of touristinterest important pictograms, indicating thelocations of various passenger amenities, asapproved by Railway Board should bedisplayed at suitable vantage locations in thestation premises.

428 Design of Station Complexes -

The layouts for the construction of thestations including the circulating areas, stationbuildings, goods shed etc., should be soplanned as to be functionally efficient. Forimportant stations the Engineering Departmentmay engage the services of Architectural

Consultants to evolve suitable plans. Apartfrom providing for the passenger amenitiesdetailed here in above the station layoutsshould be given special importance as detailedin paras 429 & 430.

429 Station Buildings

a) The layouts for the station buildingsshould provide for all the passenger amenitiesdetailed here in above and the functionalrequirements. The layout should also providefor future expansion and should result in anoverall pleasing and functionally efficientlayout. Amenities provided should be of user-friendly nature.

b) The station buildings shouldincorporate in them the features of the localarchitectural heritage wherever possible.While extending or modifying the existingstation buildings, it must be ensured that thenew construction harmonizes with thearchitecture of the existing station buildings.The plinth level of the station buildings shouldprovide for raising of the platform to a highlevel platform.

c) The existing facilities at the stationsshould be relocated to make these facilitiesuser friendly. As far as possible maintenancefree material should be used at stations toavoid frequent maintenance.

d) For all stations, the centre of the stationbuilding acts as the reference point for the yardplans, inter-station distances, chargeabledistances, etc. The reference point shall beprominently marked with an engraved verticalarrow on the external walls of the stationbuilding with the caption "CENTRE LINE OFSTATION" engraved below it. The locationrepresents a fixed reference point and shall

84


not be altered if the station building issubsequently extended, altered or rebuilt. Thefixed reference point shall be maintainedproperly and in the event of removal of thepart of the structure on which it is fixed, thereference point shall be re-engraved at thesame location on any other permanentstructural element available.

e) A permanent Bench Mark (B.M.) linkedwith the Survey of India B.M.System shouldalso be provided in the prescribed manner ona suitable part of the station building at alocation least likely to be disturbed. A list ofB.M.s should be maintained in the offices ofIOW, AEN, & DEN with complete descriptionof their location, level etc.

430 Approach Roads and Circulating Area

a) The location of new stations and theirfacilities covering Booking offices, Goodssheds, etc. should be so chosen as to beconvenient to the city, town or village servedby the station. The station and goods shedapproach should have an easy andunobstructed connection with the main roadsystem serving the station.

b) The approach roads for all the stationfacilities within the Railway land should bemaintained by the Engineering Department.The portion of the approach road beyond theRailway Boundary linking the main road

network of the city, town or village can alsobe maintained by the Engineering Departmentif the Road Authorities agree to thearrangement with the maintenance beingundertaken as a Deposit work.

c) The circulating area adjoining thestation building and goods shed should beproperly designed to ensure rapid dispersalof the passengers and road vehicles andavoiding conflict between pedestrian andvehicular traffic. The circulating area shouldprovide adequate parking space, nominatedspace for embarking and disembarking forvehicular traffic, and loading and unloading ofgoods. The circulating area should facilitate asmooth unhampered flow of the road traffic inthe vicinity of the station building and goodsshed.

d) While formulating the plans for newcirculating area or modifying the existingcirculating areas, the Engineering Departmentmay consult the appropriate local authoritiesto ensure that the Railway's planning matcheswith the local authorities' planning for the roadtraffic management near the station area.

e) Whenever circulating areas areredesigned, altered or wherever stations arecongested, possibility of providing FOBlandings directly into circulating areas shouldbe examined as it decongests main platforms.

f) No statues and plaques should beprovided in the station premises.

HHHHHHH

85



CATEGORIES OF STATIONS FOR PROVISION OF PASSENGER AMENITIES

Stations shall be classified in the following categories:

Category 'A': Non-suburban stations with an annual passenger earnings of Rs.6 crores andabove.

Category 'B' : I. Non-suburban stations with an annual passenger earnings between Rs.3crores to Rs.6 Crores.

II. Stations of Tourist importance, or an important junction station (to bedecided by G.M.).

Category 'C': All Suburban Stations.

Category 'D': Non-suburban station with passenger earnings between 1 and 3 Crores.

Category 'E': Non-suburban stations with earnings less than 1 crores.

Category 'F': Halts.

Note: Earnings of the year 1995-96 can be taken as the base till next review in the year 2001.

86


ANNEXURE-4.2Para 403

MINIMUM ESSENTIAL AMENITIES AT EACH CATEGORY OF STATIONS.

AMENITIES STATION CATEGORYA B C D E F

Booking facility Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes YesPlatforms - High Yes Yes

- Low Yes Yes - Rail level Yes YesDrinking water Yes Yes Yes Yes-PipedDrinking water(Hand Pump) Yes -Waiting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -Hall/ShedSeating Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -ArrangementPlatform Shelter Yes Yes Yes Yes - -Shady trees - - - - Yes YesLighting # Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*Fans@ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -Urinals Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -Latrines Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -Foot over bridge Yes Yes Yes - - -Time Table display Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes YesClock Yes Yes Yes Yes - -

# (i) Regular/flag stations should be electrified if electricity is available within one Km. (ii) If electricity is not available within one Km. and trains stop at night, electricity through solar

power be considered.* Where trains stop at night. @ To be provided at electrified stations.

87



SCALE OF MINIMUM ESSENTIAL AMENITIES AT STATIONS

AMENITY CATEGORY OF STATIONSA B C D E F

BOOKING FACILITY 15 10 7 4 2 1(No. of counters)

DRINKING WATER 12 taps 12 taps 6 taps 6 taps 1 tap 1 handon each on each on each on each /HP on pumpPF PF PF PF each PF at stations

WATING HALL 100 sqm 50 sqm 15 sqm 30 sqm 15 sqm 10 sqmBookingoffice cumwaiting hall

URINALS 10 6 4 4 1 -

LATERINES 10 6 2 4 1 -

P.F. SHELTERS 400 200 sqm 200 sqm 50 sqm Shady Shady treessqm on on each on each on each trees on on each PFeach PF PF PF PF each PF

SEATING 100 on 75 on 20 on 50 on 10 on -ARRANGEMENTS each P.F. each P.F. each P.F. each P.F. each P.F.(No. of seats)

Note: Scale of all the amenities prescribed above are the bare minimum to be provided at theappropriate class of stations. Amenities over and above the prescribed minimum scales willcontinue to be provided as per stipulated norms, details in Annexure 4.4.

88



RECOMMENDED AMENITITES

(Norms for provision of Passengers Amenities at the Recommended Level)Nmax = Average no. of passengers at any time during peak including the inward

and outward passengers (excluding mela traffic).Ndb = Design figure for number of passengers for 'A' & 'B' stations to be calculated

as Ndb = 0.3 (Nmax).Nds = Design figure for number of passengers for 'C', 'D' and 'E' stations to be

calculated as Nds = 0.45 (Nmax).

Amentities Recommended scale for provision Remarks

Cat. A & B Other stationsWaiting hall 1.394 Ndb sqm. 1.394 Nds.Sqm.

No. of seats 0.4 Ndb 0.4 Nds

Drinking Water No. of taps = Nmax/25. Taps No. of taps = Nmax/25should be distributed so thatevery alternate coach getsbenefit of a tap

Latrines 4 x Ndb/200 4 x Nds/200

Urinals Ndb/200 Nds/200 1/3rd of urinals bereserved for ladies.

P.F. Covering 0.28 Nmax 0.28 Nmax At important 'A' classand suburban stationsefforts should be tocover the entire P.F.

Bathroom 1/400 Ndb 1/400 Nds a)To be provided atJunctions andterminals stations only.b) At suburbanstations, bathroomsneed not be provided.

Coolers To be provided if total numbers of passengers is more than 1000 per day

Booking 1 window per 100arrangements tickets/hour

SPTM One SPTM for 800 tickets for 'A', 'B' and 'C' stations

IVRS A-48 lines (calls 72000) A central IVRS withB-24 lines (calls 5000-20000) adequate lines should be

provided to cover allsuburban stations.Other stations -Min. 6 lines if IVRS isotherwise justified.

89



DESIRABLE AMENITIES

FACILITY STATION CATEGORYA B C D E F

Retiring room Yes Yes -- Yes -- --Waiting Rooms

Common Yes Yes -- Yes -- --

Separate for upper Yes -- -- -- -- -- & second class

Separate for ladies Yes -- -- -- -- -- & gents

Cloak room Yes Yes -- -- -- --Enquiry Yes Yes Yes Yes -- --

NTES Yes -- -- -- -- --I.V.R.S. Yes Yes -- -- -- --Public address system Yes Yes Yes -- -- --Water vending machines Yes Yes -- -- -- --/ Chilling plantsWater coolers Yes Yes Yes Yes -- --Bathing facilities Yes Yes -- Yes -- --Book stalls/other stalls of Yes Yes Yes -- -- --essential goodsRefreshment room Yes Yes -- -- -- --Catering/ Vending stalls Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Parking/Circulatory area Yes Yes Yes Yes -- --Washable apron* Yes Yes -- -- -- --Train indicator Board Yes Yes Yes -- -- --Public phones Yes Yes Yes -- -- --

* Washable Aprons may be provided in a planned manner to cover only stations from wheretrains terminate/originate or stop for longer duration in the morning hours.

90

PASSENGER AMENITIES, STATIONS AND YARDSA

NN

EX

UR

E4.

6P

ara

408

PA

SS

EN

GE

R A

ME

NIT

IES

DE

TAIL

SS

tatio

n N

ame

Sec

unde

raba

d Jn

.C

ateg

ory

AA

dv.R

es.W

indo

ws

35 (N

os.)

No.

of p

asse

nger

s de

alt

with

:S

tatio

n C

ode

SC

Sec

tion

VIK

AR

AB

AD

-C

urr.B

ooki

ng W

in.

27 (n

os.)

(a) P

er D

ay50

00K

ZTR

ailw

ayS

CK

m.

194.

36E

nqui

ry O

ffice

s1

(nos

.)(b

) Max

.at a

ny ti

me:

8000

Div

isio

nS

ecun

dera

bad

Rou

teB

Pub

lic A

ddre

ss S

ys.

Yes

Pas

s.E

arni

ngs/

Yea

r(R

s.):

60,0

00,0

00S

tate

And

hra

Pra

desh

Ele

ctrif

ied

Yes

Clo

ckN

oLe

ngth

of l

onge

st53

9st

oppi

ngtra

in(m

)D

istri

ctH

yder

abad

FOB

3W

heel

Cha

irs0

Sub

way

0O

ther

Item

s

PF

IsLe

ngth

Bre

aH

eigh

t Sur

face

She

lter

Tree

sTa

psH

and

Wat

erW

ater

Was

hC

arr.

Sea

tsLa

v.U

rinal

sFa

nsV.

CC

Gau

geN

o.la

nd(m

)-d

th(c

m)

Sq.

m.

Nos

.N

osP

ump

Hut

s/C

oole

rs-a

ble

Wat

eN

os.

Nos

.N

os.

Nos

Sta

llTV

Y/N

(m)

sTr

ollie

sN

os.

Apr

on-ri

ngN

os.

Nos

.N

os.

Nos

.(m

)(m

)1

N51

60

83P

ucca

5372

027

00

90

020

94

00

01

BG

2&3

N49

80

83P

ucca

2928

014

00

30

015

60

00

01

BG

4&5

Y49

0/49

00

84P

ucca

5496

016

00

00

060

00

00

1B

G

6&7

Y63

9/63

90

84P

ucca

3294

012

00

00

021

00

00

1B

G

W

AIT

ING

HA

LL

W

AIT

ING

RO

OM

UC

Wai

ting

Roo

m A

rea

(sqm

):0

Bat

hing

Cub

ical

s:6

Ope

n W

ells

(N

os.):

0(a

) A

rea:

637 .

89G

ents

Lad i

esR

efre

shm

ent

Roo

m (

sqm

)34

0C

ircul

atin

g A

rea

(Sqm

)0

Bor

e W

ells

(N

os.)

0(b

) Sea

ts:

638

Are

a (sq

m)

257

0R

etiri

ng R

oom

(Nos

.)20

Circ

ulat

ing

Are

a (T

ype)

OH

Tan

k C

ap. i

n lit

res

0(c

) Lav

.(Nos

.)4

Lav.

(Nos

.)4

0B

eds

in R

etiri

ng R

oom

(N

os.)

20A

ppro

ach

Roa

d (T

ype)

(d)

Urin

als

4U

r ina l

s(N

os.)

00

Bed

s in

Dor

mito

ry (

Nos

.)0

Rem

arks

for

wat

er:

Tour

ist f

acili

tyN

oD

rinki

ng w

ater

taps

ava

ilabl

e on

Clo

ak R

oom

:N

oal

l pla

tform

s

Rem

arks

for S

tatio

n:S

UM

MA

RY

Item

Wai

ting

Hal

lS

helte

rTa

p/H

Lava

torie

s (N

os.)

Urin

als

(Nos

.)S

eats

(N

os.)

He i

ght

(Sqm

)(S

qm)

Pof

Pla

tform

sA

s pe

r no

rms

3346

2240

320

4812

960

HL

Act

ual

637.

8917

090

6912

410

84S

ee p

latfo

rmde

tai l s

Sho

rtage

, if a

ny26

08.1

125

136

8

91

WATER SUPPLY

CHAPTER V

A. WATER SUPPLY

501 General - Reference may be madeto the following for provisions not contained inthis Chapter. In case of any variation, thelatter shall prevail.

(1) Manual on water supply andtreatment by Ministry of UrbanDevelopment, New Delhi

(2) IS:1172 - 1983

(3) IS:10500 - 1991

(4) National Building Code of India

(5) Manuals issued by local publichealth departments

502 Preparation of Schemes for NewWater Supply/Augmentation of ExistingWater Supply -The preparation of schemesfor new water supply/augmentation of existingwater supply will involve collection of followingdata:-

a) Justification for an improved oradditional supply or new supply -

This will include number of people to becovered, estimated consumption and basis ofcalculation;

b) Nature, quality and quantity of existingsupply and its source;

c) Possible sources of additional supplyand arrangements for its filtration, purificationetc;

d) Future requirements if known;

e) Whether the supply will be metered,continuous or intermittent;

f) Details of pumping arrangement andits cost.

For collecting this data, preliminarysurvey, site investigation may be necessary.The investigation will involve yield test, checkon quality of water etc. Necessary checklistfor framing water supply proposals is givenas Annexure 5.1.

503 Review of Water SupplyArrangements on the Railways:Engineering Department officials should keepthemselves posted with the informationregarding rainfall, supply position fromvarious sources and take suitable action toavoid any breakdown in supply of adequatewater of proper quality.

Every year the Divisional RailwayManager should conduct a Water Reviewmeeting with all the branch officers and CivilPublic Health Department if required, to reviewthe adequacy of existing water supply,augmentation required, any other action to betaken for avoidance of emergency duringsummer months etc. Minutes of the meetingshould be sent to the office of the ChiefEngineer for information. Copy should alsobe endorsed to the Assistant Engineers andSection Engineers (Works) for necessaryaction.

After the review meeting, the DivisionalEngineer should submit necessary proposalsfor augmentation of water supply to concernedauthorities wherever required and take furtheraction.

92

WATER SUPPLY

504 Data for EstimatingRequirements of Water: The scale of dailysupply may be computed on the following

minimum basis unless otherwise justified byparticular circumstances. Allowance shouldbe made for future development:-

________________________________________________________________________________________________________Particulars Litres per day(a) Residential areaHousehold consumption for .. 200 (Includes 45 litres required forOfficers and staff per head .. flushing).

(b) Office and workshopOffices per head .. 45Workshops per head .. 30

(c) Station and platformApron washing .. 10 per sqmPlatform washing .. 5 per sqm.Passengers on railway station .. * 25 per passengerWashing of carriages on .. 3600 per carriage for BGwashing lines .. 2600 per carriage for MGCleaning of carriages on .. 500 per carriageplatformCarriage watering .. **as per actual requirements.(d) MiscellaneousGardens per hectare .. 22500 approx.of lawn areaHospital .. 450 per bedFire Service .. Occasional Sumps and hydrants

to be adequate for emergencies.________________________________________________________________________________________________________

* Number of passengers for estimating requirement at a station shall be equal to passengersentraining at the station plus half of the passengers detraining.

* * Quantity of water required for train originating station shall be equal to the full capacityof tanks for all the coaches. For trains scheduled for watering on other stations, only 75% fillingcapacity may be considered.

505 Capacity of Source -

Ordinarily, in the summer season,sources should be able to supply in eight hoursthe quantity of water normally consumed in aday.

93

WATER SUPPLY

B. OPEN WELLS

506 Preliminary Measures for Sinking

a) Samples of strata and samples ofunderground water for chemical andbacteriological analysis should be obtained bytrial-boring or sinking a test-well. This workshould normally be carried out in the dryseason. The Geological Department should,whenever possible, be consulted in regard tothe strata and source at the proposed site.

b) The yield of the test-well should beassessed by carrying out a recuperation testafter pumping the water to below the "normalwater-table" and plotting the results in the formof a diagram with draw down as abscissaand the inflow in litres per hour as the ordinate.

507 Determination of Size:

(a) From the yield diagram, the diameterand depth of an open well should be arrived aton considerations of the maximum dailyrequirements, due allowance being made forthe future demands.

b) For the size of the open well, thefollowing factors should be considered:-

(i) The normal water table - This isthe level at which water stands in awell which has not been pumped for24 hours. This varies throughout theyear; and

(ii) The critical velocity of flow - Thecritical velocity of inflow is themaximum velocity of water passingthrough subsoil without disturbingthe finer particles of the subsoil.

In average conditions of subsoil,this velocity is between 750 mmand 1200 mm per hour and isobtained with a head of 2 metre to3 metre.

The safe yield of open wells islimited by the critical velocity andfor practical purposes the yield maybe obtained by multiplying the criticalvelocity by the area of the floor ofthe well.

508 Improving Yield in Open Wells

b) In sandy soil - If the yield with a "drop"of 2 meters is insufficient, then a largerdiameter well is needed. Alternatively, a tubewell may be sunk in the open well tosupplement the yield. Any increase in the"drop" will increase the "critical velocity" and"blowing" of the sandy soil and subsidence ofstaining may occur.

c) In moorum and porous rock - If theyield is insufficient, it may be improved bydeepening provided the lower strata is porous.This can only be ascertained by making abore.

Driving adits into sides of the well andproviding a greater number of "weep-holes"would increase the yield.

In porous rock the inflow may be slightlyincreased by holding up surface flow of therainfall in the vicinity of the well. This may beeffected by building a bund on the upstreamside of the well.

94

WATER SUPPLY

509 Shallow Tube-Wells -

Tube-wells to a depth of 7.5 meters to 12meters are found useful for tapping a shallowwater-table. Where only small quantities ofwater are required, these are cheaper thanopen-wells and may be constructed at waysidestations, gang quarters and gate-lodgesbetween stations if the water-table could betapped at a reasonable depth. Quality of waterof these wells is not reliable and disinfectionis essential.

Shallow tube well can be operated eitherelectrically or manually depending upon theconvenience.

At unimportant stations and waysidestations where water table is within about 10metres of the ground level, hand pumps shouldbe installed in colonies.

Hand pumps have been standardizedby Bureau of Indian Standards and standardhand pumps are available for installation.Sufficient number of spare parts for repair ofhand pumps should be kept with the SectionEngineer (Works) to attend to emergencies.

C. DEEP TUBE WELLS

510 Consultation with GeologicalDepartment -

The Geological Department or CentralGround Water Board / Public HealthEngineering department of the StateGovernment should, be consulted wherevernecessary, for proposals of deep tube-wells.Where the "normal-water-table" is at greaterdepth, it would be economical and preferableto sink deep tube-wells instead of open-wells.

511 Stages of Work for Sinking

a) Trial boring-

(i) During sinking of pipes, samples ofstrata are examined for yield andsamples of water taken for analysis

(ii) From the results obtained, the areaof strainer necessary for thequantity of water required and thestrata in which the strainers shouldbe located are decided upon

b) Samples of water for analysis-For alarge water supply, water should be drawnfrom as great a depth as possible to eliminatethe danger of bacteriological contaminationwhich can be expected in water drawn fromthe upper strata. Water drawn from deepground is likely to be bacteriologically pure.

As the water obtained from deep wellsmay contain certain dissolved impurities, thechemical analysis of water to determine itssuitability for drinking is always necessary andsamples should be sent to the DivisionalMedical Officer for test.

c) Tube-well installation- Initially thecasing pipes are sunk to required depth.Strainers and plain pipes of tube-well properare then lowered to correct depths.

In suitable cases, pebbles or gravel islet down between the casing pipes and thetube-well as shrouding during casing-pipeextraction. This is essential when the strainersare located in fine sand.

Brass, galvanized iron, special alloysteel, high density polythene or PVC and metalcombined strainers of the requisite size with

95

WATER SUPPLY

gravel/sand shroud may be used. The totalarea of the openings in the screen should besuch that the velocity of inflowing water issufficiently low to avoid disturbance to thesmaller particles of the water bearing stratum.

d) Testing yield of tube-wells.- A tube-well should be tested for yield by experiencedstaff of the tube well organization of theRailway. IS:2800-1979 may be referred wherenecessary.

512 Checking Verticality of Tube Wells-

Tubewells must be perfectly vertical. Asimple method is to use plumb disk. Two disksmade out of 3mm thick steel plate areconnected together by a rod of 25mm diameterand 3 metre long tightened with the help ofnuts at the ends. Some holes are punched inplates to facilitate immersion in water. A knobis fixed on the top nut to which a thin steelwire is attached .The disk is suspended intothe tube by the wire passing over a pulley ona tripod.

When the disk is lowered into thepipe,the wire is exactly in the centre of pipe .

When the disks are further lowered down andif the well pipe is not truly vertical, the wirewill deviate from the centre and that shall beindicated at the top of pipe.

Absolute verticality is ideal but adeviation of 100mm per 30 metres of boring isgenerally acceptable where submersiblepumps are not to be installed.

513 Failure Of Wells And TheRemedial Measures -

The clogging of wells by sand or bycorrosion or encrustation of the screen mayreduce the yield substantially. The wells maybe readily cleaned of sand by means of a sandpump or bucket but if the strainers arecorroded, they must be pulled out, cleaned orrenewed or replaced.

Method of surging, use of dry ice orchemical treatment by using acids, chlorine,polyphosphates may be used for treatmentagainst clogging. Following table gives typesof well clogging problems and recommendedtreatment :

WELL CLOGGING PROBLEMS AND ITS SUGGESTED TREATMENTS____________________________________________________________________________________Problem Treatment recommended____________________________________________________________________________________1. Clogging due to fine Sodium hexametaphosphate50gm/litres depending on the capacity of sand, clay and silts well bore be left therein for 24 hours.The same should be followed by

surging, jetting with chemical mix or normal development till well isfreed from clogging

2. Chemical clogging Hydrochloric acid or sulphuric acid with inhibitor are added to the well

3. Bacterial clogging Chlorine has been found to be effective in loosening this type of cloggingCalcium hypochloride should be used to form solution which is introducedin well in a small polythene pipe. 200 gms. of hypochloride is requiredat 70% concentration for 1000 litres of water

96

WATER SUPPLY

514 Disinfection of Wells -

Newly constructed wells as well as thoseafter repairs have to be disinfected by heavydosages of chlorine. Bleaching powder isgenerally used for this purpose.

D. IMPOUNDING RESERVOIRS

515. Governing factors -

The catchment area, its characteristicsand the rainfall decide how much water wouldbe available for storage. A contour plan of theneighborhood of proposed dam facilitates thedecision of the height of the dam and decideswhether or not there is sufficient storagecapacity for the amount of water needed.Losses by evaporation and absorption shouldbe assessed. Expert agencies should beconsulted where necessary.

516 Storage Capacity -

The storage capacity depends on theheight of the dam and contours of catchmentbehind. Due allowance should be made forlosses due to seepage, evaporation and silting.

517 Cracks in reservoir walls -

Cracks that may occur in reservoir wallsshould be grouted, with fine cement grout/resins. They should be kept under observation.

518 Reservoir Management -

Problem of silting, evaporation losses,seepage and algae troubles are some of the

areas requiring attention. Loss of capacity dueto the deposition of silt in reservoir may impairthe usefulness of the reservoir within a fewyears. It may be minimized by erosion control,reservoir operation and desilting works. Thereare various commercially available organiccompounds which when spread on the watersurface form a monomolecular film, whichreduces evaporation. Seepage can be reducedby making cut off wall beneath the dam. Thewater weeds in the reservoir should becontrolled by suitable methods such asdragging and underwater cutting. Algicidaltreatment by using suitable Algicide may beadopted to control algae in reservoir. It ispreferable to initiate the treatment in the earlystages of algae growth.

E. INFILTRATION GALLERIES ANDWELLS

519 Infiltration Gallery -

These are constructed in water bearingstrata. The gallery obtains its water from waterbearing strata by various porous drain pipes.A collecting well at the downstream end ofthe gallery serves as the sump from wherethe infiltrated supply is pumped out. Thegallery laid perpendicular to the flow of sub-surface water yields maximum quantity.Quality of water is normally reasonably goodand only disinfection may be required.

520 Infiltration Well -

Infiltration wells are usually sunk in seriesin the banks of river. They are generallyconstructed of masonry with open joints. Theinfiltration wells in turn are connected byporous pipes to a collecting sump (jack well).

97

WATER SUPPLY

There can be large yield of waterfrom these wells. Quality of water varies withquality of water in river, depth, and distanceof well from river bank.

521 Radial Collector Wells -

Radial collector well consists of acylindrical well of reinforced concreteconstruction, 4-5 metre in diameter going intothe water bearing medium to as great a depthof the substrata as possible. In the collectorwells the radial pipes which are slotted steelpipes normally 200mm to 300mm diameter aredriven horizontally at about 7 meters belowthe water table in the well. The length of thesteel pipes will be determined by therequirement of water and yield of the aquiferi.e. the water bearing medium in the subsoil.The drain pipes are made of short lengths ofpipes 2.4 metres each which are welded toeach other. The pipes are driven horizontallyby means of suitable pin jacks placed in thewell.

Desanding operation is required to bedone after driving of the radial pipes.Desanding is done by inserting another tubeinto the drain tubes and blast of compressedair to separate the fine particles of alluvium.The radial collector wells have higher efficiencyof drawing the ground water compared toordinary wells. This type of wells are able toobtain high yields of water depending on thestrata and depth of submergence. This isnormally provided in alluvial beds of majorrivers.

522 Intake Arrangements -

Detailed consideration is necessary forthe design of intake to prevent vortex formationto obtain uniform distribution of the inflow to

all the pumps and to maintain sufficient depthof water to avoid air entry during draw down.

The suction pipe should be as short andstraight as possible. Any bends or elbowsshould be of large radius. As a general rulethe sizes of the suction pipe should be of oneor two sizes greater than the nominal size ofthe pump. Alternatively the suction pipe shouldbe such that the velocity is about 2m/s. Wherebell mouth is used, the inlet of the bell mouthshould be of such size that the velocity at thebell mouth is about 1.5 m/s. The suctionstrainer should have net open area equal tothree times the area of the suction pipe atleast.

523 Water Supply from OutsideSources -

When water is obtained for railwaypurposes from the Public Works Department,the Municipality or a private body, theagreement should clearly specify:-

(a) term or duration of agreement;

(b) rate of payment for water;

(c) mode of measurement and locationof meters etc,

(d) maximum and minimum quantitiesto be supplied daily;

(e) minimum pressure to be maintainedin the mains at points of supply;

(f) in case of bulk supply, point orpoints at which water is to besupplied;

98

WATER SUPPLY

(g) in case of distributed supply, detailsof the layout of distribution mainsand conditions for extensions orextra connections.

Copies of such agreements should beavailable in the Divisional Engineer's andAssistant Engineer's offices.

F. PUMPS

524 Types and Selection of Pumps

a) The types of pumps in general useare reciprocating, centrifugal, airlift andvertical spindle deep well turbine pumps.Hydraulic rams are useful and economical inperennial streams for supply of comparativelysmall quantities of water.

b) Reciprocating pumps have nearly auniform efficiency over a large range andtherefore greater flexibility in operation.Reciprocating pumps may be duplex, triplexor quadruplex accordingly to the number ofwater-cylinders and are suitable for pumpingfrom open wells. They are, however, notsuitable for tube-well operation as theintermittent suction has a damaging effect onthe strainers.

c) Centrifugal pumps are efficient,economical and require little attention. Thesuction lift is, however, limited as in the caseof reciprocating pumps.

In tube-wells where centrifugal pumpscannot be installed sufficiently close to thewater-table, airlift pumps may be used. Theirefficiency is, however, low and should notnormally be used for capacities in excess of

35000 litres per hour.

d) Vertical spindle deep well turbinepumps are suitable for tube wells of large size;they are easy to operate and have a highefficiency. They should be used in tube wellswhich are free from grit and where competentsupervisory staff are available, asadjustments during repairs require skilledattention.

Submersible pump is suitable forcomparatively smaller installations. Itconsists of an electric motor and pump bothsubmerged in water; the vertical spinning shaftis dispensed with, the water being pumpedthrough a vertical pipe.

e) Pumping units should be so selectedthat they could be operated continuously atrated load, as the units are operated mostefficiently at the rated load.

f) Pumping capacity should not exceedthe yield of the source, so as not to damagethe strata through which water filtrates intothe source.

525 Pump Installation -

While installing a pump, the followingpoints should be paid attention:

a) the foundation should be sufficientlystrong to absorb vibrations and toform a permanent, rigid support forthe base plate. The foundations shallbe designed for the loads as perIS:2974 Part IV - 1979.

b) the suction lift, which should bemade as low as possible; thegreatest suction-lift that may be

99

WATER SUPPLY

expected at sea-level is about 7metres.

c) the suction pipe should be air-tight,laid with as few bends as possibleand equipped with foot-valve.

d) near the pump, a non-return(reflux)valve and a delivery valve(sluice or butterfly valve) should beprovided. The non-return valveshould be between the pump andthe delivery valve. The size of thevalve should match the size of pipe.

e) the delivery pipe shall be of suchsize that the velocity of water isabout 2.5 m/s.

f) a dismantling joint must beprovided between the pump and thevalves. The design of thedismantling joint should be suchthat no pull or push is transmittedto the pump.

g) Sufficient space for generating setsshould be available in the pumphouse to locate the pump, motor,valves, pipes, control panels in arational manner with easy accessand with sufficient space around forthe maintenance and repairs. Theminimum space between twoadjoining pumps or motors shouldbe 0.6 m for a small or medium unitsand 1.0 m for large units.

Space for control panels should beplanned as per the Indian Electricity Rules.

526 Driving Units -

The driving unit may be an electric motor,or an oil engine. Where power is available:-

(i) the prime mover should preferablybe an electric motor, beingeconomical;

(ii) the stand-by where provided maybe an electric generator so that incase of failure of electric supply,pumping is assured.

(iii) Where power is not available, oilengines may be used.

(iv) Non-return valve at the dischargepipe, supplemented by a sluicevalve shall not be closed while thepump is running.

527 Capacity of Pumping -

The pumping system should be capableof supplying:-

(a) In 12 hours or less, the normalquantity required in 24 hours;

(b) In 16 hours or less, the presentmaximum quantity required in 24hours;

(c) In about 20 hours, the estimatedmaximum future requirements in24 hours.

For small pumping systems, generallyof capacity less than 15 million litres per day,two pumps (one duty and one standby of fullcapacity) should be provided. Alternatively,

100

WATER SUPPLY

two duty and one standby, each of 50%capacity may be provided. Although thisalternative would need larger space, itfacilitates flexibility in regulating the watersupply. Also in an emergency of two pumpsgoing out of order simultaneously, the thirdhelps to maintain at least partial supply.

In the case of medium and largepumping stations , at least two standbysshould be provided. Electrical department isresponsible for installation and maintenanceof electrical machinery/equipments.

528 Pump Horse Power -

The equation for pump horse power-

P.H.P.= L(H+h)4560

Where P.H.P is the pump horse power(metric): (One metric horse power = 75kilogram metres/Sec.), H is the vertical heightin metres from suction-level to highest pointof discharge; L is the litres of water per minuteand 'h' the head lost in friction in metres.

8 percent extra for incrustation in thecase of cast iron pipes may be allowed whilecalculating PHP. The relation between thepump horse power and the indicated horsepower or brake horse power of the engineworking the pump depends on the type ofengine and type of pump and their efficiency.

G. AQUEDUCTS AND PIPE LINES

529 Conveyance of Water from Source

a) Gravity conduits should be accuratelyset out to the necessary gradient and covered

to prevent contamination; they should beprovided at the lowest point with a scour sluiceand with manholes not farther apart than 250meters and at all bends and changes ofgradient.

b) For pressure mains, galvanizedscrewed pipes upto 80 mm diameter may beused; for diameters over 80 mm, cast ironspigot and socket or reinforced concrete orsuitable asbestos pipes should be used asper relevant BIS specification.

c) Cast iron pipes.- First and Secondclass cast iron pipes in stock when usedshould be treated with a suitable solution inorder to reduce corrosion and encrustation.

Owing to liability to tuberculation andencrustation, it is not economical to use castiron pipes of 80 mm diameter or less. Whenarriving at the diameter of a cast iron pipe,calculations should be based on data for oldpipes unless it is positively known that thepipes will not be required to serve for morethan two years.

d) Concrete pipes: Concrete pipes arebest suited where pressure is low and dangerof shock is small. These are not to be usedfor pressures above 50 metres head of water.For greater pressures, hume/steel pipes areto be used.

Reinforced concrete pipes used in watersupplies are classified as P1, P2 and P3 withtest pressures of 2.0, 4.0 and 6.0 kg/cm2respectively. For use on gravity mains, theworking pressure should not exceed 2/3 ofthe test pressure. For use on pumping mains,the working pressure should not exceed halfof the test pressure.

101

WATER SUPPLY

Generally concrete pipes have corrosionresistant properties similar to those ofprestressed concrete pipes (PSC) althoughthey have their own feature which significantlyaffect corrosion performance. Concrete pipesare made by centrifugal spinning or vibratoryprocesses. Centrifugally spun pipes aresubjected to high rotational forces duringmanufacture with improved corrosionresistance properties.

While RCC pipes can cater to the needswhere pressures are upto 3.0 kg/cm2 andC.I. and steel pipes cater to the needs of higherpressures around 24 Kg/cm2, the PSC pipescater to intermediate pressure range for whichthe metallic pipes are expensive while RCCpipes would not be suitable.

PSC competes economically with steelfor pipe diameters of 600 mm and above. ThePSC pipes are ideally suited for water supplymains where pressures in the range of 6 Kg/cm2 to 20 Kg/cm2 are encountered.

e) PVC pipes have the advantages ofresistance to corrosion, lightness of weight,toughness, rigidity and ease of installation.PVC pipes are cheaper and do not get pittedor corroded in service. They are resistant toa wide range of chemicals. They have goodelastic properties and resistance todeformation resulting from earth movementsin buried conditions. Thermal retentivity ofPVC is very low compared to metals. PVCpipes are available in various sizes rangingfrom 20mm to 315mm and stand workingpressures varying from 2 to 10 kg per cmsquare. The use of PVC pipes above groundis not encouraged for the reason that thedecomposition of the plastic material isaccelerated by the ultra violet light andfrequent changes in temperature. The

deterioration results in discoloration, surfacecracking and ultimately rendering the pipe unfitfor use.

PVC pipes are not suitable for hot watersupply systems. Hitherto GI pipes have beenin predominant use in water supply systems.Now pipes with specific improvedcharacteristics are available.

f) Steel pipes: Steel pipes can be adoptedconveniently where changes in relative groundlevels are there and are very suitable for layingin grounds liable to subsidence. Where highdynamic loading is expected, pipes are joinedby flexible joint.

Judicious method of laying and joiningmay be used i.e. either flexible joint made ofwhite lead and spun yarn or welding the plainended pipes (refer IS 5822-1986).

530 Pipe Laying and Fitting of Valvesand Meters

a) The following instructions shouldbe followed : -

(i) For a gravity line, the pipe line mayfollow the contour of the ground solong as frequent and abruptchanges in gradient are avoided,and it is well below the hydraulicgradient under conditions ofmaximum discharge.

(ii) Keep the top of pipe at least 0.5metres below ground surface andwhere severe frost occurs, thecover is at least 1 metre. The bedof the trench shall be finished to aneven gradient/level and filled withsoil rammed in 150 mm layers.

102

WATER SUPPLY

(iii) Provide air valves at all summitsand scour valves at all sags.

(iv) Lay spigot and socket pipes withsockets facing the direction fromwhich the water will flow.

(v) Carry pipes across deepdepressions or marshy places onpillars or props.

(vi) On steep hill-sides, anchor thepipes to prevent sliding of pipesdownslope In vertical position, usepipes with flanged ends and boltsas far as possible.

(vii) Close the open end of the last pipeat the end of the day's work.

(viii) Test the pipe line with waterpressure in sections before thetrench is filled in.

b) Pipe lines should be fitted, wherenecessary with:-

(i) Air valves of proper size andpressure rating at summits.

(ii) Reflex (non-return) valves at thefoot of all ascending parts of amain.

(iii) Scour valves at depressions on themain for clearing sediment andemptying the pipes.

(iv) Sluices as necessary in order todivide the main into convenientsections for repairs.

(v) A ball cock at the discharge end of

a gravitational main when thedischarge into a tank or reservoiris to be automatically controlled. Aball cock must only be used at theend of a pumping main if there is asafety or relief valve on the main.

(vi) Meters as required.

c) The covers and glands of all valvesshould be removed, packing adjusted, spindlesand gates examined and the whole assemblyrefitted in free and perfect order beforeinstallation.

H. WATER TREATMENT

531 Quality of Water -

It should be ensured that the watersupplied is clear, potable, free from pathogenicorganisms and odour. Water should be ofreasonable temperature and free from mineralswhich could produce undesirable physiologicaleffects.

The physical and chemical Standardsas per Annexure 5.2 may be adhered fordrinking water supply.

532 Water Samples for Analysis -

Whenever the quality of water from anysource of supply or from taps is to be testedand samples are required to be collected bythe Engineering staff, the following procedureshould be followed:-

a) Sterilized glass-stoppered bottlesavailable with the Divisional Medical Officershould be obtained. Bottles separatelyavailable for bacteriological or chemical

103

WATER SUPPLY

examination have to be appropriately used.

The paper cover of the stopper shouldbe removed just before taking the sample. Thestopper should be removed just before fillingthe bottle and replaced immediately after. Thestopper should be held from the top while thebottle is being filled. Contamination while fillingthe bottle must be avoided. There should beno external contact with the mouth of the bottleor the part of the stopper that goes into it.The bottle should be filled to about 25mmbelow its neck.

b) When samples of water are taken froma tap, the mouth of the tap should be heatedby a spirit lamp for 3 minutes. Water shouldthen be allowed to flow for 5 minutes beforethe sampling bottle is filled.

c) If the sample is to be obtained from atank or a reservoir or a river, the unopenedbottle is to be held in water about 300 mmbelow the surface and away from the edgewithout disturbing the bed. The stopper shouldthen be removed, the bottle withdrawn whenfull, a few drops of water poured out and thestopper replaced and tied down.

d) Well water should be collected bylowering the bottle (tied with a piece of weight)into the well by a string attached to the neck;the stopper should be removed by anotherstring tied to it and the bottle filled in with water,not from the surface but from a point a metreor two above the bottom of the well. If collectedfrom a tube-well with a pump, the water shouldbe allowed to flow for about 20 minutes.

e) Bottles containing samples of watershould be properly labeled, packed aroundwith ice and saw-dust and sent without any

delay to reach the Divisional Medical Officer.Satisfactory packing and expeditious dispatchare essential for a proper bacteriologicalexamination.

533 Method of Treatment -

The aim of water treatment is to produceand maintain water that is hygienically safe,clean and potable in an economical manner.Treatment should ensure the desired qualityat the end points of consumption.

The method of treatment to be employeddepends on the nature of raw water and thedesired standards of water quality. The unitoperations in water treatment constituteaeration, flocculation (rapid and slow) andclarification, filtration, disinfection, softening,deferrization,defluoridation and waterconditioning. Different combinations arepossible to achieve the required quality ofwater. The choice of any particular sequenceof treatment will depend not only on the qualityof the raw water available but also on thecomparative economics of alternativetreatment steps to get desired quality.

In the case of ground water storagewhich are well protected, where the water hasturbidity below 10 NTU and water is free fromodour and colour, plain disinfection bychlorination is adopted before supply.

Where ground water contains excessiveiron, dissolved carbon dioxide and odorousgases, aeration followed by flocculation andsedimentation, rapid gravity or pressurefiltration and disinfection may be necessary.

Conventional treatment including pre-chlorination, aeration, flocculation and

104

WATER SUPPLY

sedimentation, rapid gravity filtration and post-chlorination are adopted for highly pollutedsurface waters laden with algae or other microorganisms.

Water with excessive hardness willneed softening by conventional method or byion exchange method.

534 Disinfection of Water - Watertreatment processes described in paragraphabove remove micro organisms to varyingdegrees. For utmost safety of water fordrinking purposes, disinfection of water hasto be done to remove disease producingorganisms before it enters distribution system.Disinfection is also required to preventcontamination of water during its transit fromthe treatment plant to the place of itsconsumption. The efficiency of disinfectiondepends on the nature of disinfectants. Fortreatment on larger scale, chlorination isgenerally used as treatment for disinfection.Chlorine can be applied in water by usingbleaching powder, chloramines or as freechlorine gas. A minimum of 30 to 60 minutescontact time must be provided before deliveryof water to the consumer.

Utmost care shall be taken for storageand use of disinfectants. All safety precautionsas laid down in relevant codes shall be taken.

Sufficient number of chlorinators inworking conditions should be available withthe Inspectors of works. To decide the quantityof chlorine to be added,Inspector of worksshould find out breakpoint chlorination andaccordingly chlorinate the supply.

535 Residual Chlorine -

Minimum residual chlorine available atthe farthest end shall be 0.2 mg per litre.However, where distribution is long andcomplex it may be difficult to maintain theminimum residual value and in such casesre-chlorination may be carried out in thedistribution system.

During monsoon months or if specificcomplaints are there, super-chlorination morethan 2 ppm of chlorine may be resorted toeffectively get rid of bacteria.

The Section Engineer (Works) shouldfrequently check the concentration of residualchlorine at the consumer point by orthotolodinetest. In this test 100 ml of chlorinated watersample is collected in the test tube. 1 ml oforthotolodine solution is added to it. The colourformed is noted, value of the residual chlorineis directly determined by comparing the colourso obtained with the standard chart of coloursof non-chlorine residuals. Divisional Engineershould ensure sufficient number of equipmentwith all the field units.

I. HIGH-LEVEL STORAGE

536 Storage Capacity -

Normally, the storage capacity should beequal to the higher of the following figures:-

a) With efficient stand-by pump:-

(i) One-quarter the maximum waterconsumption in 24 hours

(ii) One-third the normal waterconsumption in 24 hours

105

WATER SUPPLY

b) Without stand-by pump:-

(i) One-third the maximum waterconsumption in 24 hours.

(ii) One-half the normal consumption in24 hours.

Local conditions should however beconsidered when deciding on the storagecapacity. Each tank may be partitioned tofacilitate cleaning or repairs.

537 Maintenance and Cleaning ofStorage Tanks

a) For the inspection, maintenance andpainting of steel-work, action should be takenas detailed in the Indian Railways BridgeManual.

b) Tanks used for the storage of drinkingwater should be rubbed and cleaned at suchintervals as specified by the DivisionalEngineer. The cleaning of water tank anddisinfection should be carried out as perrecommended procedure. Tanks used for thestorage of water for locomotive and carriagewashing purposes should be scrubbed andcleaned at least once in six months.

Reports on cleaning of tanks should besubmitted to the Assistant Engineer by theSection Engineer (Works) who shall maintaina register with complete particulars for thepurpose. The periodical reports should includeinformation regarding the condition of externaland internal painting and corrosion, if any.

The dates of cleaning and of bothexternal and internal painting should bepainted on one side of the staging in such a

manner that these are readily visible.

538 Float Gauges and ScouringSluices-

Every high level storage tank should beprovided on the outside with a float gauge witha scale marked in metres divided into 5 partsto indicate the water level in the tank.

Every storage tank whether at high levelor at ground level should be provided with asluice at its sill level to facilitate the cleaningof the tank.

539 Protection Against Pollution -High service storage tanks, for drinking waterin particular, should be locked and providedwith gauze wire to obviate pollution by birdsand growth of algae.

J. DISTRIBUTION OF WATER

540 Distribution System -

The distribution system is important in awater supply scheme for wholesome andadequate supply of water at required pressuresin sufficient quantity. The distribution accountsfor 40 to 70% of the outlay of the water supplyscheme. Proper provision of configuration ofpipes, pumping arrangements, and location ofvalves and pipe specials are very importantand adequate attention should be paid to thefunctional and hydraulic purposes to be servedby the system. For general convenience ofdistribution, a grid where different mains areinterconnected is recommended. This systemfacilitates supply of water to any point fromtwo directions. The tree system of distributionwill be adequate only in small water supply

106

WATER SUPPLY

distribution system on wayside stations.

541 Layout of Distribution Systems -Distribution systems should be laid out in theform best suited to conditions at site. Theeconomical diameter of a pipe-line is basedon considerations of head-losses andvelocities under conditions of maximum flowincluding fire demand. The design of thedistribution system should be based on themaximum estimated daily consumption beingsupplied in 10 to 16 hours as may beprescribed.

A diagram of mains, branch mains anddistributaries should be prepared and on it thepoints of supply, the lengths of pipes and thereduced levels of all junctions noted. Startingat the end farthest from the points of supply,the supply in litres per minute that each pipemust be able to accommodate, is worked outfor its length and noted on the diagram. Fromthe heads and longitudinal sections, thediameters are arrived at; a reserve of at least3 metres head should be ensured at the tail-end of every service line under conditions ofmaximum discharge.

542 Rising Mains not to be Used forDistribution -

The tapping of a rising main for purposesof distribution shall be strictly prohibited.Where, for engineering construction purposes,such a course may be justified as a temporaryexpedient, e.g. in order to save long lengthsof service pipe-lines, a control valve must befitted on the connection.

543 Separate Supplies for Drinkingand Other Purposes -

Where there are separate mains fordrinking water and water for other purposes,it should be ensured that when any junctionsor branches are laid, the two supplies maynot get connected. The economics of havinga separate distribution system for water unfitfor drinking purpose vis-a-vis the treatmentcost of that water and supplying through thesingle distribution system has to be workedout in relevant cases and a proper choicemade.

Water unfit for drinking purpose can bein many cases economically used for purposessuch as carriage washing, washing aprons,platforms etc.

544 Service Pipes from Mains -

The per capita rate of water supplyindicate only the average consumption ofwater per day. To take into account fluctuationin consumption due to season, month, day,and hour, the average demand should bemultiplied by a peak factor for purpose ofdesigning distribution system. A peak factorof 2.5 is recommended.

The number and size of service pipesthat can be supplied from a properly designeddistribution-main may be assumed as shownbelow; exceptional cases will depend, however,on actual conditions:-

107

WATER SUPPLY

545 Residual Pressure - Distributionsystem should be designed for the followingminimum residual pressures at ferrule points:

Single storey building - 7 m

Two storey building - 12 m

Three storey building - 17 m

Distribution system should not ordinarilybe designed for residual pressures exceeding22 m. Multi-storeyed buildings needing higherpressure should be provided with boosters.

546 Preventive Maintenance -

Preventive Maintenance of water supplydistribution pipe lines assures the twinobjectives of preserving the hygienic qualityof water in the distribution mains and providingconditions for adequate flow through the pipelines without leakages. Two of the mainfunctions in the management of preventiveaspects in the maintenance of mains areassessment, detection and prevention ofwastage of water from pipe lines andmaintaining the capacity of pipe line and

cleaning of pipe lines.

547 Protection Against PollutionNear Sewer and Drains

a) Horizontal Separation - A water mainshould be laid such that there is at least 3 mseparation, horizontally from any existing orproposed drain or sewer line. If localconditions prevent this lateral separation, awater main may be laid closer to a storm orsanitary sewer, provided that the main is laidin a separate trench, or on an undisturbedearth shelf located on one side of the sewerat such an elevation that the bottom of thewater main is at least 0.5 m above the top ofthe sewer.

b) Vertical Separation - In situationswhere water mains have to cross housesewer, storm drain, or sanitary sewer, it shouldbe laid at such an elevation that the bottom ofthe water main is 0.5 m above the top of thedrain or sewer with the joints as remote fromthe sewer as possible. This vertical separationshould be maintained for a distance of 3 m on

Diameter of service pipesDistribution Main 15mm 20mm 25mm

Number of service pipes40mm 12 6 350mm 20 10 665mm 39 20 1080mm 65 32 1890mm 88 43 24100mm 115 56 32

To avoid dead ends, the main shall be arranged in a grid formation or in a network.

108

WATER SUPPLY

both sides measured normal to the sewer ordrain it crosses.

548 Carriage Watering System -

On all new watering stations, carriagewatering arrangement shall be by side filling.The rate of flow at delivery end on hydrantshall not be less than 100 litres per minute.The diameter of pipe, general arrangement ofpipe line, spacing of wheel valve and heightshall be as per standard drawing issued byRDSO.

It is preferable to have separateoverhead tank of required capacity for carriagewatering.

K. MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION OF WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATIONS

549 Engineering Department'sResponsibilities-

The Engineering Department shall beresponsible for:-

a) The adequacy of water supply at allsources, permanent and auxiliary.

b) The despatch of samples of waterif so required to be done, fromwater supply sources, storage-tanks or taps for chemical andbacteriological analysis to theMedical Department.

c) The maintenance and operation ofwater purification plants.

d) The maintenance and periodicalcleaning of all storage tanks.

e) The maintenance of all pipe linesand specials, hydrants and water-taps in station yards and colonies,fire hydrants at stations, goodssheds and loco sheds.

f) The maintenance and periodicaltesting of all water meters whereverinstalled. The testing should becarried out at least once a year.

g) The periodical testing and joint-recording of consumption in metersat such points where supply to therailway is made by outside bodies.

h) Wastage and leakage detectionsurvey should be carried out andaction taken to reduce the losses.

550 Mechanical Department'sResponsibilities

a) The Mechanical Department will beresponsible for the erection, maintenance andoperation of diesel oil pumping plants at allpumping stations.

b) The Mechanical Department will beresponsible for the operation and maintenanceof carriage-watering and carriage-washinghydrants.

551 Electrical Department'sResponsibility

a) All planning,installation maintenanceand operation of electrical pumps shall be doneby electrical department.

109

WATER SUPPLY

b) All water coolers provided in officesand stations shall be cleaned once a month toprevent contamination. Water coolers shallbe disinfected properly before putting into use.

552 Inspections by Assistant Engineerand Staff

a) The Assistant Engineer and SectionEngineer (Works) should frequently inspectall water supply installations and pipelines andensure their maintenance in efficient condition.The Section Engineer (Works) should beequipped with an adequate imprest ofmaterials such as pipes and specials andwater taps of requisite sizes and thenecessary tools to facilitate immediateattention on repairs as and when required.

b) Storage-tanks for drinking water andfor flushing purposes over offices, bungalowsand quarters should be inspected frequentlyby the Section Engineer (Works) and theircleanliness ensured. Complaints fromresidents should be promptly attended to.

553 Water-Supply Plans -

Up to date plans should be maintained inthe Chief Engineer's, Divisional Engineers',Assistant Engineers' and Section Engineer(Works) Offices of every water supply systemshowing the source, pumps and pumpingparticulars, rising mains, storage tanks andcapacities, the distribution mains, servicepipes, hydrants and taps. The diameter andtype of pipe-lines should be clearly indicatedon the plans and on the longitudinal sections.

Where there are separate supplies fordrinking and other requirements, therespective systems should be shown on theplan in different colours or on separate plans.

The Assistant Engineer shall ensure thatwater supply plan is corrected as and whenthere is any addition or modification in pipeline.Wherever the laying/modification to theexisting pipe line is done through contractualagency, a certificate in the measurement bookshall be recorded while entering the finalmeasurements to the effect that necessarychanges in the plans have been incorporated.In case of Construction Organizationimplementing any water supply scheme oraugmenting the existing scheme, a copy ofthe water supply plan shall be handed over toOpen Line as and when the scheme iscompleted.

554 Water Purification Works

a) Periodical analysis of water - Samplesof raw, filtered and sterilized water from filter-plants should be sent for examination andcertification once a month or as may beprescribed to the Divisional Medical Officerwho will advise, if deemed necessary, on theappropriate dosage of the coagulant or thesterilizing agent. Reports on water analysisreceived from the Divisional Medical Officershould be carefully filed, the action taken oneach report being recorded. Samples forchemical examination should be sent fortesting once in six months or once beforemonsoon and once after monsoon.

b) Maintenance of water works - Detailedinstructions in regard to the maintenance andoperation of filtration and chlorinaton plantsat each installation shall be issued by the ChiefEngineer. It should be ensured that-

(i) the plants, in general, with theirancillaries are maintained in aperfectly sanitary and hygienic

110

WATER SUPPLY

condition;

(ii) aeration of raw water is affected byspraying through the air, cascadingover obstacles.

(iii) the sedimentation tanks or basinsare drained at such intervals asprescribed;

(iv) coagulants, either in the form of drypowder or in aqueous solution, areadded in the correct proportionaccording to the turbidity of rawwater;

(v) the filters are cleaned and washedwith pure water at such intervalsas prescribed;

(vi) the filtered water is sterilized eitherby adding liquid chlorine orbleaching powder strictly to thedosage specified.

(vii) disinfectants are stored properlyand all safety precautions are taken

The water works staff in-charge shallstrictly adhere to the prescribed rules. A copyof the detailed instructions on the operation ofplant and purification process should beavailable at each installation together with theduty-lists of the staff posted there.

c) Supervision by Assistant Engineer

(i) The Assistant Engineer shallinspect each installation once inthree months and record his notes

in the Inspection Registermaintained for the purpose. Heshould follow the course of waterfrom the point of intake and throughthe different treatment stages to thepoint of delivery to the distributionmains and arrange to remedydefects noticed.

AEN should arrange for a jointdetailed inspection by SectionEngineer (Works) of the pumpingmachinery once a year as may beprescribed alongwith the staff of theMechanical/Electrical Departmentand ensure prompt compliance torepairs or replacements required.

(ii) The Assistant Engineer shouldcheck the following:-

- Stock account showingtransactions of stores

- Log book for filtration plant

d) Inspection by Divisional Engineer -The Divisional Engineer should inspect thewater works in every detail once a year andrecord his notes in the Inspection Registermaintained for the purpose.

e) Inspection Register - An InspectionRegister should be maintained at each waterpurification work to enable every InspectingOfficer of the Engineering and MedicalDepartments to record notes. Prompt actionon inspection notes shall be ensured.

H H H H H H H

111

WATER SUPPLY

NAME OF THE SCHEME :

DIVISION :

SCHEME APPROVAL DETAILS :

_____________________________________

YES/NO_____________________________________

A. ASSESSMENT OF DEMAND

1. Is this a new scheme or augmentation tothe existing arrangement ?

2. Has total demand been assessed ?

3. Whether total demand includes domesticneeds, workshop, offices and stationrequirement ?

4. Whether fire demand if any, Loss &Wastages and variation in demand hasbeen considered ?

5. Whether demand has been calculatedseparately for treated and untreatedwater ?

6. Has the financial viability beenconsidered for providing one distributionsystem with filtered water vis-a-visseparate distribution systems for treatedand untreated water ?

7. Whether future requirement has beentaken into account ?

B. SOURCE OF WATER

1. Whether quantity/ yield available issufficient to meet the requirement ?

2. Has the tests for quality of water beendone ?

3. Are the test results satisfactory ? (ForStds. of quality of water refer Annexure5.2)

4. Whether any treatment is required tobring down the various impurities withinpermissible range ?

5. Has the sanitary survey of areasurrounding the available water sourcebeen carried out to estimate the possiblepollution or contamination of water fromsuch source ?

6. Has the line of treatment been decidedconsistent with quality of water required ?

7. Whether there is accessibility to the siteof proposed source of water ?

8. Is there any need for development ofcommunication system ?

9. Is the controlling device of intake locatedat a place which is accessible even duringfloods ?


CHECK LIST FOR WATER SUPPLY SCHEME

112

WATER SUPPLY

10. Is there provision for pitching on the downstream and upstream portions of canalnear intake ?

C. PUMPING AND STORAGE OF RAWWATER

1. Has the selection of size and pipematerial for raw water mains been done ?

2. Is direct pumping from the sourcefeasible ?

3. Is there any need for storage of rawwater ?

4. If so, is the storage capacity adequate ?

5. Has the requirement of the pumps andtheir capacity been calculated based on1.5 times the average daily demand ?

6. Has the standby arrangement been madefor auxiliary power unit (generally dieseltype) and stand-by pumps ?

7. Is there provision for proper structurerequired for housing the Pumps and PumpOperator ?

8. Has the provision been made foradequate extra space for additional pumpif required ?

9. Is there separate adequate space forstorage of diesel and other spares ?

10. Has the arrangement been provided forlifting of pumps or stair case in case thepumps are provided at lower level thanthe prevailing ground level ?

11. Is door of the pump house wide enoughto enable pumps to be taken out for repairor replacement?

12. Has the provision been made for firefighting equipment appropriate to hazardlikely in the pump house and storagespace of diesel?

D. ARRANGEMENTS FOR PURIFICATIONAND TREATMENT

1. Has the line of treatment been decided ?

2. Does the layout of the entire schemefulfill the requirement of the line oftreatment ?

3. Is aeration unit exposed to the prevailingdirection of wind ?

4. Is sedimentation unit designed withcoagulation ?

If yes, has the feasibility for supply ofcoagulant and cost been consideredwhile deciding to go in for coagulationvis-a-vis only plain sedimentation withincreased capacity of sedimentationunit ?

5. Is there feasibility of regular supply ofsand required for replenishing the sandof filter ?

6. Has the requirement of chlorination beenassessed based on the quality of waterand longest length of supply pipeline inthe distribution system ?

7. Is water softening required to remove thepermanent hardness, if any ?

8. Is recarbonation plant necessary (in case

113

WATER SUPPLY

of Lime Soda process or softening), ifso, is it provided before filtration unit ?

9. Has the method of chlorination beenfinalised keeping in view the availabilityof equipment and constant supply ofchlorinating material ?

10. Is there any other impurity to beremoved ?

11. Has the provision of small laboratoryincluding equipment for testing of waterrequired at filtration plant been made ?

E. STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION OFTREATED WATER

1. Has the location of pump house beenfinalised taking into account theavailability of power and requirement ofthe operator ?

2. Is it feasible to utilise the same staff forfiltration unit and for operating the pumpsin pump house ?

3. Has the capacity and number of pumpsrequired been calculated based onquantity of water, pumping hours, totalhead and various losses?

4. Is there provision for auxiliary powersupply and stand by pumps ?

5. Has the location of the storage tank been

finalised considering the topography andmajor areas of consumption ?

6. Are distribution mains designed for themaximum hourly demand on the day ofmaximum consumption ? (2.5 times theaverage demand )]

7. Has the layout for the pipeline fordistribution system been finalised ?

8. Does the layout of pipeline take intoaccount future expansion plans for thecolony ?

9. Have the dead ends been avoided in thelayout of the pipe line ?

If unavoidable, is there provision forhydrants to act as washouts ?

10. Has the pipeline layout been providedwith the provision for controlling watersupply timings for different areas ifrequired, by operating m i n i m u mnumber of valves ?

11. Is there any requirement of air valves ?If yes, have they been located at pointswhich are close to or above the hydraulicgradients ?

12. In case of buried pipe line, has it beenproposed min. 2m above the sewer line ?

13. Has the testing of leakage beencontemplated?

114

WATER SUPPLY


STANDARDS OF QUALITY OF DRINKING WATER

PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL STANDARDS________________________________________________________________________________S.No. Characteristics Requirement Permissible limit

(Desirable limit) in the absence ofalternate source

________________________________________________________________________________(1) (2) 3 4________________________________________________________________________________1. Turbidity (NTU scale)5.0 102. Colour Haten units 5.0 253. Taste and odour Unobjectionable ---4.Ph value 6.5 to 8.5 No relaxation5. Total dissolved solids(mg/l) max. 500 20006. Total hardness as CaCo3(mg/l) max. 300 6007. Chlorides as Cl2(mg/l) 250 10008. Sulphates as SO4 (mg/l) max. 200 4009. Fluorides as F (mg/l)max. 1.0 1.510. Nitrates as No3 (mg/l)max. 45 10011. Calcium as Ca (mg/l)max. 75 20012. Iron as Fe (mg/l)max.0.3 1.013. Zinc as Zn (mg/l)max.5.0 15.014. Mineral Oil (mg/l)max.0.01 0.0315. Copper as Cu (mg/l)max. 0.05 1.5 Toxic materials16. Arsenic as As (mg/l)max. 0.05 No relaxation17. Cadmium as Cd (mg/l)max. 0.01 -do-18. Lead as Pb (mg/l)max. 0.05 -do-19. Residual free chlorine (mg/l)max. 0.2* ---________________________________________________________________________________Source :Indian Standard - Drinking water - specification (First Revision)

IS:10500 - 1991 by BIS

*When protection against viral infection is required, it should be min. 0.5 mg/l.

115

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

CHAPTER VI

A. DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

601 General

Reference may be made to the followingfor provisions not contained in this Chapter.In case of any variation, the latter shall prevail.

(i) National Building Code of India 1983- Part IX Plumbing Services,Drainage and Sanitation.

(ii) Relevant BIS Codes as mentionedbelow :-

IS 1172: 1983 Code of basicrequirements for watersupply drainage andsanitation.

IS 1726: 1974 Specifications forcast iron manhole coversand frames.

IS 1742: 1983 Code of practice forbuilding drainage.

IS 2470: 1985 Code of practice forinstallation of septictanks.

IS 4111: 1986 Code of practice forancillary structures insewerage system.

IS 5329: 1983 Code of practice forsanitary pipeworksabove ground forbuildings.

(iii) Manual on Sewerage and SewageTreatment - Ministry of UrbanDevelopment, New Delhi.

(iv) Regulations issued by MunicipalCorporations or local Public HealthDepartments should also bereferred.

602 Preparation of Schemes ofSewerage-

Definitions of some common terms aregiven below:-

(i) Drain : A conduit/channel for thecarriage of storm wateror other used water

(ii) Drainage : A system for removalof any unwanted liquid

(iii) Sewer : A pipe/conduit usedgenerally for carryingsewage or other water-borne wastes

(iv) Sewerage : A system for thecollection and conveyingsewage to the point ofdisposal

(v) Manhole : An opening by which aman may enter and leavea drain, a sewer or otherclosed structure forinspection, cleaningand other maintenanceoperations fitted with asuitable cover

116

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

(vi) Soil Waste : The discharge fromwater closets, urinals,sinks, cattle sheds,gullies etc.

(vii) Sewage : It includes all kinds ofliquid wastes of acommunity or industry. Itis classified as follows: -

(a) Storm sewage,(b) Sanitary sewage,(c) Industrial waste.

B. WATER-BORNE SEWERAGE

603 Adherence to Regulations -

In the preparation of under-groundsewerage schemes, the Drainage Regulationsin regard to the installations of all sanitaryequipments and construction of drains andsewers shall be followed.

604 Sewerage Schemes -

Reports of sewerage schemes shouldinclude-

a) a historical retrospect leading to thejustification of the project

b) description of existing facilities, ifany

c) population studies, analysis andprediction based on a criticalappraisal of available data

d) location of the water supplyheadwork for the area and theneighbouring communities

e) availability of piped water supplyin the area, present and anticipatedper capita water supply

f) the nature of sewage, total sewageflow - present and prospective

g) discussion of different possibledisposal points and theircomparative merits

h) review of different possible methodsof treatment

i) engineering features andeconomical aspects of the sewersystem, an index and a generallayout plan with contours atintervals of 2m alongwith aschematic diagram. Sub-soilconditions including level of watertable and location of other services- their positions, size etc. basis forcomputation of surface run-off,drainage area and silting of stormsewage and overflow, wherevernecessary

j) number and location of pumpingstations with hydrostatic heads andfrictional loss of heads on pumpsand on mains

k) a comparison of total costs(recurring and non-recurring)of thealternatives involved under majorsubheads

l) the most satisfactory alternativescheme for the project, asrecommendedprobable stages ofconstruction, procurement ofproprietary material for the project

117

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

and any special problems relatingthereto

605 Designing of Sewers -

Sanitary sewer system and storm waterdrainage system should be designedseparately.

The size of sanitary sewer depends onquantity of sanitary sewage, variation in peakand average flows, limiting velocities of flow,topography of the area, construction materialetc.

The size of storm water sewer dependson storm water run-off, Self Cleansing Velocity,construction material etc.

Sanitary sewers are not expected toreceive storm water. It should be ensuredthat proper design and construction of sewersand manholes are provided.

606 Quantity of Sewage -

The factors which influence the quantityof sewage are population and per capitasewage. Population estimates should caterfor future requirements.

a) Generally 80% of the watersupplied may be considered toreach the sewers.

b) The lean and peak flows of sewagewill be about 50 and 150 percent ofthe average respectively. The sewershould be designed for the maximumflow rate, after allowing for seasonalfluctuations. For design purposes

standard tables are available whichmay be referred.

607 Alignment of Sewer-

The alignment of the sewer is determinedfrom a survey plan which should be preparedto a scale of 100 metres to a cm. The proposedsewer-lines are shown on a plan alongwith theground levels and soil conditions, necessaryfor establishing grades and estimating the costof the work. In the profiles, the invert andcrown gradient lines should be shown.

608 Velocity of Flow - The limitingvelocities for existing conditions should bedetermined and gradients decided accordingly.Normally, a minimum velocity of 1 metre persecond and a maximum of 2 metres persecond, are allowed. On steep slopes, one ormore drop manholes may be provided.

a) Self Cleansing Velocity - It isnecessary to maintain a minimumvelocity or self-cleansing velocityin a sewer to ensure that suspendedsolids do not deposit and causeblockage. Self cleansing velocityis determined by considering theparticle size and specific weight ofthe suspended solids in sewage. Aminimum velocity of 0.8 mps atdesign peak flow in the sanitarysewers is recommended subject toa minimum velocity of 0.6 mps forpresent peak flow.

b) Velocity at Minimum Flow - To avoidsteeper gradients which will requiredeeper excavations, it is the

118

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

practice to design sewers for theself cleansing velocity at ultimatepeak flows. This is done on theassumption that although siltingmight occur at minimum flow, thesilt would be flushed out during thepeak flows. However, the problemof silting may have to be faced inthe early years, particularly forsmaller sewers which are designedto flow half- full, as the actual depthof flow then is only a fraction of thefull depth. Transport of suspendedsolids should be achieved in sucha manner that deposition and odournuisance therefrom are kept to aminimum. Sewers are normallydesigned for flows with free watersurface and self-cleansingvelocities. Pressure sewers,including siphons, should beavoided as far as practicable.

c) Maximum Velocity - Erosion ofsewers is caused by sand and othergritty material in the sewer atexcessive velocity. Velocity of flowin a sewer is recommended not toexceed 2.0 mps.

609 Ventilation in Sullage -

From consideration of ventilation inwastewater flow, sewer should not be designedto run full. Sewers upto 400 mm dia may bedesigned to run at half depth, 400-900 mmdiameter at two third depths and larger sewersat three fourth depth at ultimate peak flows.

610 Size of Sewer -

Minimum diameter of sewer shall be 200

mm except for hilly areas where steep slopesare available. In those areas minimum sizemay be 100 mm.

611 Storm Water

Quantity of storm run-off is dependenton intensity and duration of rainfall,characteristics of catchment area and timerequired for such flow to reach the sewer.

Storm water flow for this purpose maybe determined by using rational methods,hydrograph methods or empirical formulae.

612 Manholes - A manhole is an openingconstructed on the alignment of a sewer tofacilitate a person to access the sewer forthe purpose of inspection, testing, cleaningand removal of obstructions from the sewerline.

According to IS:4111 - spacing ofmanholes is designed with reference to sewerdiameter as given below:

Sewer dia in mm Upto 300 301 to 500 501-900Spacing in metres 45 75 90

When silt and grit loads are heavy,catchpits may be provided at suitable intervalsdepending on local conditions and as approvedby the Divisional Engineer.

613 Choice of Material for Sewers

a) Salt glazed stoneware pipes - For allsewers and drains in all soils except wheresupports are required, glazed stoneware pipesshall be used. They are particularly suitablewhere acid effluents or acid sub-soil conditionsare likely to be encountered.

119

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

b) Cement Concrete Pipes - These canbe used as an alternative to glazed stonewarepipes of over 150 mm diameter. These shallnot be used to carry acid effluents or sewageunder conditions favourable for the productionof hydrogen sulphide and shall not be laid inthose sub-soils which may affect the strengthof concrete.

c) Cast Iron Pipes - These shall be usedin unstable or made-up grounds or wheresewer is laid at insufficient depth. These areparticularly useful where pipes are suspendedin basements or similar situations or forcrossings of water courses. These pipes aresuitable where the velocity is more than 2.4m/s.

d) Asbestos Cement Pipes - These pipesare commonly used for house drainagesystems and are not recommended forunderground situations. They are not suitableto carry acid effluents or sewage underconditions favourable for the production ofhydrogen sulphide.

e) PVC Pipes - Unplasticised PVC pipesmay be used for drainage purpose.

614 Laying of Sewer Pipes

a) Excavation - The safety precautionsrequired as per construction practices shallbe ensured.

(i) Excavation shall proceed to within about7.5 cm of the finished formation level.This final 7.5 cm is to be trimmed andremoved as a separate operationimmediately prior to the laying of thepipes or their foundations.

(ii) Unless specified otherwise by the

Authority, the width at bottom of trenchesfor pipes of different diameters laid atdifferent depths shall be as given below:

1) For all diameters, upto an averagedepth of 120 cm, width of trench incm = diameter of pipe+30 cm

2) For all diameters for depths above120 cm, width of trench in cm =diameter of pipe+40 cm.

3) Not withstanding (1) and (2), thetotal width of trench at top shouldnot be less than 75 cm for depthexceeding 90 cm.

iii) All pipes, ducts, cables, mains or otherservices exposed in the trench shall beeffectively supported by timber and/orchain or rope-slings.

iv) All drainage sumps shall be sunk clearof the work outside the trench or at thesides of manholes. After the completionof the work, any pipes or drains leadingto such sumps or temporary sub-soildrains under permanent work shall befilled in properly with sand andconsolidated.

b) Laying of Pipes - Laying of pipes shallbe done in accordance with good practice i.e.unloading of pipes should be by usingmechanical means to avoid damages,adjusting to proper levels, minimum thicknessof lead at the face of socket not to reduceless than 6mm, alignment to be repeatedlychecked and refilling of trenches etc.

c) Jointing - All soil pipes, waste pipes,ventilating pipes and other such pipes aboveground, shall be gas-tight. All sewers and

120

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

drains laid below the ground shall be watertight. Jointing shall be done in accordancewith specification prescribed for particular typeof pipes.

d) Connection to Existing Sewers -

(i) The connection to an existing sewershall, as far as possible, be done at themanholes. The work of connection withthe existing sewerage system shall becarried out by the Authority owning thesystem or under its supervision.

ii) Connection with the sewer shall beaffected by the cautious enlargement ofa small hole and every precaution shallbe taken to prevent any material fromentering the sewer. No connection shallbe formed in such a way as to constitutea projection into the sewer or to causeany diminution in its effective size.

e) Back-Filling -

(i) Filling of the trench shall not becommenced until the length of pipestherein has been tested and passed

(ii) All timber may be withdrawn safely asfilling proceeds.

(iii) Where the pipes are unprotected byconcrete haunching, the first operationin filling shall be carefully done to hand-pack and tamp selected fine materialaround the lower half of the pipes so asto buttress them to the sides of thetrench.

(iv) The filling shall then be continued to 15cm over the top of the pipe using selectedfine hand-packed material, watered and

rammed on both sides of the pipe with awooden hammer. On no account shallmaterial be tipped into the trench untilthe first 15-cm of fil-ling has beencompleted. The process of filling andtamping shall proceed evenly so as tomaintain an equal pressure on both sidesof the pipeline.

(v) Filling shall be continued in layers notexceeding 15cm in thickness, each layerbeing watered and well rammed.

(vi) In roads, surface materials previouslyexcavated shall be replaced as the toplayer of the filling, consolidated andmaintained satisfactorily till thepermanent reinstatement of the surfaceis made.

(vii) In gardens, the top soil and turf, if any,shall be carefully replaced.

f) Pipes should preferably be laid withthe socketted ends against the direction offlow and in straight lines.

g) In manholes, no pipes should project.Pipes should be laid flush with the inside faceof the manhole walls. Where a pipe passesthrough the manhole wall, an arch should bebuilt round the pipe to carry the weight of themasonry above it.

615 Sewage Disposal -

Standard flushing systems are meantprimarily to transport human waste from thetoilet to the treatment plant located a fewkilometres away or to connect the railwaysewerage system to the municipal sewers.Therefore, this standard sewerage system isappropriate only where underground sewerage

121

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

system exists. A comparative estimate ofcost should be prepared for the connectionwith the municipal sewerage system vis-a-visan independent sewage disposal plant.

Where water-borne sewerage is notpossible, septic tank system of disposal ofsewage is normally adopted.

616 Septic Tanks -

Modern septic tank system is an on asite disposal method, which uses standardflushing. The septic tank acts assedimentation-cum-digestion tank. Anaerobicdigestion of the settled sludge occurs in itsbottom zone and the supernatant liquid hasto undergo treatment in a soak pit/filter bed.Use of septic tank without follow-up treatment

is not permitted, as the effluent from the septictank is hazardous from the point of view ofhealth and pollution. Since, it is usually notpossible to provide soak pit/filter bed in builtup urban areas, septic tank system would notbe appropriate in such areas.

The capacity of the septic tank shouldbe such as to take care of the variations inthe flow. A detention period of 24 to 48 hrs.for tanks serving less than 50 persons and aperiod of 10 to 18 hrs. for tanks serving morethan 50 persons are generally adopted.

The size and shape of the septic tankshall be generally in agreement with theminimum dimensions given in the tablebelow:-

122

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

Table 6.1

_________________________________________________________________________________No. of Users Length Width Liquid Depth_________________________________________________________________________________

metres metres metres_________________________________________________________________________________

Domestic tanks

5 1.5 0.75 1.010 2.0 0.90 1.015 2.0 0.90 1.320 2.3 1.10 1.350 4.0 1.40 1.3

Tanks for Housing Colonies

100 8.0 2.6 1.0150 10.6 2.7 1.0200 12.4 3.1 1.0300 14.6 3.9 1.0

Tanks for Hostels and Boarding Schools5.0 1.6 1.3

100 5.7 2.1 1.4150 7.7 2.4 1.4200 8.9 2.7 1.4300 10.7 3.3 1.4

_________________________________________________________________________________

The septic tank should be constructedin 2 compartments to facilitate cleaning of onewhile the other is in use. A bottom slope of 5to 10% towards inlet is recommended.

Septic tanks should be cleaned when alarge quantity of sludge has collected in thebottom of the tank. The interval of cleaningshould not normally exceed 12 months. Aftercleaning 3 or 4 shovelful of surface earthcontaining grass roots and decaying vegetablematter should provide a good start. No

disinfectants should be used in latrinesattached to septic tanks as they kill theorganisms, which digest sewage.

For providing any soakpit/filter bed withseptic tanks the water table must be well belowtheir depth and the rain water from surfacealso should not interfere with their functioning.Hence, these are not usually suitable wherewater tables are high or where ground slopesare flat.

123

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

617 Aqua Privy Latrines -

The latrine will usually consist of an underground masonry tank on top of which are fixedthe latrine pans. The outlet of the pans aredipped 7.5 to 10 cm below the flow line in thetank. The pans may be fixed with or withouttraps to the outlet pipe. The excreta will getdigested in the masonry tank below and willbe cleared at intervals through manhole leftfor this purpose. The effluent may be thenabsorbed by sub-surface irrigation process orby other alternative means.

618 Bio-Latrines -

These are improved aqua privies usedfor sewage ranging from very small quantitiesto comparatively larger quantities. They need1.5 to 2 litres/capita of water for flushing.Standard drawings are available from RDSO.The following points should be taken care ofin bio-latrines.

1. No water tap should be provided in thewater closet to prevent flooding ofdigesters, which will prevent efficientanaerobic action.

2. Excessive water should not be used inthe water closet.

3. The pan in the bio-latrines should have aslope not less than 40 degrees withhorizontal.

4. No foreign matter e.g. garbage, soapwater etc. should be thrown into the watercloset pan.

5. The digesters should be linked directlyto the toilet with least possible inter

distance.

6. The flow from the toilet to digesters is tobe by gravity.

7. When combined digesters are used, thesewage will first get collected in achamber attached to each water closetand then flow to a combined digester. Theslope of the pipe lines from the collectionchamber to the digester should not beflatter than 1 in 20 so as to allow for easyflow.

8. A water seal of 50mm above the crownlevel of the inlet pipe at the inner face ofthe digestion tank wall, shall always bemaintained in the digestion tank.

9. The plinth level of the latrines should bedecided working backwards from theinvert level of the outlet pipe of thedigestion tank.

10. The sludge settled at the bottom of thedigestion tank may be cleared once intwo years.

11. Satisfactory working of the anaerobicdigesters in the tank, is indicated

i) if the effluent is odourlessii) if the effluent does not attract flies

and mosquitoes; and

iii) if the pH value of the effluent is notless than 7.0.

12. Outlet drains should have proper slopeand rounded corner.

13. Adequate ventilation should be providedin bio-latrines.

124

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

14. In case of public or community type oftoilets, users are likely to throw rags,stones etc. into the toilets. In such casesan inspection chamber with 25-50mmspaced grating should be provided justbefore the entry of water into the digestersto arrest any such material.

15. A minimum retention of 30 days isrequired for anaerobic digestion, whilea septic tank provides retention only for2-7 days and hence the effluent from theseptic tank must have its main treatmentin a soakpit/filter while effluent from adigester can be discharged directly in adrain system.

619 Conservation of Water -

There is a general shortage of watersupply in India and in some parts even thedrinking water is scarce. Therefore, it has tobe seen that water is conserved to the

maximum extent possible and that it is notpolluted and the waste disposal systemsshould be designed with these ends in view.This applies to both ground water and surfacewater. In case of non-residential toilets atstations etc., and community toilets providedwith 'standard flushing' arrangements, insteadof flushing cisterns of 13.5 litres capacity, theuse of 'coach' handles should be preferred sothat only the required amount of water is used.In case of urinals, instead of automatic flushingcisterns, dripping ferrules may be used toconserve water.

620 Recommended Toilet Systems

Based on the above rationale, directionsfor selecting appropriate toilets system aresummarised below:-

(i) Where an underground seweragesystem can be connected, use a 'flush'type toilet as under:-

_________________________________________________________________________________Residential With no water Cistern flushing, (use good qualitycisterns, preferablyToilets shortage the newer Models using less than 3 gallons Water).

Residential With water 'Coach' handle flushingtoilets shortage

Non-residential - 'Coach' handle flushing. However,for toilets in retiringtoilets rooms, rest houses same type as for residential toilets.

_________________________________________________________________________________(ii) Where an underground sewerage system

is not available:_________________________________________________________________________________

In built-up areas or in all Bio-latrinesother areas where soakpitsor filter beds are not feasible

On roadside stations-do-In sparsely inhabitedstations Bio-latrines or septic tank system (coach handle type

flushing should be used)

125

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

(iii) In case of urinals, automaticflushing cisterns should not be used and onlydripping ferrules may be used.

All toilets on the Railways must besanitised on top priority program basis. Thusonly flush toilets with underground sewerage,flush toilets with septic tank systems (withsoakpit/filter-bed for the septic tank effluent)and bio-latrines (also acquaprivy) are theapproved sanitised toilet systems for use onthe Railways. Hence -

- all 'dry' (Service type) toilets must besanitised.

- all septic tanks, if not provided withprescribed soakpit/filterbed, must beprovided with these or if possible,converted into digesters by minimisingthe flushing so that the same tank canprovide clear minimum 30 daysretention (in addition to the space fordigestion at the bottom).

C. MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGEAND DRAINAGE

621 General -

Due consideration shall be given tomaintenance requirements at the time ofdesigning sewerage system. Provision ofopenings, staircases and due provisions foreliminating gas hazards, should be ensured.

622 Sewer Lines

a) Maintenance of sewers involvesremoval of stoppages and clearing out thedeposits. Clogging may be due to gritdeposition, penetration of roots from adjoiningtrees, growth of fungi or stagnation of sewage.

Sewers may be flushed by firehose fromthe nearest fire hydrant if conveniently locatedif the stoppage is too stubborn to respond toflushing, it may be removed by rodding fromthe next manhole or it may be necessary todig down to the point where the trouble exists.

(b) Records of the location and depth ofall sewers and house connections should bekept in sufficient detail and accuracy forlocating any sewer in case it becomesnecessary to dig it up. Connections of housedrainage to the sewer should be permitted tobe done only by competent and experiencedlabour.

(c) Sewer line gangs, if under theEngineering Department, should attend to thecleaning and flushing of all sewers at leasttwice every month. Manholes should be leftopen for few hours for gases to escape, beforeany man enters into it.

623 Open Sullage Drains

Open sullage drains should bemaintained in a thoroughly satisfactorycondition; cleaning and flushing should be doneat least twice a month or more often, asconsidered necessary. Soak-pit should be dugup and cleaned at least once a month or asrequired and fresh broken stones, brokenbricks or cinder filled in.

624 Storm Water Drains

Special examination should be made ofstorm water drains, particularly before thecommencement of monsoon, to ensure correctgrades. Out falls should be particularlyexamined with a view to ensure satisfactorydisposal of the storm water.

126

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

625 Disposal Works

All sullage disposal works should beexamined once a quarter and their sanitarycondition ensured. When an appreciableextent of silting has taken place, septic tanksshould be cleaned in co-ordination with theMedical Department whose responsibility liesin either doing it on contract or departmentally.

626 House ConnectionsSurface drains should be examined

frequently and there should be no stagnationof sullage near the premises. Gully traps withgratings should be examined whereverinstalled and prompt action taken for renewaland replacements necessary.

627 Conservancy and SanitaryArrangements

Conservancy arrangements will be in thecharge of either the Medical, or Operating orEngineering Department. Any irregularitynoticed in their working should be promptlyreported to the officials concerned.

628 Maintenance of Sewerage SystemWhile assisting sewer maintenance

crews entering a deep manhole or sewerwhere dangerous gas or oxygen deficienciesmay be present, the following precautionsshould be taken:

a) allow no smoking or open flames andguard against sparks

b) erect warning signs

c) use only safe gas-proof electric lightingequipment

d) test for noxious gases and oxygendeficiencies (presence of hydrogen

sulphide is detected using lead acetatepaper and that of oxygen by safetylamps)

e) If the atmosphere is normal, workmenmay enter with a safety belt attached andwith two men available at the top. Forextended jobs, the gas tests shall berepeated at frequent intervals dependingon circumstances

f) If oxygen deficiency or noxious gas isfound, the structure shall be ventilatedwith pure air by keeping open at leastone manhole cover each on upstreamand downstream side for quick exit oftoxic gases or by artificial means. Thegas tests shall be repeated and theatmosphere cleared before entering.Adequate ventilation shall be maintainedduring the work and the test repeatedfrequently

g) If the gas or oxygen deficiency is presentand it is not practicable to ventilateadequately before workers enter amanhole, mask shall be worn andextreme care shall be taken to avoid allsources of ignition. Workers should betaught how to use the oxygen hoseequipment. In these cases, they shallalways use permissible safety lights (notordinary flashlights), rubber boots or non-sparking shoes and non-sparking tools

h) Workmen descending a manhole shaftto inspect or clean sewers, shall try eachladder step or rung carefully beforeputting the full weight on it to guardagainst insecure fastening due tocorrosion of the rung at the manhole wall.When work is going on in deep sewers,

127

DRAINAGE & SEWERAGE

at least two men shall be available forlifting workers from the manhole in theevent of serious injury

i) Portable air blowers, for ventilating sewermanhole are recommended for all tank,pit or manhole work where there is aquestion of the presence of noxiousgases, vapours or oxygen deficiency.The motors for these shall be of weatherproof and flame-proof types;compression ignition-diesel type (withoutsparking plug). When used, these shallbe placed not less than 2m away fromthe opening and on the leeward sideprotected from wind, so that they will notserve as a source of ignition for anyinflammable gas which might be present.Provision should be made for ventilationand it should be of the forced type whichcan be provided by a blower located atground level with suitable flexible ductingto displace out air from the manhole

629 Periodical Cleaning of DrainageSystem - The following operations shall becarried out during periodical cleaning of adrainage system:-

a) The covers of inspection chambers andmanholes shall be removed and the sidebenchings and channels scrubbed

b) The interceptive trap, if fitted, shall beadequately cleaned and flushed with cleanwater. Care shall be taken to see thatthe stopper in the rodding arm is securelyreplaced.

c) All lengths of main and branch drainsshall be rodded by means of drain rodsand a suitable rubber or leather plunger.After rodding, the drains shall bethoroughly flushed with clean water. Any

obstruction found shall be removed withsuitable drain cleaning tools and thesystem thereafter shall be flushed withclean water.

d) The covers of access plates to all gullies,shall be removed and the traps plungedand flushed out thoroughly with cleanwater. Care shall be taken not to flushthe gully deposit into the system.

e) Any defects revealed, as a result ofinspection or tests shall be made good.

f) The covers or inspection chambers andgullies shall be replaced, bedding themin suitable grease or other materials; and

g) Painting of ladders/rings in deepmanholes and external painting ofmanhole covers shall be done withapproved paints.

630 Covered Stormwater Drains - Allstormwater drains shall be periodically roddedby means of drain rods and a suitable rubberor leather plunger. After rodding, they shallbe thoroughly flushed with clean water. Anyobstruction found shall be removed withsuitable drain cleaning tools.

631 Subsoil Drains - All subsoil drainsshall be periodically examined for obstructionat the open joints due to the roots of plants orother growth.

632 Responsibilities of the AssistantEngineer and Staff - The Assistant Engineerand the Section Engineer (Works) shouldinspect all drainage systems in their chargeand ensure their maintenance in an efficientcondition. Complaints from residents shouldbe promptly attended to.

128

GARDENS & PLANTATIONS, DISPOSAL OF GRASS AND OTHER NATURAL PRODUCTS

CHAPTER VII

GARDENS &PLANTATIONS, DISPOSAL

OF GRASS AND OTHER NATURALPRODUCTS

A. GARDENS AND PLANTATIONS

701 Role of Engineering Staff -

The Engineering Department isresponsible for tree plantation andmaintenance of horticulture in common areasin stations, colonies, offices, community parksetc. Staff of other departments should alsobe encouraged to associate in these activities.

702 Planning for Plantation

For systematic plantation, each Divisionshould prepare 'tree planting plan' for everysubdivision and plantation work should becarried out accordingly. On all constructionprojects, bulk afforestation of suitable varietyshould be done in vacant land as anenvironmental improvement measure.Provision for this should be invariably madein the estimate. For new colonies/townships,assistance of specialised agencies may betaken for landscaping.

703 Nursery

Nurseries wherever feasible may bemaintained to cater to the requirements of therailway establishments. The resources ofForest Department and nurseries in the public/private sector may be tapped to meet therequirements of the railway.

704 Planting and Care of Young Trees

a) Sites for plantation should be soselected that when the trees grow up they donot interfere with telegraph wires or obstructthe view around curves or of station signalsor of level crossings.

Before planting, a pit normally of size ½sq.m and 1 metre deep should be dug, thesoil broken up and the pit well watered. Theearth removed from the pit should then bemixed with a mortar-panfull of manure and themixture replaced in the pit and "flooded" withwater.

When planting, it should be seen that theroots are not exposed to sun more thannecessary. Water should be fed to the youngtree daily until it is strongly rooted, the topsurface of the soil being broken up about oncea week. At way side stations whereEngineering staff is not posted, daily wateringmay be entrusted to station staff.

b) Soon after planting, the young treeshould be supported firmly with a strong andstraight bamboo or stake about 3 metres inheight and the trunk tied to the stake by meansof a cord over sackcloth. A tree-guard orprotection should be fixed around it.

The tops should be allowed to grow upto a height of 3 metres. When side shootsappear, four or five strong ones should besaved at different levels on the trunk abovethe 3m stake (to prevent forking). When thetop leaders have grown fully they should bepruned moderately to cause them to branchout and produce a bushy top.

The tree-guard should be removed whenthe tree has been firmly established and there

129


is no risk of molestation by goats or cattle.

c) Tree-guards may be madeeconomically from thorns or bricks; oldbitumen drums with holes punched in themcould be used with advantage where the hotweather is not too intense, otherwise theyretain heat and shrivel up the young plants.

705 Maintenance of Gardens in Offices,Rest Houses and Colonies

(a) The responsibility of maintaininghedges, lawns and shrubberies attached tooffices, rest houses and playgrounds and incolonies in a satisfactory condition devolveson the garden staff attached to the division/district. Where such gardens are small, thewatchman should maintain them in asatisfactory state.

b) The Section Engineer (Works) shouldpay requisite attention to the cleanliness of

rest house compounds and upkeep of gardens.Shrubs and seedlings should be obtained whenrequired from the divisional/district nursery.

B.GARDENS IN OFFICERS'BUNGALOWSAND SENIORSUPERVISORS' QUARTERS

706 Maintenance

Railway premises occupied by Officersand Senior Supervisors should be kept in aneat and tidy condition. Gardens withincompounds should be maintained to asatisfactory standard.

707 Incidence of Service

Where hedges and lawns in bungalowsare maintained by the railway, the incidenceof service should generally be as follows, withvariations as necessitated by climaticconditions being allowed for:-_________________________________________________________________________________________________

(i) Hedges:Hedge cutting .. Once in 2 monthsWatering .. Once a week till the hedges are fully

grown and then once in 2 months(ii) Lawns:

Mowing .. Once a monthWatering .. Once a fortnight and once a week in summerWeeding .. Once a month

_________________________________________________________________________________________________708 Provision of Lawns and Hedges In NewBungalows

The following schedule of plantations may beadopted as a guideline:-

Officers' Type IVBungalows Quarters

_______________ ____________Lawn 200 sq.m 75 sq.mHedge 200 m 100 m

The cost of initial plantation should be borneby the railway against approved estimates.

130


C. SALE OF NATURAL PRODUCTS

709 (a) By Auction or By Tender

The natural products on railway landshould be sold by public auction or by tenderand the sale proceeds credited to railwayrevenues.

The auction of grass, dead or dying trees,rights for the collection of produce of fruit trees,tapping of date-trees for toddy (subject toLocal Government's permission) and fishingin railway tanks, shall be conducted by theAssistant Engineer about one month beforethe commencement of the season. Theproducts of fruit-bearing trees in the compoundof residential quarters can be enjoyed by theresidents, but the products cannot be sold.

(b) To State Forest Corporations etc.

The matured trees can also be sold toState Government agencies like ForestDevelopment Corporations on the approvedrates.

(c) Division of lots

Schedules of lots in convenient lengthsfor each kind of natural product to be sold,should be prepared by Section Engineer(Works/P.Way) and submitted to the DivisionalEngineer through AEN.

710 Fixing of Reserve Price of Lots

Reserve price for each lot to be sold byauction should be fixed by the DivisionalEngineer in consultation with the AccountsOfficer. If there are any special circumstances,which are likely to affect the value of the lots,

these should be brought to the notice of theDivisional Engineer beforehand to enable himto fix reserve price. In fixing reserve price,the Divisional Engineer in consultation withAssistant Engineer will take into accountprevious year's sales and such other relevantfactors as pertaining to the quality and quantityof produce of relevant year.

711 Auction or Tender Notices AndAgreement

Auction/tender notices in Hindi, Englishand regional language should be pasted atleast a fortnight in advance, at stations and atplaces where they can be seen by prospectivepurchasers/bidders.

Auction notices should show (i) the date,time and place of auction, (ii) full particularsof the products or rights to be sold, (iii) thatthe successful bidder shall deposit the fullamount of sale and sign an agreementimmediately after the bidding is closed and(iv) reserve prices of lots to be auctioned.

Sealed tenders on prescribed forms forsale of natural products may, alternatively, beinvited by the Divisional Engineer andagreements entered into.

712 Recording & Finalisation of Bids

All bids made at the auction should berecorded. The highest bid should be acceptedif it is not less than the reserve price fixed bythe Divisional Engineer, unless there aredefinite reasons for not doing so. In such acase these reasons should be recorded in thebid list before closing the auction.

131


a) At the foot of the bid list, the AssistantEngineer should certify as follows:-

"I certify that I personally conducted theauction and the above is a true statementof the products sold and the pricesrealised."

b) After closing the auction, the full amountof the bid should be collected from thesuccessful bidder who should sign anagreement on the prescribed form. Theproducts or rights may then be handedover forthwith to the successful bidder.Receipt for the amount collected shouldbe given and the money remitted to theRailway immediately with full details.

c) If the successful bidder fails to pay thefull amount or the highest bid is belowthe reserve price fixed by the DivisionalEngineer, the lot should not be sold. Thebidders' list should however becompleted and certified by the AssistantEngineer and submitted to the DivisionalEngineer with recommendations fororders. The Divisional Engineer may inconsultation with the Accounts Officerapprove the sale or order a fresh auctionfor the lot or lots not sold.

d) After the sale by auction is over, thebidders' list and the agreement dulyexecuted by the party should besubmitted to the Divisional Engineer forratification. Certified copies of theagreement should then be issued by theDivisional Engineer's office to the party,the Assistant Engineer and the Inspector.The original agreement should be sentto the Accounts Department for record.

e) After the advice is given to the

successful bidder regarding theacceptance, the responsibility forwatching the products or "rights" passesover to him. The Railway shall not beliable to any loss or damage from theft,fire or any other cause, whatsoever.Agreements should provide for this.

f) When there is a tie at an auction and arailway servant happens to be one of thebidders, his offer shall be givenpreference. If the bidders happen to berailway servants, the offer of theemployee with longer service shall beaccepted. Engineer should take intoaccount the 'locus-standi' of the biddersconcerned.

In case of lease of right of fishing bypublic auction or tender, the first preferenceshould be given to Fishermen's Co-operativeSocieties formed by Railwaymen. If no suchsociety exists, the second preference shouldbe given to other Fishermen's Co-operativeSocieties. If no such Society exists, it maybe let out to others by open public auction oropen tender.

713 Register of Sales of NaturalProducts

A register in manuscript form shall bemaintained in the Divisional Engineer's officesection-wise with complete particulars of salesaffected and entries made therein, as andwhen necessary, initialled by the DivisionalEngineer.

714 Licensing of Tanks and BorrowPits for Pisiculture

For licensing the borrow pits and tanksfor pisiculture, preferences shall be given to

132


co-operative societies formed by railwayemployees. The period of such licensing canbe from 1 to 5 years and the licence fee is tobe fixed on merits in consultation with FA &CAO.

D. FELLING OF TREES

715 Felling of trees obstructing view

(a) Trees and bushes that interfere ortend to interfere with the view from a train, ofsignals or level crossings or along the insidesof curves, shall be cut. When cut, it shouldbe ensured that they do not foul the track.

It is however desirable that as many treesas possible be retained, consistent withensuring the safety of trains. Relaxations indistance from track are left to the discretionof the Assistant Engineer who will satisfyhimself that no risk of trees falling across theline is taken. The following are among therelaxations:

(i) Trees may be reduced in height bylopping the top branches to obviatedanger of obstruction.

(ii) Branches on the track side may only beremoved, leaving those on the sideremote from the track, thus rendering itimpossible for the tree to fall across thetrack.

(b) When a group of trees is to be felled,each tree should be carefully marked,identified, classified and measured. Tendersmay be invited for the felling and purchase oftimber of such lots of trees, stipulating a timelimit for the felling and removal from railwayland of each lot. When inviting tenders, theclassification and size of trees need not be

quoted, the tender being in respect of a certainnumber of marked trees only, at the specifiedkilometrage.

(c) Joint Survey : Annually, joint surveyof the trees should be carried out by JuniorScale Officers of Engineering, S & T, ElectricalDepartment etc. and trees which are likely toendanger safety of track should be identifiedand felled/lopped as may be considerednecessary. A report should be sent to theDivisional Engineer and Divisional SafetyOfficer.

716 Felling Outside Railway Limits

When trees and bushes which interferewith the view of signals or level crossings areon private land, steps to clear the obstructionsshould be taken as laid down in section 14 ofthe Indian Railways Act 1989.

717 Felling in Compound of StaffQuarters

Trees in compounds of railwaybungalows or staff quarters should not be fellednor any branches lopped except with thepermission of the Assistant Engineer.

718 Felling Near Electrical or TelegraphWires

Trees in close proximity to electrical orcommunication lines should not be cut nor thebranches lopped except in the presence ofstaff of the Electrical or Telegraph Departmentas the case may be.

133


719 Afforestation on Railway Land ByForest Department

1) No new plantation of trees by the StateForest Departments may be permittedunless they enter into a written agreementwith the Railways along with a jointlysigned plan indicating the areas permittedfor plantation. Minor modifications tosuite the situational need may be madein the proforma prescribed by the RailwayBoard, but for any important modification,the Railway Board may be referred.

2) The Agreement should take into accountthe Indian Forest Act and should havesufficient safeguards so that theRailways title on the land is not dilutedand the Railwaymen are freely permittedto enter the forest and take action for safeoperation of the train services.

Trees should be planted in accordancewith para 704 of this manual. In addition otherguidelines in the agreement with the ForestDepartment may be followed.

720 Survey of Surviving Trees - Every year a survey of surviving trees should be madefor that year and information should be furnished in the proforma as detailed below:_________________________________________________________________________________________________Location : Type of : No.of trees : Trees from : Saplings : Total : Remarksof trees : Trees : more than 50 : 15cm to : needing : :

: : cm girth : 50cm girth : protection : :_________________________________________________________________________________________________ I : II : III : IV : V : VI : VII_________________________________________________________________________________________________

The above information should becollected and entered in a tree registermaintained for this purpose by SectionEngineer (Works /P.Way) in-charge.

The information with regard to number oftrees planted, cut and perished have to bemaintained in another Register.

A consolidated information is required tobe sent to the Railway Board by 30th April,every year.

721 Harvesting of Matured Trees -

The Railways undertake extensiveplantation of trees on their land every year.Besides increasing the green cover over the

land, with all its attendant benefits, this is alsoa source for earning revenue when these treesreach maturity.

Planting of tree saplings and harvestingof mature trees should be a continuousprocess with the number of tree saplingsplanted on the Railway exceeding the targetset by the Board for this purpose. This figureshould also be atleast double of the numberof mature trees harvested on the Railway.

As per the Forest Research Institute,Dehradun, a mature tree, in commercial terms,is one which has reached an age where it givesthe maximum economical outturn of timber.This shall be dependent on the specie of treeexpected to be harvested.

134


Vigorous efforts are expected to be madeto harvest the mature trees so as to earn themaximum revenue for the Railway from thissource.

722 Maintenance by Private Parties

Where the private parties are willing tomaintain the gardens, the railway may accept

such proposals, judiciously deciding the termsand conditions.

723 Training of Staff

The malis and supervisors should betrained using facilities available with stategovernment institutions or elsewhere.

H H H H H H H

135

ACQUISITION, MANAGEMENT & DISPOSAL OF LAND

CHAPTER VIII

A. ACQUISITION, MANAGEMENT &DISPOSAL OF LAND

801 General

a) The law regarding acquisition of landis embodied in the Land Acquisition Act of 1894(as amended by the Land AcquisitionAmendment Act No.68 of 1984). The importantsections of this Act are reproduced asAppendix II in the Indian Rlys. Code for theEngg. Deptt.(1993 Edition).

b) The rules and procedures foracquisition, custody and management ofRailway land and disposal of surplus land arecontained in the following chapters of the IndianRlys. Code for the Engg. Deptt.(1993 Edition):-

Chapter VIII - Rules for the Acquisition ofLand

Chapter IX - Procedure for the Acquisitionof Land

Chapter X - The Custody, Managementand Disposal of Land

c) Acquisition or relinquishment of landproceedings are subject to such special rulesand regulations as are issued by the StateGovernments or Local Bodiesfrom time totime.

802 Ownership of Railway Land

a) The ownership of all land held by theRailway vests in the Central Government, theinterests of the Railway being confined to the

rights of occupation as user. Hence it is theduty of every Railway Administration topreserve unimpaired, the title to all land in itsoccupation and to keep it free fromencroachment. With a view to avoid anylitigation, accurate and certified land plans ofall railway land should be maintained andboundaries adequately demarcated andverified therewith at regular intervals.

b) Special care should be taken to seethat remains of archaeological and historicalinterest are not touched. Interference withreligious edifices, burial grounds and otherplaces or objects which may be consideredas sacred should be avoided.

c) The rights for quarrying and mining inrailway land shall be governed by theprovisions contained in paras 814 & 856 ofthe Indian Rlys.Code for the Engg.Deptt.(1993Edition).

803 Acquisition of Land

The State Governments frame rules inrespect of their States consistent with the Act.The procedure of land acquisition may differfrom State to State. The actual practice invogue in the State may be verified beforeprocessing the papers for land acquisition.

Some of the important aspects/principlesto be observed while acquiring land are,

a) While acquiring land for major projects,alignment should be fixed in such a waythat minimum extent of agricultural landis involved.

b) In case of urgency, the application shouldbe made to the Collector under Section

136


17 of the Act. As per this Section theland can be occupied on expiry of 15 daysafter publication of notice under Section9(i) of the act.

c) When land is acquired on the bank of ariver with the intention of obtaining therights to the foreshore, it should be madeclear, subject to the concurrence of theState Government that the boundary onthe river side as indicated in theacquisition plan is the low water line forthe time being and that, should the riverat any time recede from the bank,accretion to the foreshore shall form partof the land acquired and no additionalpayment or compensation for suchaccretion shall be made.

Cases in which difficulties arise inconsequence of a sudden change in thecourse of a river as distinguished from agradual process of erosion and accretion,should be dealt with on their merits.

d) In the case of any slip or other accidenthappening or being apprehended to anycutting, embankment or other works,section 14 of the Indian Railways Act1989 empowers Railway to enter uponany lands adjoining the Railway for thepurpose of repairing or preventing theaccident and to do all such works as maybe necessary for the purpose. Adjoiningland should be entered upon only in casesof absolute necessity and to the minimumextent required.

In such cases, a report must be made tothe Central Government (Railway Board)within 72 hours of such entry, specifyingthe reasons which necessitated entry on

the land without having obtained previouspermission. As the Collector of theDistrict will be called upon under section15 of the same Act, to assess damageand compensation, he should be advisedof the entry within 24 hours.

e) It will be in the interest of theAdministration if the Assistant Engineeror Section Engineer (Works) concernedis deputed to attend award inquiries andalso settlement operations in CivilDistricts with a view to have properrecords of settlement pertaining to theRailway land.

f) In special cases, if the StateGovernment so desires, the Railwayshould deposit in advance an amountdetermined on the advice of the StateGovernment for the expeditious paymentof compensation to the land owners. Thisamount should be kept as low as possibleand should not normally exceed theamount that can be disbursed by theState Government within the financialyear in which the deposit is made.

g) As the financial justification for aproject and its location in a particularplace, takes also into consideration thevalue of the land to be acquired for theproject, it is essential to obtain a realisticestimate of the cost of the land from theland revenue authorities at the time ofpreparation of the estimate.

h) For acquisition of forest land, theprocedure laid down in paras 857 and858 of the Indian Railways Code for theEngg. Deptt. (1993 Edition) should befollowed.

137


a) While acquiring land for quarryingpurposes, it should be ensured that theState Government does not insert suchdeclaration as could deny quarryingrights to the Railway.

804 Relinquishment of Railway Land

a) When it has been decided that a certainarea of land is no longer required for Railwaypurposes and is eligible for relinquishment,action should be taken as detailed in para 1035to 1044 of Indian Railways Code for the Engg.Deptt. (1993 Edition).

b) When Railway land is relinquished,possession of the land should not be givenuntil the price for the land has been paid.Possession should be handed over jointly bythe representatives of the Railway and the StateGovernment to the purchaser.

c) When State Governments, in arrangingdisposal of surplus Railway land, decide tosell it by public auction, a minimum upset orreserve-price should be fixed along with suchother terms, as will be beneficial to the RailwayAdministration with their consultation. Theauction should take place in the presence ofa responsible railway representative. Allpapers and plans prepared by the Civilauthorities before the auction should becarefully scrutinised to ensure that thedescription of the land being sold is correctand that no easements are allowed overadjoining land remaining in the possession ofthe Railway.

d) The amount payable by the CentralGovernment or the State Government f orlands relinquished by the Railway will in allcases be their market value at the time of

transfer and not the original value paid on theiracquisition by the Railway.

e) Vide para 1042 of the Indian Rlys.Code for Engg. Deptt (1993 Edition) in caseswhere Railway land is transferred to a StateGovernment and where the capitalised valueof the land revenue had been paid to the LocalGovernment on acquisition, the amountpayable by the State Government for the landshould include the refund of the capitalisedvalue. In the case of land disposed of to privateparties, the refund of the capitalised value ofland revenue by the State Government will nothowever be necessary.

f) In all other cases, land will be disposedof at the highest offer which is alsoreasonable.

g) In respect of relinquishment of railwayland in favour of the State Government oroutsiders for the approaches of ROBs/RUBs,specific approval of the Railway Board shouldbe obtained irrespective of the value of landinvolved.

h) Railways should include contingencycharges @ 3% in all the relinquishmentestimates to cover incidental charges incurredduring the process.

i) Powers of sanction - In all cases ofdisposals, conditions of restriction of usesagreed upon by both the parties may beembodied in the transfer of sale deeds. Whenthe estimated value exceeds Rs.5 lacs, a priorreference should be made to the RailwayBoard.

138


805 Outstanding Cases of Acquisitionand Relinquishment of Land

Half yearly lists of outstanding cases ofacquisition and relinquishment of land shouldbe prepared by theDivisional Engineer, districtwise and state wise. These should be sent toconcerned collectors for necessary action withcopies sent to the Chief Engineer forinformation and record.

B. LAND RECORDS, DEMARCATIONAND VERIFICATION OF RAILWAY

BOUNDARIES

806 Land Records in C.E.'s Office

a) Vide para 850 of the Indian RailwaysCode for the Engg. Deptt. (1993 Edition) acomplete series of land plans for the entireRailway should be maintained in the Chief

Engineer's office. The original tracings thatare duly certified by the State Governmentsshould be kept as permanent records in theC.E.'s office. Sufficient copies of certifiedplans should be made out and supplied to theDivisional Engineers for reference, a copybeing kept in the cover of each relevant file.

No notings should be made on certifiedplans and declarations nor on important lettersfrom the State Governments in connection withacquisition or relinquishment of land as thesemay, at times, be required in a Court of Lawto prove the Railway's title.

b) Land Records Registers should bemaintained in the Chief Engineer's office asper the following proforma (Table 8.1.) in whichall details of transactions, both acquisition andrelinquishment should be noted.

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________Table 8.1.

LAND RECORDS REGISTERDivision ............................... Railway ................................. Section ....................................._______________________________________________________________________________________________________________Engg.Divn. : Land Plan : Stn.or : Description : Area :

: No. : Kilometrage : : (in hectares) :_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________(1) : (2) : (3) : (4) : (5) :_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

: : : : :: : : : :

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Cost of : Reference to : Govt. Resolutions & : Remarksland : correspondence : date of sanctioning :

: : the transfer of land :_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________(6) : (7) : (8) : (9)_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________

139


c) During consolidation and settlementoperations that take place after certainintervals, re-survey of all the villages is carriedout by concerned Revenue authorities. Duringthese operations, the shape of the Railwayland plans and the total land area availablewith the Railways may get obliterated inRevenue records. It would, therefore, benecessary that whenever such operations takeplace, the concerned Section Engineers(Works/P.Way) keep a track of suchoperations to ensure that Railway's land is keptintact in Revenue records. In fulfilling thisresponsibility, the Divisions may take suitableassistance from the Land Cell of the ChiefEngineer's office.

d) Micro-filming - All certified land plansshall be transferred as micro-films, requisitesets of which can be kept in safe custody bothin Headquarters Office and also in theDivisional Offices. These micro-films shouldnot replace original tracings but will help intaking prints of land plans in case originaltracings are lost/mutilated.

807 Land Records in Divisional/Executive Engineer's Office

a) Divisional/Executive Engineer's shallbe responsible to ensure that records of titleare carefully preserved and kept upto date bynoting all changes on the copies of authorisedland plans in their possession. All land plansshould show complete dimensions preferablywith boundary stones and their numbers.

b) Land Records Registers as per para806(b) should be maintained in the Divisional/Executive Engineer's office.

Entries in the Land Register should beduly initialled by the Divisional/ Executive

Engineer's, as and when any transaction takesplace.

c) After land acquisition proceedings arecompleted, the original papers viz. thenotifications, awards, certificates of handingover and taking over of land and final landplan and schedule signed by the Collectorshould be separately bound together andcarefully preserved. These documents shouldbe kept in the custody of the head or ChiefDraftsman of the Drawing office and theserecords should be properly handed overwhenever there is a change in the incumbentof the post.

d) The last stage in the process of landacquisition is the mutation entry in theRevenue records. It is, therefore, necessarythat such mutation entries are completed asearly as possible in a sustained follow-throughof the land acquisition process. Unless anduntil the mutation of the land, which has beenacquired, has been done, a quarterly reportthereon should continue to be sent to the ChiefEngineer's office. This point should also bechecked by the Open line Engineers whiletaking over complete stretches of newconstruction, involving land acquisition, fromthe Construction Branch.

e) Final land plans, after mutationentries are carried out, should be sent tothe Chief Engineer's office for safe custodyand record.

f) In case of Construction Projectsinvolving land acquisition, it will be theresponsibility of the Construction Engineersto hand over the land acquired, free of allencroachments and alongwith all recordsspecified in para (b) and (c), to the Open LineEngineers.

140


808 Demarcation of Land Boundaries

a) For proper demarcation of landboundaries para 1047 of the Indian Rlys. Codefor the Engg. Deptt. (1993 Edition) providesas under:

i) All land permanently occupied for thepurposes of Railway, shall have itsboundaries defined on the ground in sucha manner as to enable such boundariesto be readily ascertained and identified.

ii) For this purpose, the boundary of therailway land may be defined by acontinuous wall, fence or ditch or bydetached marks, posts or pillars.

iii) Where the boundary mark is continuous,the boundary of the Railway land is to beon the outer edge of the wall, fence orditch, that is to say, the wall, fence orditch will be situated wholly on Railwayland.

iv) Where detached marks, such as isolatedposts or pillars are used the boundaryof the Railway land will pass along theoutside of such posts and pillars.Between marks, the boundary shall ineach case be taken in a straight line fromthe outside of one mark to the outside ofthe next mark.

v) Detached marks should, in no case beat a greater distance apart (centre tocentre) than one-fifth of a kilometer (200meters). They should be of a substantialcharacter, not easily destroyed or movedby accident or mischief, and of such sizeand form as can be readily found andrecognised.

vi) Each detached boundary mark shouldbear a number. The position and numberof each detached boundary mark shouldbe shown on the land plan.

vii) Where a fence, wall or ditch is situatedat some distance within the boundary anddoes not mark the actual limit of therailway land, it will be necessary (inaddition to such fence, wall or ditch) tohave the actual boundary of the Railwayland properly marked and defined inaccordance with these rules.

809 Boundary Stones

a) The boundary stones may be ofsuitable size and section, projecting about 500mm above ground and inscribed withappropriate letters e.g. NR for NorthernRailway and the number in black below, thestones being colour washed white, red oryellow to suit local conditions. The stonesshould be fixed squarely, the outside facerepresenting the boundary with the letters andnumber facing the railway line. On thetelegraph post side preferably, the boundarystone may be serially numbered 1,3,5 and soon in ascending order of kilometrage, thoseon the opposite side being numbered 2,4,6 andso on, the number starting from a kilometrepost and ending at the next kilometre postwhere the numbers should begin afresh. Thestones should be kept clear from jungle growthor shrubs for at least 1 metre all round withinthe Railway limits.

b) Boundary stones should be fixed atevery point of change of alignment. In hillycountry and for sharp curves, each stoneshould be so placed that it can be observedfrom the adjoining stone on either side.

141


810 Boundary Pillars On Banks OfRivers - High boundary pillars on each bankof rivers or important waterways crossed byRailway bridges should be erected so as toprevent and control encroachments. Landwithin this boundary should never besurrendered.

811 (i) Construction of boundary wallin areas having habitation

(a) In areas having habitation borderingrailway land and also where habitation is likelyin near future, boundary walls should beprovided, so that potential encroachments areprevented and outsiders do not develop anyright of entry on railway land. Boundary wallsare an operational necessity in such situations,so as to prevent trespassing, cattle being runover by trains, use of railway tracks for easingetc. and theft of P. Way fittings and otherrailway materials. It is also necessary forboundary walls to be extended right from theStation outwards along the tracks of Vulnerablelocations within towns so that outsiders donot find an easy access to the Stations (LetterNo. 80/W2/14/0/APT dt. 2.9.93)

(b) In other areas instructions as per para3715 of Way and Works Manual should bestrictly followed.

811 (ii) Fencing as a rule, should beprovided at the following locations:-

a) For specified lengths on either side oflevel crossings, so as to prevent trespassingwhen the gates are closed;

b) Around busy station yards for 30mwidth on either side;

c) In municipal limits and notified-arealimits and in proximity to villages or suchlocalities where huts or houses are close torailway line.

d) For protection of railway land fromencroachments.

Pucca boundary walls may beconstructed in urban areas to preventencroachment.

811 (iii) Others preventive steps as:-

(a) Identification of vulnerable areas.

(b) Plantation of Juli Glora of similarlyeffective bushes in the area.

(c) Ensuring proper maintenance ofboundary pillar.

(d) Preventive unauthorised entry of roadvehicles into railway land threatening sidecollision with trains, through Plantation/fencingshould be done.

(e) Construction of structures andunauthorised hutments obstructing thevisibility to road users at the manned levelcrossings should not be permitted.

(f) Interaction with local authorities forassistance in preventing encroachments inthese areas.

(g) Joints visits of the vulnerablelocations by representatives of concerneddepartments along with civil authorities(wherever required) with a view to createadequate impression in the locality thatRailways are serious in preventingencroachments in the areas.

142


812 Land Plans.

(a) Up to date land plans should beavailable in the Divisional Offices ad copiesshould be made available to the FieldInspectors whenever required in connectionwith any work. Non-availability of land plansshould not be a ground for wrong demarcationsof land boundaries work dealing with outsiders.

(b) Certified land plans should betransferred on microfilms, requisite sets ofwhich can be kept in safe custody in theHeadquarters's office and also in theDivisional Offices. These films, however,cannot replace or reduce the need of originaltracing signed by the Railway Administrationand Civil Authorities.

(c) Copies of certified land planspertaining to their jurisdictions showingcomplete dimensions, should be in thepossession of the Assistant Engineers,Section Engineer ( Works /P.Way)

Every Section Engineer ( Works /P.Way)will maintain a land record as per para 806(b).From time to time all entries in the Registerbe made up-to-date. During importantinspections of higher officers from theHeadquarters and Railway Board, the registerwill be kept by the AEN with him. Land RecordsRegister should be checked annually by AEN/DEN/Sr.DEN and observations recorded onthem should be followed by Section Engineer(Works/P.Way)

813 Verification of Land Boundaries

a) Vide para 1048 of the Indian RailwayCode for the Engg. Deptt. (1993 Edidtion) everyZonal Railway Administration is responsible

for the demarcation and periodical verificationof the boundaries and maintenance of properrecords in connection with land in thepossession of that Railway.

b) The Section Engineer (Works/P.Way)is responsible for maintaining railway landwithout any encroachments or developmentof easement rights. He should endeavour toprevent and remove encroachments, as andwhen they arise and where removal ofencroachment is possible without referring toPPE act. In case where he is not able toremove them, he should report the cases tothe Assistant Engineer, who will on receipt ofsuch reports take immediate measures toremove the encroachments. Particular careis required to prevent encroachment on railwayland situated above tunnels and below bridgesespecially Road over/Under bridges.

c) The Section Engineer (Works/P.Way)shall inspect and maintain the Railway landboundaries between stations and atunimportant stations. The Section Engineer(Works) shall inspect and maintain the landboundaries at important stations and staffcolonies.

(d) Maintenance of land boundariesverification Register-

Railways should maintain printedregisters on the lines of Bridge Registers asat Annexure 8.1 (a) & (b) in the attached formatshowing "Details of Encroachments" and"Details of the Missing Boundary Stones" andaction taken thereon. The entries in theregister should be certified by the SectionEngineer/(Works/P.Way) of the respectivesections and verified / inspected by the Asstt.Engineer./DEN/Sr.DEN or other higherofficers from time to time. The registers should

143


have adequate pages so that record ofinspection and verification of land boundariesfor a period of 15 years can be accommodatedin the register. Separate registers should bemaintained for each Section Engineer (Works/P.Way)'s jurisdiction. A certificate on the

following proforma should be given by theSection Engineer once a year which is to beverified and counter-signed by AEN with regardto correct demarcation of land boundaries.

Certificate for Land Boundaries verification is given below:

LAND BOUNDARIES VERIFICATION CERTIFICATE

Year ______________ Section______________ Kms.______________ to______________

PWI/IOW______________ Sub Division_____________________ Division______________

____________________________________________________________________________________

I,__________________________ PWI/IOW certify that I have inspected the railway land fencingsand boundary stones on my section during the year ending __________________ and that theyare in accordance with certified the/land plans. There have been no encroachments except atthe following kilometerages that have been reported upon vide reference given against each.

DETAILS OF ENCROACHMENTS.Date of Location Description Action taken Reference Initials RemarksInspection of encroach- of Inspec-

ments. ting officers._____________________________________________________________________________________1 2 3 4 5 6 7

144


I further certify that wire fencing and/or boundary stones are available at all locations except atthe Kilometerages shown below for which action to replace the same is indicated against eachlocation.

Details of missing boundary stones_______________________________________________________________________________Date of Location Description Action taken Initials RemarksInspection missing boun- of Inspec-

dary stones. ting officers._______________________________________________________________________________1 2 3 4 5 6

1. I certify that railway boundaries are demarcated correctly and that there are noencroachments, except those listed above.

2. Certified that land plans pertaining to the above mentioned PWI/IOW_______________________________________are available with him except the following.

_______________________Asstt. Engineer/

_______________________DEM/Sr. DEN/

_______________________Chief Engineer/General

145


e) During his inspections, theAssistant Engineer should ensure that Railwayboundaries are demarcated correctly and thatthere are no encroachments. In cases wherehe cannot prevail on the parties to removethe encroachments, he must report the factswith particulars to the Divisional Engineer whowill take up the matter with local authorities.

814 Removal of Encroachments - a)New encroachments shall be got removedpromptly under provisions of section 147 ofRailway Act 1989. For old encroachmentswhere party is not amenable to persuasionfor removal of such encroachments, actionshould be taken under the provisions of PublicPremises (Eviction of UnauthorisedOccupants) Act 1971. Encroachment of railwayland by railway staff also constitutes gravemisconduct on their part and is 'good andsufficient reason' for imposition of majorpenalty after following the procedure laid downin the Discipline and Appeal Rules.

b) When an encroachment is in theprocess of building up, it should be removedthen and there.

c) Where the encroachments are of atemporary nature in the shape of jhuggies,jhopries and squatters and where it may bedifficult to take action under PPE Act the samemay be got removed in consultation and withthe assistance of local civil authorities.

d) Every year, at the close of financialyear, detailed survey of encroachments mustbe made under the following categories :-

i) CATEGORY - A Encroachments byoutsiders removal ofwhich requiresactionunder PublicPremises Eviction (PPE)Act.

ii) CATEGORY - B) Encroachments byoutsiders which do notrequire action under PPEAct (e.g. temporaryoccupation of land byhawkers, using Railwayland for cattle, cowdung,refuse etc.)

iii)CATEGORY- C) Encroachment byRailway staff in the formof temporary huts etc.

iv)CATEGORY - D) Encroachment byRailway staff who havebeen allotted railwayaccommodation, by wayof additions to thestructures, unauthoriseduse of land for cultivationetc.

Note: Category "A" encroachment is ofthe hard type and Category "B", "C" & "D"encroachments are of the soft types.

e) The Section Engineer (Works) shouldmaintain details of encroachments in a registershowing their incidence and removal withnecessary details as given in Annexure 8.2(Encroachment Inspection Register).

One page of this register shall be allotted

146


to each encroachment . A scale plan of theencroachment shall be provided on the facingside.

Once a case is opened the entries shouldnot be discontinued unless and until theencroachment is removed. A note to thateffect should be made in the register. Thefrequency of inspection of encroachment shallbe at least once in 3 months.

Section Engineer (Works) shall give acertificate in the following proforma, once inthree months which shall be verified andcountersigned by the AEN.

"I............................................., SectionEngineer (Works) certify that I have inspectedthe Railway land in my section during thequarter ending ..................and therehave been no encroachments except at thelocations shown in this register, that havebeen reported upon vide references givenagainst each."

sd/-Section Engineer (Works)

AEN should submit every month thesummary of the status of removal ofencroachments to the Divisional Engineer.

Monthly progress regarding additions andremoval of encroachments, filing evictioncases and their progress in court of EstateOfficer, in Civil Courts etc. should besubmitted by Divisions to Head Quarter.

Encroachment plans to scale shall bemade for every encroachment. Theseencroachment plans alongwith details ofencroachment as per Annexure 8.2 should be

checked and signed by Section Engineer(Works)/AEN. Records of such encroachmentplans should be kept in the Divisional officeand these encroachment plans should behanded over and taken over by SectionEngineer (Works)/AENs at the time of changeof charge.

A copy of encroachment plan should beavailable with Section Engineer (Works) /AEN/DEN/Sr.DEN. Any encroachment added orremoved should be reflected in theencroachment plan.

A copy of encroachment plan should behanded over by the AEN to SMs/RPFinspectors (where Section Engineer (Works)is not headquartered).

814(f) Steps to control theunauthorised use of Railway land.

Following further steps should beadopted to control the unauthorised use ofrailway land:-

(a) For any addition/alteration of a puccastructure, written sanction of theDivisional Engineer should be necessary.Any structure in which cement is usedmay be classified as pucca structure.

(b) For alteration /addition of any temporarystructure, written sanction of AEN shouldbe necessary.

(c) Plans for commercial plots at variousstations should be approved jointly byDivl. Engineering and CommercialOfficers and at site demarcation of theplots should be done with rail posts byEngineering Deptt. Whenever any

147


commercial plot is licensed theCommercial Department should give acopy of the allotment letter to theEngineering Deptt. so that SectionEngineer (Works) can ensure against anyunauthorised use. The station Mastershould also have a copy of the approvedplan of commercial plots at the situation.Station staff, including Commercial staffposted in Goods Sheds should firstlyensure that commercial plots are notmisused and secondly, in case of anymisuse and/or encroachment shouldimmediately report it to the EngineeringDeptt. for eviction and other action thatmay be necessary. This will also applyto the cases of any licensing for shops,tehbazari etc. in the circulating area andgoods shed premises.

(d) To prevent imminent encroachments onvacant railway land, planting of suitabletrees/ shurbs including quick growingthorny trees like Prosopis Juliflora(Vilayati Babul) should be adopted.

(e) Eviction process shall includeinteractions:-

(i) Identification of the existingencroachments.

(ii) Ensuring that all the cases underthe PPE Act have been filed.

(iii) Estate Officers should expeditefinalisation of the cases pendingwith them.

(iv) Action for possession in accordancewith the extant orders where evictionorders are received.

(v) Mobilisation of help of CivilAuthorities by formal/informalrequests at different levels till therequired assistance is forthcoming.

(vi) Cases directed to the courts to bepursued for early finalisation withthe help of the Railway Advocates.

815 Division of Responsibility

The following division of responsibilitybetween the station staff and the engineeringstaff should be observed in regard toencroachments within the station areas :

a) At stations, the Station Master will beprimarily responsible for preventingencroachments and for driving outtrespassers by obtaining help from RPF/Police and Section Engineer (Works) asnecessary.

b) In the goods shed, the Chief Goods Clerkwherever available and the Station Masterat other places will be responsible forpreventing encroachments and for drivingout trespassers with the help of RPF/Police and Section Engineer (Works) asnecessary.

c) The responsibility for preventingencroachments and for driving outtrespassers in circulating areas of thestations and goods sheds, will rest withthe 'Station Manager/Station Master/SS/CGC for their respective areas. They cantake the assistance from Engineering andRPF staff, as may be found necessary.

d) Whenever an encroachment incipient orotherwise is noticed which requires

148


action under PPE Act, the StationMaster/Chief Goods Clerk should advisethe concerned Engineering staff forundertaking eviction proceedings.

e) At station, where Section Engg. (Works)is not posted, but Inspector/RPF is there,then the Inspector/RPF is responsible forchecking fresh encroachments.

f) While instructions contained in this para(a) to (d) would generally apply, it wouldbe desirable to nominate Traffic,Commercial, Engineering officials as in-charges of specified areas at medium andlarge sized stations to keep a watch onencroachments and reportencroachments incipient or otherwise, tothe Engineering officials for eviction,ifnecessary, under PPE Act.

g) Adequate training may be provided to theEstate Officers to make them wellconversant with the Provisions of thePPE Act, 1971 and also various avenuesavailable to them while dealing with thecases of encroachments course contentsmay include case histories and variousrelevant court judgements on the appealsagainst the orders of Estate Officers.

h) RPF should render all help in removal ofsoft encroachments as and when theirassistance is sought. They should alsoprovide assistance in co-ordination withState Police /GRP where cases havebeen decided by the Estate Officers.

816 Railway Land In ImportantMetropolitan & Commercial Cities

In all such cities where the cost of land

is very high, special staff including RPFshould be deputed to deal with theencroachments and its removal. This batchof staff will be jointly responsible to ensurethat no further encroachment of Railway landtakes place. They will immediately removethe encroachments to avoid any developmentof the same. In case of non-removal, due tocertain unavoidable reasons, they will lodgeFIR with GRP/Civil police and report theencroachments with copy of encroachmentplan, FIR etc.to the Divisional Engineer/Sr.Divisional Engineer who will initiate actionfor removal of encroachment and keepheadquarters informed. Assistance of RPFshould be enlisted when dealing with the CivilPolice.

817 Maintenance of Rights of Way

a) The Assistant Engineers and SectionEngineers (Works) shall see that the rights ofway across Railway land are not allowed tobe infringed upon.

Prompt action should be taken to preventany person obtaining squatter's rights onrailway property.

b) So as to assert the right of ownershipas against any public claim of way, roads andauthorised passage across Railway land overwhich the public have no right of way, shouldbe closed for one day of 24 hours every year.This should be done during the date or datesapproved, if necessary, by the local authorities.Necessary reports should be sent by theSenior Supervisors to their AssistantEngineers after the procedure is observed,with details of station yards and kilometrages.A notice of at least a fortnight should be givento the public of such closure. These noticesmay be fixed in some conspicuous place in

149


the villages or towns where such passageslie, for the information of the public. In caseof important roads such notices should bepublished in the local newspapers.

818 Religious Structures

a) There is a total ban on licensing landfor religious purposes. The Zonal Railways willensure that no requests for further licensingof Railway land for religious purposes areentertained by them.

b) In regard to existing licenses for prayerplatforms, shrines, temples, mosques, gravesand tombs etc. on Railway land, the AssistantEngineers should maintain registers showingtherein full particulars of the extent of eachstructure. The Religious Structures Registersshould contain details of the locations,description of construction, extent of land onwhich the structures are located, history ofthe structure, reference to plans, communityby which it is regarded as sacred and withwhom dealings should be made. The principlesenunciated in para (a) should be compliedand suitable control of Railways should beensured through Agreement and Plans. Themanagement should be by a committeeconsisting of railway employees.

The Senior Supervisors should keep aconstant look-out for un-authorised extensionof existing structures or construction of newstructures and report such occurrences atonce to the Assistant Engineer.

c) In case unauthorised extensions ornew constructions are noticed, it should bepossible for the Assistant Engineer and Staffto persuade those concerned, to desist fromfurther construction. If required the AssistantEngineer should report immediately to the

Divisional Engineer who will then ask theDepartment concerned to take requisitemeasures. When this stage is reached, thematter should be reported by the DivisionalEngineer to the Chief Engineer. It would bedesirable to inform District authorities aboutsuch instances promptly and impress uponthem the need for removal of such additionsto old structures or new constructions. Inunavoidable circumstances, only individualcases may be referred to the Railway Boardfor regularisation of the encroachments.

d) Licensing of the area or regularisationof the religious structures may be limited tomaximum of 500 sq. metre in each individualcase.

e) Nominal license fee fixed for thepurpose will be charged in respect of religiousand welfare organisations, as decided byrailway administration from time to time.

C. MANAGEMENT OF LAND

819 Basic Principles

a) The basic principles of managementof Railway land are contained in paras 1008to 1034 of the Indian Railways Code for theEngg. Deptt. (1993 Edition).

b) All leases and licenses should becovered by agreements in the approved form.

820 Lease And License

Railway land is given out on license only.Request of Government Departments forlease may be considered on merit. Leasingof land is not permitted except in cases whereit is approved by the Railway Board.

150


821 Utilisation And Development OfAvailable Land

a) Licensing of land by the Railways ispermitted only for purposes connected withthe railway working.

b) In all cases, the license fee shall be

fixed by the General Manager keeping in viewrecommendations of the committee of Headsof Departments {see part (d) of this para}.

c) Licence fee of plots should be fixedas a percentage of the land value determinedas per the procedure detailed below. Thepercentage applicable to various types of plotswill be as under :

________________________________________________________________________________________________________Type of Plots Annual licence fee as a

% of land value *________________________________________________________________________________________________________(1) Commercial plots - for city booking 6%

agencies, out agencies etc.

(2) Ordinary commercial plots 6%without structures.

(3) Ordinary commercial plots - with 7.5% for the whole area allocatedtemporary structures for stacking/ including covered area.storing.

(4) Steel yards/coal dumps, bulk oil 10%installation etc.

(5) Land used to lay private sidings 6%

(6) Shops, Retail oil depots etc. 20%

· Fixing of land value :________________________________________________________________________________________________________

As the end use of the land licencedfor the above purposes is generally directlyrelated to traffic movement, it does not bearany direct relation to the land value advisedby the Revenue authorities etc, which is for adifferent end use. A market value wouldhowever be required to be taken to serve as a

base value for working out rental fee payable.This shall be fixed on the basis of the landvalue of the surrounding area as on 1.1.1985,as determined from the Revenue authoritiesand/or from the following :

151


(i) Evaluation of Town Planning Department

(ii) Actuals as per PWD and CPWDtransactions

(iii) Actual transactions, as per documentsfiled in the office of the Sub-Registrar

(iv) Value of land as assessed byprofessional evaluators of the State andCentral Governments.

In case it is not possible to obtain landvalue as on 1.1.1985 and in case where theland rates are readily available as on 1.4.1986the cut-off date of 1.4.1986 may be adopted.

The value so fixed shall be increasednotionally every year on the 1st of April,starting from 1.4.1986, at the rate of 10% overthe previous year's value to arrive at the landvalue for the following year based on whichthe licence fee to be paid shall be fixed. Oncethe notional value has been so obtained it shallapply to all plots at that station.

However, for the Metropolitan towns ofMumbai, Calcutta, Delhi and Madras if theStanding Committee of Head of Department(see part (d) below) feel that the land ratesare widely varying within the city, two or morerates can be utilised for that city.

d)Standing Committee of Head ofDepartments

A Standing Committee of three HODs willbe set up at the Head quarters of each zonalrailway and other railway units. The StandingCommittee shall normally consist of CE, CCMand FA&CAO. The broad functions of theCommittee, inter alia will be as follows :

(i) To fix the rental value using theprocedure detailed above; and

(ii) To review annually whether the trafficcommitments by the licensees of thecommercial plots have actuallymaterialsed or not and in case of anydeviation, initiate suitable correctiveaction including de-licensing andvacation as necessary.

e) Minimum licence fee

The minimum licence fee in respect ofplots covered above should be Rs.1000/- perannum.

f) Revision of licence fee

As the national land value will increaseby 10% over the previous year's land valueas mentioned above, the licence fee willautomatically go up by 10% over the previousyear's fee from the first of April every year.Suitable provisions, with the schedule ofpayment due should, therefore, beincorporated in the Agreement.

The termination/renewal date of theagreement should always be the end of thefinancial year so that there is no confusionand a better watch is kept on renewals.

g) Powers of licensing and renewals

Fresh cases of licensing of plotsconnected with Railway working and mentionedat (5) of part (c) above will be approved bythe GM, on recommendation of the HODsCommittee. As regards plots mentioned at(6), viz., shops, retail oil depots etc., asalready stated, the railway administration hasno powers to enter into fresh licensing for

152


purposes unconnected with Railway working.

h) The licence agreement shall providefor Security Deposit and Liquidated Damgesin terms of instructions contained in para 1025,1026 and 1027 of the Indian Railways Codefor Engg. Deptt.(1993 Edition).

i) No permanent structure is allowed tobe put up on land licensed for commercialpurpose.

j) Licensing of Land To Traders AtStations

Land may be licensed to traders atstations where there is a demand for thisfacility. Licensing of land is done by theCommercial or Engineering Department.Where land is licensed for stacking materialsreceived or despatched by train, the licensingwill be done by the Commercial Department.In all other cases and also where temporarystructures are to be erected on the licensedland, licensing will be done by the EngineeringDepartment.

Plans showing plots of land which couldbe licensed should be prepared in consultationwith the commercial department. The area ofthe plots should be decided with reference tolocal conditions. In case of plots licensed forstacking materials received or to bedespatched by Railway, the dimension of theplot along the siding should be restricted to10m so that maximum number of plots areserved by the siding.

Plots should be demarcated at site byfixing unserviceable sleepers or posts at eachof the four corners and plot numbers paintedon them. Four copies of plans should be made

out, one for the Divisional CommercialManager, one for record in the DivisionalEngineer's office, one for the works inspectorand one for the station master.

The Section Engineer (Works/P.Way)should ensure that in all cases where railwayland is licensed, the allotted area is notinfringed by the licensees. He should reportto the Assistant Engineer regarding such caseswhere he cannot successfully get thelicensees to adhere to the limits of the plotsallotted to them. The Assistant Engineershould then take up the matter at a higherlevel.

k) Licensing Of Land For Short Duration

Temporary licensing of land forconducting exhibitions, melas, carnivals,circus shows and such other cultural activitiesincluding temporary shops on such festiveoccasions, should be permitted subject to amaximum of three months with the personalapproval of the General Manager. The poweris not to be delegated to the lower authorities.The usual safeguards in regard to recovery oflicense fee and taking back the railway landafter the period of license in original conditionas also the licensees abiding by the termsand conditions of the local authorities, shouldbe kept in view while licensing the Railwayland. The rate of license fee should be fixedat 20% of the market value of land for shoppingetc. However, when more than one party isinvolved, open auction may be done to fetchbetter value.

l) Renewal Of Licenses For Shopping/Teh Bazari.

Licensing of fresh and additional land forshopping/Teh Bazari has been banned.

153


However, in old cases of shopping/Tehbazari,where licenses are renewed periodically, suchlicenses should not be treated as new casesof licensing but renewals even where freshlicenses have to be given to new parties onopen tender/auction basis. No new plots mayhowever, be added for Teh Bazari/licensing.However, specific cases for licensing of land,for purposes not connected with railwayworking but concerning welfare of staff, suchas, providing shops in areas where adequateshopping facilities do not exist, may beaccepted on merits, with the concurrence ofthe FA & CAO and personal approval of theGeneral Manager. The rate of license feecharged should be fixed at 20% of the marketvalue of land. Where, however, auction isfeasible and is likely to give better return, thesame may be adopted. The licensing of plotsshould be for a specific period and alsoconform to the rules and regulations of thelocal bodies, Municipalities etc. Theagreement entered with the parties should alsospecifically indicate the temporary removablestructure to be put up and must guard againstthe licensees indulging in encroachment ofRailway land. In the case of death/ medicalunfitness of a licensee of a plot of land,renewal of license may be done to his/her legalheirs on the merits of the case. The medicalunfitness shall be certified from a Govt.Hospital.

m) In each case of licensing, properagreement must be executed before givingpossession of land. It is the responsibility ofthe official handing over the land to verifywhether the agreement has been executed.

n) Each AEN/Section Engineer will befully aware of the available land (includingcommercial plots) under his jurisdiction andwill submit suitable development plans for the

most economical utilization of the availableland, in accordance with the recent circularsand instructions.

822 Use of Surplus Land

No surplus Railway land should belicensed for cultivation purpose. Plantation ofsuitable trees on such vacant land should bedone on programme basis. Strip plantationsshould be developed on big chunks of landavailable.

Land between stations should, preferablybe placed at the disposal of the StateGovernment for afforestation by ForestDepartment, only after entering into properagreement ensuring safety of train operationat all times and without diluting Railway's titleon the land.

823 Licensing/ Leasing of RailwayLand to other Government Departments

a) For railway land licensed/leased toother Government departments, the rentshould be 6% of the market value of land, asassessed by local revenue authorities at thetime of licensing/leasing. However, wherestructures are raised by departments, the rateof license fee for actual covered area shouldbe enhanced to 12% of the market value. Inthe case of long term leases, provisionsshould be made for periodical revision of rentwith retrospective effect. In case ofDepartment of defence, licence fee of 6% ofthe market value of land with revision at every10 years interval may be accepted.

b) In case of land leased to Governmentowned undertakings, payment of securitydeposit may not be insisted upon provided theconcerned ministry gives a guarantee to the

154


Railway against payment of dues by theundertakings.

824 Licensing of Railway Land toWelfare Organisations, Private Schools Etc.

a) For railway land licensed to templecommittees, Railway co-operative stores/co-operative societies, handicrafts centres andother welfare organisations, a nominal fee asper extant rules should be recovered.

b) The licensing of railway land foreducation purposes, will require the sanctionof the Railway Board. For privately ownedschools, Kendriya Vidyalayas etc. nominalfees should be charged. The nominal feeshould be levied as per extant rules. The periodof lease for Railway land required by the StateGovernments for opening new schools forchildren of Railway employees should notexceed 30 years. In the case of railway landleased to Kendriya Vidyalaya, the lease periodmay be 99 years.

825 Bulk Oil Installation On RailwayLand

a) The terms and conditions for licenseof railway land to oil companies at stations,for erection of mineral oil tanks, godowns anddepots and for laying pipe lines, are governedby special agreements between the RailwayAdministration and the licensees. Eachdocument is accompanied by a detailed siteplan and drawings showing structural details.Such agreements are usually long-termagreements and are executed by thecommercial department on behalf of theRailway administration.

b) In dealing with bulk oil installations,reference should be made to the Petroleum

Act of 1934 and the Petroleum Rules of 1976,as amended to date. Care should be takento distinguish between the various classes ofpetroleum products, based on their flashpoints, as given in the rules referred to.

c) The Petroleum Rules of 1976 lay downthat plan or plans relating to all new petroleumstorage works or alterations in those existing,must be signed by the licensing authority intoken of approval. No work on a storageinstallation or a storage shed should bepermitted on or close to Railway land unlessplan or plans for work duly signed by thelicensing authority are received in theDivisional Commercial Manager's andDivisional Engineer's offices.

d) Bulk oil storage should be located sothat :

i) they are as far away as possible fromgoods-sheds and station buildings;

ii) they could be conveniently served by aroad and siding from which the oil wagonscan be unloaded;

iii) they do not interfere with any futureextension of the station yard;

iv) they are sufficiently far apart from eachother or are so protected as toavoid any possibility of danger, shouldany installation catch fire.

As regards condition (ii), installation maybe permitted near a traffic dead-end siding,the use of which for stabling oil wagons whilebeing unloaded will not interfere with thegeneral working of the station. If such a sidingis not available, the provision of a specialsiding will be necessary.

155


e) It is not essential for an oil installationto be close to a siding as it can be served bya pipe line from the point of discharge fromthe wagon and the storage tank.

f) The approach road to a Bulk OilInstallation should be made and maintainedat the cost of the licensee who will pay licensefee for the land occupied.

g) Around every Bulk Oil Installation, asafety area must be kept clear of buildings ofany description and the safety distancesshould conform to the requirements ofPetroleum Rules.

h) The following distances shall be keptclear between storage tank or its enclosureand protected works.*

(Vide Schedule II of Petroleum Rules 1976)Licensed capacity Distance to be observed from storage(Total of all classes shed forof petroleum stored in ____________________________the shed) Petroleum Petroleum Petroleum

Class A Class B Class C________________________________________________________________________________________________________(1) (2) (3) (4)________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Not NotNot exceeding 2500 litres 6m applicable applicable

Exceeding 2500 litresbut not 7.5m Not Notexceeding 25000 litres applicable applicable

Exceeding 25000 litresbut not 9.0m 3.0 m Notexceeding 50000 litres applicable

Exceeding 50000 litresbut not 12.0m 4.5 m 3.0mexceeding 100000 litres

Exceeding 100000 litres 15.0m 6.0m 3.0m__________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note:(i) "Protected Works" include -1) Buildings in which persons dwell or

assemble, docks wharves, timber and coalyards, furnace, kiln or chimney and buildingsor places used for storing petroleum or for any

156


other purpose but does not include buildingsor places forming part of an installation;

2) Any public road or a Railway line whichis not used exclusively as an oil siding; and

3) Overhead high tension power lines.

(ii) In the case of underground storage tanks,it is not necessary to maintain any safetydistances around the storage tank.

(iii) 1) Petroleum class A means Petroleumhaving its flashing point below 23 degreeC.

2) Petroleum class B means petroleumhaving a flash point of 23 degree C andabove but below 65 degree C.

3) Petroleum class C means petroleumhaving a flash point of 65 degree C andabove but below 93 degree C.

Flashing point of any petroleummeans the lowest temperature at which ityields a vapour which gives a momentaryflash when ignited. It is determined inaccordance with the provisions of thePetroleum Act.

(iv) The area of land which is licensedfor the purpose of an oil installation on whichrent is to be paid should be the whole areaincluding the safety areas prescribed in sub-para (g).

826 Laying Of Oil Pipelines

a) Laying of oil pipe lines forinstallation other than those for bulk oilinstallations :-

i) No oil pipe line for conveyance of petrolor other oil is permitted on railway land withoutthe special sanction of the Chief Engineer/Chief General Engineer.

ii) Where the sanction to the project hasbeen obtained, a set of rules for the laying,construction and maintenance of pipe line fromthe point of view of safety of the travellingpublic and railway property shall be drawn upby the Railway administration in consultationwith the Commissioner of Railway Safetybefore the work on the project is permitted.

The pipe line shall comply with all therelevant provisions of the petroleum rulesrelating to transport of petroleum by pipe linesvide para V of Chapter III of the PetroleumRules 1976.

b) Licensing of land for laying of pipe line,sewer line etc. to State Government and localbodies can be approved by G.M. withFA&CAO's concurrence. However, for otheragencies, permission of Railway Board wouldbe required.

827 Construction of Government andprivate buildings near Railway land

a) 1. While it may be realised that Railwayshave a prior right of acquisition andutilisation of land adjacent to Railwayboundaries, the Railway Administrationcan only insist on previous intimationbeing given by the revenue authoritiesor the local Govt. when such lands areassigned for specific purposes. For theprevention of encroachments on railwayland such as by the erection of buildingsand platforms and the gradual accrual ofeasements such as right of way and aright to discharge sullage or storm water

157


over Railway land, it is desirable thatsufficient open space be providedbetween the railway boundary and thenearest face of any structure erected onadjoining land.

2. The interest of the Railways will besuitably safeguarded by providing for:

i) an open space of approximately 30mbeing left between the railway boundaryand the nearest edge of a buildingconstructed on adjacent land, the exactspace to be left being governed by localconditions; and

ii) intimation regarding proposedconstruction on lands adjacent to therailway boundary being given to therailway authorities at least 90 days beforethe commencement of erection work.

3. The lands adjoining the railway boundarywill be either privately owned or nazuland will be either included in a municipalarea or not. Regarding private lands notincluded in a municipal area, thereappears to be no method of enforcing theprovisions mentioned above. As regardsprivate lands included in a municipalarea, the provisions can be madeapplicable by incorporating them in themunicipal bye-laws and if the stategovernments have no objection, themunicipal committees of the state maybe asked to frame bye-laws to this effect.As regards nazul lands, both inside andoutside municipal areas, it is suggestedthat if the state governments have noobjection, suitable provision may bemade in the conditions governing transfer,at the time of making grants".

b) In cities and towns where land isvaluable and the cost high, it is not expectedof the owner of a plot to leave a large vacantspace between his building and the Railwayboundary. The Interests of the Railway wouldbe adequately safeguarded if sufficient vacantspace is left so as to facilitate future road anddrainage developments outside the railwayland to avoid requests for surrender of railwayland for access at a future date. Railwaysshould insist on barest minimum distance.Barest minimum distance shall be ascertainedby examining building plans and ensuring thatthe lay out of the building shall not result intoaccrual of various easement rights asmentioned above.

c) It is necessary that the Chief Engineershould arrange with each State Authority toframe rules in connection with the following:-

i) The procedure to be adopted for obtainingthe Railway Administration's opinionbefore consenting to the assignment ofland adjacent to railway limits for anyspecific purposes.

ii) The extent of open space to be left outsidethe railway boundaries for Governmentowned and privately-owned lands. Suchorders may be issued by the StateGovernments in the form of governmentcirculars or government orders, copiesof which should be carefully recorded inthe offices of the Chief Engineer,Divisional Engineer and AssistantEngineer.

d) Construction of a building or otherstructure near a station yard or betweenstations adjacent to the railway limits andwithin the zone specified in the saidgovernment circulars or orders, should be

158


intimated at its commencement by the SectionEngineer (P.Way/Works) to the DivisionalEngineer and Assistant Engineer by telegramand copies to the local authority, furnishingbrief particulars with Kilometrage and thedistance of the structure from the railwayboundary. This action should be immediatelyfollowed by a brief report and a sketch of theconstruction. On receipt of the report, theDivisional Engineer should address the localauthority to arrange stoppage of theconstruction.

828 Earning From Railway Land AndIts Monitoring

Once a year each AEN will arrange adetailed survey of existing sources of earningslike grass, fruit trees, fish ponds etc., fromRailway land including outstanding dues to berecovered.

Immediate action for issue of auctionnotice etc., will be taken to have the maximumearnings out of these sources. Targets will beset under the following heads and the samewill be advised to Headquarters for thecorresponding year, based on the survey ofexisting resources and outstanding dues(including those of commercial department)to be recovered.

i) Licensing of land for grow more food

ii) Sale of grass rights

iii) Sale of fruits of trees

iv) Sale of fishing rights

v) Sale of dry and matured trees

vi) Licensing of land for Teh Bazari and forshopping purposes.

vii) Licensing of land for other purposes.

viii) Licensing of land to oil companies.

ix) Way leave facilities and easement rightsalong road and rail approaches.

Section Engineer (P.Way/Works) andAENs during routine trolley inspection willmake entries of such sources in their diarieswhich will also be checked by higher officersduring inspection.

Monthly progress of earnings underabove heads shall be reported by SectionEngineer (P.Way/Works) and AEN to DivisionalOffice who shall report the same toheadquarters.

H H H H H H H

159


ANNEXURE 8.1(a)(Para 813(d))

(Left Side of Register)

Proforma for 'Land Boundary Verification Register'

DETAILS OF BOUNDARY STONES BETWEEN KILOMETRE.......AND...............__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Date : : Action : Initials of : DETAILS OF MISSING BOUNDARY STONES : Taken : of In-Inspection: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - -- - - - ---:- - - ------------- -:specting

: L : R : : officials_______ :__________ :_________________________________:______________ :___________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

160


ANNEXURE 8.1(b)Para 813(d)

(Right side of Register)

PLAN SHOWING RAILWAY BOUNDARY STONES BETWEEN Km........ To .......

Rly Land Boundary Stones Shown Thus -

L and R indicate Boundary Stones on the Left & Right while facing in the direction ofincreasing Kilometrage.

Note : Dimensions of Railway Land boundary may be given from Centre Line of Track._______________________________________________________________________________________________

161


ANNEXURE 8.2Para 814 (e)

ENCROACHMENT INSPECTION REGISTER(left page)

1. Location ...................................................................................................................................

2. Name of Encroacher ........................................................................................................

3. Father's Name & Address ...................................................................................................

4. Area Occupied .................................................................................................................

5. Use of Land........................................ (Commercial/Residential/Cultivation)......................

6. Date of Commencement of Unauthorised Occupation.............................................................

7. Date on which the Encroachment came to notice for first time.............................................

8. Reference of File No............................................................................................................_____________________________________________________________________________________

: : : Date of : Action Taken : Date of removal : Initials of Inspecting Inspection/ : : : official Review : : :__________:___________________:________________________:____________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

Note : Encroachment plan (to the scale) shall be pasted on the right hand side.

162

PREPARATION OF PLANS

CHAPTER IX


901 General Procedure

a) All plans such as Index plans, Indexsections, yard plans etc. shall be prepared inaccordance with the provisions in the followingchapters of the Indian Railways Code for theEngineering Department (1993).

Chapter II - "Modes of Investigations ofRailway Projects".

Chapter IV - " Engineering Surveys -Reconnaissance, Preliminaryand Final Location Surveys".

Chapter V - "Engineering Survey - ProjectReport, Techno EconomicSurvey Report and FeasibilityReport."

Reference may be made to IS:696-1972'Code of Practice for General Engineering andto special publication SP46-1988 issued byBureau of Indian Standards for engineeringdrawing practice.

b) Wherever drawings are prepared incomputer compatible media, adequate careshall be exercised in maintaining back-upcopies and installing security systems.

c) Standard drawings shall not bedeparted from without the specific permissionof the Chief Engineer.

d) When part of the work has to be doneto a standard plan or to an existing drawing,

the fact should be so stated; such drawingsneed not be reproduced. If part of theinformation necessary has to be supplied bythe Chief Engineer's office or by an officer ofanother Department, the Divisional Engineershould obtain and incorporate the details onthe drawings.

e) In general, all plans will be initiated atthe Divisional level [open line or construction,as appropriate]. Chief Engineer (Open line) willissue instructions as to which category ofdrawings will be approved at the Divisionallevel and which are to be sent to the ChiefEngineer (Open line or Construction) forapproval.

Original tracings* of drawings approvedby a Division will be retained at the Divisionaloffice with sufficient number of copies sent tothe Chief Engineer's office for record and forcorrection of master plans.

In respect of drawings to be approvedby the Chief Engineer's office, the DivisionalEngineer will prepare the tracing and send itto the Chief Engineer with copies marked"preliminary ". When the Chief Engineer hasapproved the tracing, the required number ofcopies will be taken and sent to the Division.Original tracing in such cases will be kept inthe Chief Engineer's office.

f) Additions and alterations to an existingplan should be shown in red. Such additionsand alterations will be approved by theauthority who approved the original plan. Whenthe additions and alterations are approved bythe Division, copies will be sent to the ChiefEngineer's office.

After additions and alterations areapproved, the original tracings will be

163


corrected by the office where they arepreserved.

g) All drawings should be quoted by theirnumber along with their alteration no.(e.g.NR.H.Q.E.PLAN No.LKO/10/09-93/R1) in theestimates and in the covering lettersaccompanying the estimates and in allcorrespondence relating thereto.

h) Reference of sanction particulars suchas Works Programme item number should beshown in the plan.

902 Plans for Other Departments

a) The Divisional Engineer may, at hisdiscretion, prepare sketch plans for otherDepartments or other GovernmentDepartments, or for private parties. Detailedplans should be prepared when there is alikelihood of the schemes proposed beingsanctioned or when the charges for preparationof plans and estimates have been deposited.

d) When preparing plans, the DivisionalEngineer should obtain complete details fromother departments. He should arrange for theplans to be signed by the representative ofthe department concerned or the private partyin token of approval and acceptance.

The terms "tracing" includes drawings/documents which are capable of beingreproduced.

903 Sizes of Drawings

a) Sizes of the trimmed sheets of alldrawings, except yard plans, should be asgiven in Table 9.1. All plans required to be oflonger length will be in the form of a roll,keeping the width as specified. The size to beused would depend on the extent of detailsrequired; broad guidelines are indicated inTable 9.1.

164


b) Depending on the size of a yard, yardplans should be prepared in the trimmedwidths of 841 mm or 420 mm or 210 mm. Thelength of the yard plans should not be morethan 1189 mm when they are not intended tobe kept as a roll. Yard plans can be in parts, ifnecessary, maintaining the scale for thedrawing.

c) Borders enclosed by the edges of thetrimmed sheet and the frame limiting thedrawing space shall be as detailed in BIS : SP- 46- 1988 and shown in Annexure 9.1.

d) A standard arrangement of drawinglayout will ensure that all necessary

information is included and its essential partis located easily. The title block should beplaced at the bottom right hand corner. Foldingmarks must be made on the drawing sheet asshown in figures 1(a) to 1(d) of Annexures9.2A & 9.2B.

904 Titles and Numbering of Drawings-

a) Title block should be of size 170 mmx 65 mm as shown in Annexure 9.1. Followingbasic information should be given in the titleblock.

1) NAME OF THE RAILWAY

TABLE 9.1 - SIZES OF DRAWING SHEETS_______________________________________________________________________________________________No Sheet Trimmed

Designation size (mm)(W x L)

_______________________________________________________________________________________________1. AO 841 x 1189 Index Plan and Section. General arrangement

and detailed drawings for road over bridges,major/ important bridge works & importantstructures, building (steel and concrete) etc.

2. A1 594 x 841 General arrangement,

3. A2 420 x 594 Temporary arrangement & detailed drgs.forbridge works, steel structures, building andtemporary arrangement drgs. for Sr. No .1above.

4. A3 297 x 420 Site plans for road over/road under bridges,passenger platform coverings, buildings etc.and drawings for minor detailing.

5. A4 210 x 297 Plans for inclusion in Works Programmebooklets for handy reference, PERT chartsof works of limited activities etc.

_______________________________________________________________________________________________

165


2) NAME OF DIVN/CONSTN.ORGANIZATION

3) NAME OF WORK

4) REFERENCE TO SANCTIONPARTICULARS

5) SCALE OF DRAWING ANDREFERENCE TO STANDARDDRAWING, IF ANY

6) DRAWING NUMBER

7) COMPLETION DRAWING NUMBER

8) DATED INITIALS OF THE CONCERNEDOFFICIALS

9) ALTERATIONS, IF ANY, WITH FULLPARTICULARS

b) Multiple drawing sheets marked withthe same number should be indicated bymeans of a sequential sheet number on thetotal number of sheets in the following manner:

Sheet No. = n/pWhere n = sheet number and

p = total number of sheets

c) If a drawing cancels a previous one, anote to this effect and the number of cancelleddrawing should be recorded on the drawing.Correspondingly, the cancelled drawing shouldhave an appropriate endorsement.

d) In the case of land plans or planswhere other Railways or Organisations areconcerned, additional space should be

provided for their signatures. In casesinvolving organisations other than theRailways, the designations should be writtenin full.

e) All signatures on tracings should bein indelible ink and dated.

f) Every plan should bear in small lettersat the lower left hand corner the name andinitials of the Draftsman and Tracer whoprepared and checked the plan. The HeadDraftsman should initial below the spaceprovided for the Divisional/District Engineer'ssignature.

905 Scale of Drawings

a) All drawings except sketch plansshould be drawn to scale. The scale or scalesof a drawing should be indicated at the ap-propriate place in the title block. Wheredifferent scales are used for details, thecorresponding scales should be shown undereach relevant detail.

b) Plans should be prepared to scalesas specified in Chapter IV of the IndianRailways Code for Engineering Department(1993Edition).

c) Details that are too small for completedimensioning in the main representation shallbe shown adjacent to the main representationin a separate detail view or section which isdrawn to a larger scale. Recommendedscales for details are 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20 and1:50.

906 Details on Drawing

a) The following information should,when applicable, be shown

166


i) The magnetic north point and true northwith magnetic variation, if known andwhere buildings are designed to suit aparticular orientation, an indication to thateffect.

ii) The names of the nearest junctions orterminals stations, that on the left handbeing the one from which the kilometragestarts.

iii) The kilometrage from headquarters of therailway to the centre of the station, thekilometrage of all junction points, the zeroof all branch lines, the centre of astation, junction point and zero of anyline, when once adopted for any 'yard' orportion of the line, shall be a permanentmark for all future references and shallnot vary with additions, alterations, orremodelling of yards.

iv) The original centre line of the railwaytogether with its chainages.

v) The boundaries of land according to theland plans. Where it does not undulyinterfere with important details of theplan, side widths from the centre line andboundary posts (and desirably theirnumbers) should be shown.

vi) Any known bench mark with the datumfrom which its value has been reckoned.

vii) The degree, radius, total angle ofdeflection and the tangent points of allcurves on the line, both on the plan andin the longitudinal section. Beginning andend of transitions together with theirlengths should also be shown.

viii) All gradients, together with the distancefrom which the level or gradient extendsout of station.

ix) All borrow pits, rivers and pipelines,streams, sullage and sewer drainstogether with their direction of flow. Forrivers their names and the highest knownflood levels must be given.

x) Temples, mosques and graves, roads andfootpaths with the names of towns orvillages they lead to.

xi) The position and block numbers ofbuildings. Where a building consists oftwo or more storeys', the number of floorsshall be mentioned. Where outhousesexist, these shall be marked "O.H. toBlock No. ....".

xii) In the case of foundations, the nature ofthe soil as determined from trial pit, andbore log details.

xiii) The clear length of all inspection pits,capacity of weigh-bridges in tonnes;diameter of turntables; capacity of highlevel tanks and of ground tanks; diameterand depth of all wells whether for drinkingor for loco use; diameter of watercolumns, hydrants, taps, main andsubsidiary pipe lines; the clear lengthsand sizes of drains and sewers andstorm-water drains; location of septictanks.

xiv) The length and capacity in terms ofvehicles of sidings; position of foulingmarks and buffer stops; distance, centreto centre of tracks; distance of all thefacing points on the main line from thecentre of station; the serial numbers of

167


the turnouts; the angles of crossings;inclination of gathering lines; the distancefrom the centre of station of all signals,signal cabins with their distinguishingfeature, signals being shown as viewedby the Driver and with their bases at thesites they occupy; lengths of passengerand goods platforms and their heightsabove rail level; telegraph posts andcrossings of tele-communication andpower lines over head or underground.

xv) Road crossings with their class andlocation; road over bridges andunderbridges;

xvi) Infringements of standard dimensions, ifany.

b) Drawing for a structure includingbuilding should be prepared in three parts :

i) Site plan

ii) Architectural and/or General Layoutdrawing

iii) Structural and/or execution drawing.

In case of small buildings, all these partscan be included in one sheet but placeddistinctly.

The site plan can be separate or part ofan existing general plan. Site plans for newquarters should include the type drawingnumbers and show the north line and directionof prevailing wind.

The Architectural drawing shouldnormally include ground plan, section throughthe building in such directions as arenecessary to exhibit the intended form and

dimensions of the various parts, and elevationof one or more faces. It should invariablyindicate the number of floors for which thefoundation of the building is designed. It shouldalso include roof drainage arrangement,sanitary details, layout of bathrooms andlayout of kitchen. Details of finishing itemsand specification should also be indicated inthe Architectural drawing in the form of a note.Landscaping and developmental work involvedmust also be shown.

The structural drawing will indicatefoundation plan, details of R.C.C. members anda bar bending schedule as per standard I.S.bar bending specification.

c) The drawings for a bridge shouldinclude the site plan, plan and longitudinalsection of the river or nala above and belowthe proposed site in the case of large bridgesbeing rebuilt on account of insufficientwaterway or being built at a new site and asufficient number of cross sections showinghighest flood level. If a correct survey of animportant river does not exist, the river shouldbe surveyed for a distance of 8 km upstreamand 2 km down stream, all spill channelsupstream being shown on the plan; thesedistances of 8 km and 2km are to be taken asmeasured at right angles to the centre line ofthe Railway and not along the course of theriver. On these drawings, notes should bemade of area of flood sections and hydraulicmean depths for each case, catchment area,velocity obtained by calculation and byexperiments (preferably at high flood ),waterway through bridge proposed to beallowed with a note on increase in velocityand probable highest flood level due to afflux,ground plan of foundations, sections throughthe bridge in such directions as are necessaryto show the intended form and dimensions of

168


the various parts, front and side elevation ofabutments and piers, and drawings of suchdetails as have not been standardised.

The standard of loading for which thebridge is designed should be recorded in theplan and reference to the type drawing of theparticular girder should also be recorded.

d) Plans of water supply, pumping,storage and distribution systems should showcomplete dimensions and details includingreduced level of salient points. The linesshould be drawn in thicker lines than the restof the plan and only sufficient buildings (withtheir designations) and tracks shown as arenecessary to make the purpose and locationof pipe-lines understood.

e) Plans of drains and sewerage shouldshow complete dimensions and details withsufficient features of the site including gradientand reduced level of salient points.

f) The set of drawings should be completeso as to enable the work being executed asper the specifications and standards desired.

907 Symbols and Colours on Drawings

a) Symbols to be used on site plans andplans of station yards should conform to BIScode SP46-1988. For other com-monlyaccepted abbreviations and symbols, table19.1 of BIS code SP46-1988 may be referredto. (reproduced in Annexure 9.3 for readyreference).

b) For clarification of drawings it issometimes necessary to shade somemembers/parts of members for which sectionsare drawn. In such cases, colour washing/shading in broad line may be done on the backof the tracing for the affected area.

c) In regard to black and coloured lineson tracings and prints, the followingconventions should be observed :

i) Existing work that is to remain shouldbe in full line;

ii) Work that is to be dismantled should bein thin dotted lines;

iii) New additional work should be in full redlines. This does not apply to a drawingin which all the work is new;

iv) New additional work that is not to be doneat the same time as the bulk of the workshown on the drawing should be inbroken red lines. This does not apply toa drawing in which all the work is new;

v) Work to be relaid or rebuilt elsewhere onthe same plan should be in fullyellow lines.

d) When desirable to do so, coloured linesmay also be used to distinguish tracks ofdifferent railways at junctions, M.G. or N.G.from B.G. tracks and buildings of differentrailways. If this is done, the colour used shouldbe distinctly different from those mentionedabove.

e) The following colours will print clearlyon ferro-paper :

Black .. Indian inkRed .. Vermilion red or scarlet lakeYellow .. Chrome yellowGreen .. Emerald greenBlue .. Prussian blue Cobalt blue

mixed with a little Chinesewhite.

169


908 Standard Drawings

Standard drawings issued by the RDSOsuch as for track and bridges and the TrackManual Drawings, shall not be traced. Copiesas required should be obtained or Standarddrawings should be carefully filed in each officeseparately from other drawings and a recordthereof maintained.

909 Plans issued by the ChiefEngineer's Office

Copies/Prints of plans issued by theChief Engineer's office should be carefullymaintained and recorded; copies as requiredmay be obtained.

910 Plans in Divisions/Dy.ChiefEngineer's, Assistant Engineer's andSection Engineer's offices:

a) The Divisional/Executive Engineersand Assistant Engineers should be inpossession of a set of each of the StandardDrawings, type plans, and station yard plans,land plans, plans and longitudinal sections ofthe line, track diagrams, plans of bridges andother structures and plans of water supply anddrainage as pertain to their jurisdiction. Plansin their custody should be carefully stored.

They shall ensure that the SectionEngineer of Permanent Way, Works & Bridgeare in possession of necessary plans aspertain to their jurisdiction and to works.

b) Plans need revision as and whenrenewals are carried out and additions oralterations are made. Every endeavour shouldbe made to keep the track diagrams and plans,particularly of station yards and colonies, up-

to-date and the Chief Engineer's office keptadvised with details. When alterations areextensive and cannot be shown on an existingplan, a fresh plan should be prepared.

911 Completion Drawings

a) Signed copies should be submitted byAssistant Engineer or the Engineerresponsible to the Divisional/Dy. ChiefEngineer for works completed to the approveddrawings. These should indicate the work asactually carried out, special care being takenthat the work below ground is correctly shownand na-ture of soils met with recorded.Alterations or modifications which may havebeen made from the working plans should bemarked on the prints in red ink. When severalstructures are erected at the same time in thesame locality and to the same drawings, onecompletion drawing may be submitted. If thestruc-tures or buildings differ only infoundations, the completion drawing shouldshow the superstructure common to all, andseparately the foundations of each building,designated in such a way that the separatefoundation drawings can be identified with thedifferent buildings.

b) The Divisional/Dy.Chief Engineersshould prepare fresh tracings if the alterationsare numerous, showing the works as actuallybuilt. Such tracings will have "completiondrawing number" stencilled in red letters inthe space provided in Title Block andDivisional Engineer's signature appendedthereto.

If minor alterations have been made, theoriginal tracing may be amended in theDivisional/Executive Engineer's office andmarked "completion drawing".

170


c) In case of drawings approved at thedivisional level, the original tracing ofcompletion drawing will be kept at the divisionaloffice with sufficient number of copiesendorsed to Chief Engineer for record andincorporation in master plan.

In case of drawings approved by the ChiefEngineer, the "Completion drawing" preparedby the division will be sent to the ChiefEngineer for incorporating in the originaltracing marking the same as "completiondrawing".

d) The completion drawing of a bridgeshould show, in addition to all dimensions, thefollowing -

i) Reduced level of rails.

ii) Reduced level of bed blocks or crownand springing of arch or underside ofslabs.

iii) Reduced levels of top and bottom offounds. If on piles or wells, reducedlevel of bottom should be given andcomplete drawings showing the stratapassed through with details of any testsmade.

iv) Nature of soil.

When possible without undue labour andexpense, these levels should be connected toa permanent bench mark, but where this isnot readily available, the reduced level as givenin the longitudinal section should be taken ascorrect. In all cases, a note must be addedstating from where the datum level has beenobtained.

912 Care and Filing of Tracing

a) Tracing shall not be used for referenceas they are likely to get lost or damaged.Required number of prints should be suppliedto Engineers and Inspectors; each particularproject file should contain a print of the worksrelating to it.

b) Tracing should not be folded. Shouldit be necessary to send a tracing from one of-fice to another, it shall be rolled and insertedin a cardboard cylinder.

c) Prints should be folded as indicated inpara 903(d) above. Two methods of foldingare shown in Annexure 9.2A & 9.2B. Whenprints are rolled for despatch, they should berolled with the title head outwards.

d) The Records Section of each DrawingBranch may file every tracing and originaldrawing on the basis of the subjectsclassification and the index-card-filing system.Each drawer of the index-card-cabinet shouldbe distinguished by a classification number,the system of classification being determinedby C.E. Each card should be complete asregards title of the drawing, other connecteddrawings, file-reference and the drawernumber in which the original is stored.

Storage drawers should have placardson the outside indicating the contents in each.The plans should be stored flat in shallowdrawers of convenient dimensions. Probabilityof damage by moths or white ants should beguarded against.

e) Wherever found convenient The ChiefEngineer can put the original records/drawingson microfilm or they may be computerised forfuture records.

171


172


173


174


1. Scope - This section covers such ofthe abbreviations which are recommended foruse in general engineering drawings.Abbreviations already covered in specificsubjects, such as units and quantities,tolerancing, gears, fluid power, electrical andelectronics are not dealt in this section.

2. Enclosed Table lists some of thecommon abbreviations recommended.Abbreviations are the same both for singularand plural usage. Only capital letters are usedfor abbreviations to ensure maintenance oflegibility bearing in mind reproduction andreduction process. Abbreviations which havealready been standardized nationally/internationally using lower case letters should,however, be written according to thecorresponding standard.

2.1 When using abbreviations andsymbols in engineering drawings, the followingpoints are to be borne in mind.

a) They should be used sparingly only whenspace saving in a drawing is essential.

b) Short words such as 'day', 'unit', 'time',etc. should preferably be written in full,even when an abbreviation has beenstandardized.

c) Periods (full stop symbol) are not to beused except where the abbreviationmarks a work (for example, No;FIG.)

d) For hyphenated words, abbreviations areto be with the hyphen.

e) Sometimes one and the small lettersymbol may represent more than oneterm or quantity. Hence it is advisablenot to use such symbols to mean twodifferent terms in one and the samedrawing. If it becomes unavoidable, thesymbols may be provided with suitablesub script.

Source : SP 46-1988ANNEXURE 9.3

Para 907(a)ABBREVIATIONS

175


RECOMMENDED ABBREVIATIONSTerm Abbreviations

Across corners A/C

Across flats A/F

Alteration ALT

Approved APPD

Approximate APPRO

Arrangement ARRGTX

Assembly ASSY

Auxiliary AUX

Bearing BRG

Bureau of Indian Std. BIS

Cast Iron CI

Centre Line CL

Centre of gravity CG

Centre to Centre C/C

Centres CRS

Chamfered CHMED

Checked CHKD

Cheese head CH HD

Constant CONST

Continued CONTD

Counterbore C'BORE

Countersunk head CSK HD

Countersunk CSK

Cylinder/Cylindrical CYL

Diameter (in a note) DIATerm Abbreviations

Dimension DIM

Drawing DRG

East E

Etcetera Etc.

External EXT

Figure FIG.

General GEN

Ground Level GL

Haxagon/Hexagonal HEX

Head HD

Horizontal HORZ

Hydraulic HYD

Inspection/ed INSP

Inside diameter ID

Insulation INSUL

Internal INT

Left Hand LH

Long LG

Material MATL

Machine/Machinery M/C

Manufacture/ing MFG

Maximum MAX

Mechanical MECH.

Minimum MIN

176


Miscellaneous MISCTerm Abbreviations

Modification MOD

Nominal NOM

North N

Number NO.

Opposite OPP

Outside diameter OD

Pitch circle diameter PCD

Quantity QTY

Radius(in a note) RAD

Required REQD

Right Hand RH

Round RD

Reference REF

Screw/Screwed SCR

Serial Number SL.No.

Sheet SH

South STerm Abbreviations

Sketch SK

Specification SPEC

Standard STD

Spotface SF

Symmetrical (in a note) SYM

Temperature( " " ) TEMP

Thick THK

Thread (in a note) THD

Through(in a note) THRU

Tolerance TOL

Typical TYP

Undercut (in a note) U/C

Weight WT

West W

With reference to/

With respect to (in a note) WRT

H H H H H H H

177

STORAGE AND USE OF EXPLOSIVES

CHAPTER X

STORAGE AND USE OFEXPLOSIVES

1001 GeneralReference may be made to the following

for detailed provisions:

a) Indian Explosive Act 1884

b) BIS Codes

IS: 4081-1986 :Safety code for blasting andrelated drilling operations.

IS: 4756-1978 : Safety code for tunnelling work.

c) Other rules and special instructionsissued by Railway Administration or byState Government from time to time.

1002 Issue of Instructions on Use ofExplosives

Explosives are used in the followingcases:-

a) for clearing boulders which fall on therailway line, as in ghat sections;

b) for quarrying rock;

c) for widening rock cuttings;

d) for deepening wells;

e) for cuttings in rock,

f) excavation of foundations in rock; and

g) construction of tunnels.

The Railway Administration shallprescribe the type and quantity of explosivesto be kept with inspectors for removingboulders falling on running lines. TheAdministration shall also prescribe thelocations for stocking these explosivesmagazines in the sub-division.

Blasting works may be carried outdepartmentally or by contract; in either caseit should be ensured that competent qualifiedstaff are engaged and safe working practicesare employed. If the work is done throughcontract, the Contractor shall be in possessionof a license to purchase, store and useexplosives. Blasting operation can be carriedout only through persons(Blasting Mates) whoare authorised by the appropriate Department.

For major works, the RailwayAdministration will draw up special instructionswhich should cover every aspect of eachoperation and be illustrated with sketcheswhere necessary; the instructions shouldinclude:-

(i) Duties of Blasting Mates and other staff.

(ii) Description of materials used forblasting, such as explosives,detonators, safety-fuses, blasting cables,joint adapters, fuse lighters, explodersand crimpers.

(iii) Collection and transport of materials.

(iv) Testing of materials used for blasting.

(v) Procedure and methods of boring andcharging of holes and blasting for eachtype of explosive.

(vi) Imposition and removal of traffic and/or

178


power blocks.

(vii) Safety-distances.

(viii) Protection of track and structures duringblasting operations.

(ix) Precautions before, during and afterblasting.

(x) Danger and all clear signals before andafter a blasting operation.

(xi) Submission of periodical progressreports.

(xii) Custody and storage of explosives inmagazines and their accountal.

1003 Observance of Rules

a) Possession of explosives shall becovered by a license as required by theextant Explosive Rules.

b) The Divisional/Dy. Chief Engineer,Assistant Engineer and the Section Engineer(Works) shall be responsible to ensure thatrules issued by the Government and theAdministration in regard to the storage anduse of explosives on works are strictly obeyed.The Inspector of Explosives and the DistrictMagistrate have powers to inspect allmagazines. All staff should willingly assist insuch inspections.

The Divisional/Dy. Chief Engineer andAssistant Engineer should, by frequent check,personally satisfy themselves that all staffhandling explosives are in possession of andunderstand the rules and any subsequentmodifications thereto.

c) The Assistant Engineers and SectionEngineer (Works) within whose jurisdictionmagazines are situated, should make aspecial mention of these in their handing overnotes and ensure that their relieversunderstand the orders relating to thesemagazines. Mention should also be made inthe handing over notes of any modificationswhich may have been suggested by theInspector of Explosives or District Magistrateon his last inspection and whether these havebeen carried out.

1004 Carriage of Explosives

Assistant Engineers and Inspectorsshould make themselves acquainted with theinstructions contained in the I.R.C.A. Red TariffNo.16 "Rules and rates for the conveyanceby rail of explosives and other dangerousgoods". If carried by a road vehicle, the vehicleshould have the necessary licence issued forthe purpose.

1005 Protection to Trains and RailwayProperty

a) In vicinity of railway line. Blastingoperations within 100 metres of a running lineshould normally be carried out under blockprotection. Tracks within 60 metres of the rockto be blasted should be protected by coveringwith old sleepers which should be removedafter the blasting is over and before removalof the block.

When the blasting operation is carriedout without imposition of the block, thePermanent Way Inspector shall ensureprotection to trains in such a case, no blastingshould be done within half-an-hour of the timewhen any train is expected to pass.

179


b) In vicinity of buildings.- When anyblasting operation is carried out within 100metres of a building, the Works Inspector shallbe present to ensure that special precautions,as may be prescribed by the Divisional/Dy.Chief Engineer or the Assistant Engineeror as stipulated by the licensing authority, aretaken and that the necessary warning is givento the inhabitants.

1006 Precautions to be ObservedDuring Blasting

The Blasting Mate shall be responsible:-

a) To see that when blasting is conductedin the neighbourhood of a public or private roador building, or of any place where there maybe people who would be endangered,experienced Watchmen are sent, with redflags, to stop traffic or warn persons. TheseWatchmen would be warned from theworkspot, of the commencement andcessation of blasting operations:

b) To see that, before blastingcommences, all persons except those who areactually to light the fuses, are warned by therepeated striking of an empty tin or blowing ofa siren and are at a distance of not less than150 metres and that, in special cases, suitableextra precautions are taken;

c) To see that, in order to avoid damageto structures (such as girder bridges andtelegraph wires) which may be in closeproximity to the blasting spot, only shallowbore-holes are drilled and light charge usedor vary the angle of bores to control the blast;

d) To select and instruct carriers of theexplosives, detonators and safety fuse afterthey have been drawn from the magazine;

e) To ensure that no one interferes in hisabsence with any explosive, detonators orcaps already drawn by him from the magazine;

f) To see that neither himself nor anyperson within 10 metres of himself smokeswhile he is conveying, handling or usingexplosives;

g) To see that bore holes are of such asize that cartridges can easily pass downthem; that bore holes are clear of all debrisbefore a cartridge is inserted, that charging isdone by himself and the position of the chargedholes are noted carefully.

h) To drop several centimetres of tampingof sand or clay on top of the primer cartridgebefore beginning to stem or press and thatthis tamping is gently pressed down on top ofthe primer without the use of force;

Note:- The primer-cartridge is thecartridge in which the detonator or cap andfuse are attached and is usually fixed as thelast cartridge of the charge.

j)To see that the safety fuses of thecharged holes are lighted in his presence andhave properly ignited;

j)To compare the number of shots actuallyheard with shots intended to be fired and tocarefully inspect the work after blast andsatisfy himself that all holes have explodedand the broken rock does not contain anyunexploded cartridge or pieces of cartridges;

k) to take precautions as given below incases of mis-fires

(i) if a charge has apparently missed fire,to immediately warn all present and see

180


that no person is allowed to go near it foran hour,

(ii) if a charge misses fire, to examine thehole and mark a red cross overit,

(iii) to see that a shot that has missed fire isnot bored or picked out; that no furthercharge is introduced into the hole ;

(iv) to determine the direction of the hole forwhich purpose a few centimetres(inches) of tamping may, if necessary,be picked out and a stick placed in themis-fired hole and to drill, after 60minutes have passed, a fresh hole nearthe charge which has missed fire andthat this is done at a safe distance fromthe former hole and in such position anddirection that the boring tool cannot comein contact with the explosive which hasmissed fire. The Blasting Mate must notleave the spot on any accountwhatsoever until the second hole (whichshould explode the old charge) has beenfired. He must carefully examine theresult and continue the operation, ifnecessary, until the original charge hasexploded.

l) to make sure that there is only onekey to the exploder and that this is in his pocketwhen he has to leave the exploder. This isnecessary for his own protection.

1007 Misfires with Electrical Methodof Firing

a) If after complying with para 21 of theIndian Metalliferous Mines Regulations, theOfficial in-charge of the blasting operations ata site ascertains that a misfire has occurred,

he will immediately prevent any one fromapproaching the site whose presence is notabsolutely essential. He will re-examine theconnections, check the wiring or re-wire ashe thinks fit and will try again to fire the chargeby electrical means.

b) Should he be unable to fire theunexploded charge(s) by electrical means, hewill then comply with paras 82-84 of the aboveRegulations, which are reproduced below,using the means considered the mostsuitable:-

"82. No person shall bore out a hole thathas once been charged or attempt to withdrawa charge either before firing or after a misfireor deepen or tamper with empty holes orsockets left after blasting.

"83. When a misfire occurs, a portion ofthe tamping may be sludged out withcompressed air or water under pressure, butno kind of metal tool shall be used for thispurpose. The hole shall thereafter be reprimedand fired.

"84. No person shall drill or cause orpermit to be drilled any hole within 300 mm ofa misfired hole, and care shall be taken todrill the new hole in such a direction that thereis no danger of touching the unexplodedcharge. The new holes shall be bored in thepresence of an authorised shot-firer and heshall be present during operation undertakenfor the removal of debris lying within 2 metresof the misfired hole. A careful search amongstthe debris shall be made for cartridges anddetonators, if any.

c) Since with the electrical method offiring, it is possible for one shot to explodeand blast out the rock in which an adjacent

181


charge has been placed but which has notexploded, the Official-in-charge is responsible,at the end of each blast, for examining theworking face minutely to detect whether anycharges have misfired in this manner. If heconsiders that this may have been possible,a careful search must be made in the debrisfor the unexploded detonator.

1008 Explosives Disposal

a) No explosive shall be abandoned.These shall be disposed off or destroyedstrictly in accordance with the approvedmethods and in doing so the manufacturersor the appropriate authority shall be consulted.

b) Explosives, caps, boxes liners ormaterial used in packing of explosives shallnot be left lying around in places to whichchildren or unauthorised persons or livestockcan have access.

c) Paper or fibrous material employed inpacking explosives shall not be put to anysubsequent use. Such material shall bedestroyed by burning in the presence of aresponsible person.

1009 Destruction of Explosives

The destruction of explosives should, inall cases, be supervised by the AssistantEngineer.

When destroying explosives, thefollowing instructions should be strictlyadhered to:-

a) Black powder- Black powder should bethrown into water, preferably hot water,which dissolves out the saltpetre andrenders the explosive harmless. Analternative method is to lay it out in a

train and fire this from one end by meansof a piece of safety fuse, but if more thanone train is laid, care should be taken tolay the second at such a distance fromthe other as to run no risk of one beingfired by the heated ground of another.

b) Dynamite and other similar explosives -Not more than 2.5 Kg. of the explosiveshould be destroyed at a time. A clearspace of ground, free from dry grass,about 100 square metres should beselected at least 800 metres away frombuildings and dwelling places. A line ofshavings or dry grass, about 450 mmwide and at least 100 mm thick, shouldthen be laid down. The direction of theline should be at an angle of about 45oto the direction of the wind. The workshould not be undertaken on a day whenthe wind would be strong enough todisturb or blow away the shavings. Thisline of shavings or dry grass should thenbe adequately sprinkled with keroseneoil to ensure its burning continuously.The cartridges with the wrappers openedand unrolled should then be placed in acontinuous line not more than 2 abreastwith an interval of 25 mm between eachline of cartridges and with the cartridgewrappers or other paper lightly placedbelow them. The cartridges should beplaced at about 6 metres from theweather end of the line of shavings, atthe extreme weather end of which willbe placed an adequate length of safetyfuse. To ensure the ignition of theshavings, it may be found necessary toplace a small quantity of cotton wastesoaked in petrol adjacent to the end ofthe safety fuse and on the shavings. Thesafety fuse should then be lighted andthe operator should retire quickly to a

182


safe distance when after a short time thedynamite will burn steadily withoutexploding.

c) Detonators -Surplus detonators shouldbe disposed of by throwing them, one ata time, into a deep pool of a river or thesea. An alternative method is to soak

them thoroughly in light mineral oil for48 hours and then destroy them bythrowing them one at a time into a firewith due precautions.

d) Safety fuse - Safety fuse should bedestroyed by burning in lengths in theopen.

HHHHHHH

183

POLICE JURISDICTION AND SECURITY OF RAILWAY MATERIALS.

CHAPTER XI

POLICE JURISDICTIONAND SECURITY OF

RAILWAY MATERIALS.

1101 General

The officers and supervisors of theEngineering Department are required tocoordinate and take assistance from Policeincluding Railway Police and the RailwayProtection Force for ensuring safety of railway-men and security of railway property.

1102 Police Jurisdiction

The jurisdiction between the RailwayPolice and the Local Police varies accordingto the orders issued by the concerned StateGovernments. The jurisdiction of the LocalPolice and the Railway Police is given in thePolice Manual. However, the procedure forlodging FIR/complaint is the same. Officialsof the Engineering Department will have toacquaint themselves with the procedure inforce over their jurisdiction.

a) Government Railway Police:- RailwayPolice forms a part of the State Police and isresponsible for the maintenance of law andorder and policing on the railways includingrunning trains.

NOTE:(i) "Railway limits" may be defined as the

area owned or legally occupied by aRailway Administration for the purposesof carriage of goods and passengers, andcovers every place or building used forsuch purposes. A road over or across

a Railway line is not usually used forrailway transportation unless specified.Police duties arising on it are generallyto be discharged by the Local Police.

(ii) "Station limits" includes all traffic lines,platform surfaces, circulating area andthe length of tracks within the outermostsignals.

(iii) In case of any ambiguity regarding thejurisdiction of the Local Police and theRailway Police, the Police Manual of theState concerned may be referred to.

b) Local Police:

Local Police is responsible for Law andOrder in the areas other than those comingunder the jurisdiction of the Railway Police.

c) Railway Protection Force

(i) Railway Protection Force has beencreated as an Armed Force of the Unionunder the R.P.F.Act 1957 (as modified byAct No.60 of 1985). It is placed underthe Ministry of Railways and its membersare deemed to be Railway Servantswithin the meaning of the Indian RailwaysAct 1989 and shall exercise the powersconferred on Railway Servants by orunder that Act.

(ii) RPF has been conferred with powersunder the Railway Property (UnlawfulPossession) Act 1966 to arrest, search,inquire and prosecute offenders ofunlawful possession of Railway property.

(iii) Being an Armed Force of the Union, RPFcan also exercise the powers conferred

184


on the Armed Forces of the Union.

1103 Lodging of Complaints

a) The procedure for lodging complaintswith the Government Railway Police variesas per orders issued by Local Governments.Engineers and supervisors should acquaintthemselves with the procedure in force overtheir jurisdictions.

b) Officers and senior subordinatesshould prefer complaints to the GovernmentRailway Police whenever a cognizable offencecomes to their notice or when a non-cognizable offence may lead to danger torailway property, trains or passengers.

The complaint should be made to theGovernment Railway Police Station Officer orin his absence, to the Platform Constable orto the next passing Travelling Constable andacknowledgment obtained. Copies ofcomplaints preferred by Supervisors shouldbe sent to the Assistant Engineer andDivisional Engineer for information.

c) In serious cases, the DivisionalEngineer or Assistant Engineer should followup with a complaint or report made to theSuperintendent Railway Police or DistrictSuperintendent of Police, as the case may be.In ordinary cases the Engineering Supervisorshould pursue the matter with the local policeofficials.

d) Whenever Engineering officials lodgea FIR for theft with the Government RailwayPolice, it should be clearly indicated that thesame is for "stolen property". FIR empowersthe Government Railway Police to startinvestigations in cases of cognizable offences.

e) A sample proforma for lodging 'FIR' is

given as Annexure 11.1.

1104 Co-operation with GovernmentRailway Police

a) Engineering staff should co-operatewith the Government Railway Police (GRP)for the prevention and detection of crime.Promptness in reporting an offence isessential; telegraphic, FAX advice should besent, when so required, of any occurrenceforming the subject of a complaint and theformal complaint should follow as soon aspossible.

b) When the GRP require informationfrom the records of the office of EngineeringSupervisor, they will apply to the latter withparticulars of requirements. The supervisormay allow GRP staff to verify the informationgiven. No records should however be handedover without the authority of the AssistantEngineer or Divisional/ Dy. Chief Engineer. Ineach case, the memo received from the PoliceOfficer must be sent to the Divisional/Dy. ChiefEngineer through the Assistant Engineer forinformation.

c) Any railway staff having informationin connection with a crime under enquiryshould at once communicate it to the PoliceOfficer in charge of the case.

d) All railway staff should answerquestions put by the Police in the course oftheir investigations.

1105 Cognizable Offences

Some of the offenses listed belowdemand immediate intimation to the GRP byEngineering Staff; they are termed as'cognizable by the Police', meaning that the

185


Police are authorised to commence enquiries and effect arrests without direction from aMagistrate :-_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________: Sr.No : Sections of the : Nature of offence.: : Railway Act :_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________: 1. : Sec. 145 .. : Drunkenness or nuisance-being in a state of intoxication: : : committing act of nuisance, using obscene language,: : : interfering with amenities so as to affect comfort of: : : passengers: 2. : Sec. 146 .. : Obstructing Railway Servant in his duty.: 3. : Sec. 147 .. : Trespass and refusal to desist from trespass.: 4. : Sec. 150 .. : Maliciously wrecking or attempting to wreck a train: 5. : Sec. 151 .. : Damage to or destruction of Railway Property: 6. : Sec. 166 .. : Defacing public notices.: 7. : Sec. 175 .. : Endangering safety of any person travelling upon the: : : railway by disobeying any rule negligent act. (This: : : applies to Railway Servants only)._________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When a complaint has been made to theGRP in respect of any cognizable offence, theworking up of the case rests with the Police.This does not affect the action necessary fordepartmental purposes, such as makingpreliminary enquiries which are in some casesnecessary to establish the fact that any crimehas been committed or to fix the departmental

liability for neglect of error.

1106Non-Cognizable Offences

a) Some of the offences listed below are termed"non-cognizable by the Police", meaning thatthe Police are not liable to take action,including effecting arrests, without specificorders from a Magistrate.

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Sr.No : Sections of the Rail way Act 1989 : Nature of offence._________________________________________________________________________________________________________________1. : Sec. 158 .. .. : Contravention of regulations of

: : hours of work and period of rest: : by any Railway Servant.

2. : Sec. 177 .. .. : Furnishing false returns._________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

186


b) In the case of non-cognizableoffenses, the Railway Police will record thecomplaint and take further action as per theprocedure in force.

1107 Powers of Arrest by Railway Staff

a)Section 179 of the Indian Railways Actof 1989, empowers a Railway Official to effectthe arrest of any person who has committeda cognizable offence.

Section 180 of the Indian Railways Act,1989, empowers a Railway Official to effectthe arrest of any person for an offence "non-cognizable by the Police" provided there arevalid reasons to believe that the offender willabscond or that he/she is giving a false nameand address. In cases where the personrefuses to give his proper name and address,or there is reason to believe that the nameand address given are false or that suchperson will abscond, the GRP may arrest him(or her) under Section 180 of The Railway Act.

b) The power to arrest conferred bySections 179 and 180 of the Indian RailwaysAct, 1989, shall be exercised with the greatestcaution.

1108 Warrants Against Railway Staff -

Warrants issued against railway servantswill be entrusted for execution to a PoliceOfficer of superior grade, who shall, if he findson proceeding to execute the warrant that theimmediate arrest of the railway servant wouldoccasion risk or inconvenience, make allarrangements necessary to prevent escapeand apply to the proper quarter to have theaccused relieved, deferring arrest until he isrelieved. June 1877).

Wherever possible, the DivisionalEngineer or Assistant Engineer should arrangerelief and report any case of arrest to thehigher authority.

1109 Action by Railway Staff in Casesof Attempted Sabotage

Whenever any offence under Sections150 or 151 of the Indian Railways Act, 1989 isdetected, the senior most Railway Officialpresent may direct the Police Officer orPolicemen present or, Railway servant (ifthere be no Policeman present), to arrest theoffender at once.

In every case, a detailed report shouldbe made to the appropriate authorities.

1110 Answering of Court Summons -

Court summons served on the staff shallbe promptly obeyed. Section 66 of the CivilProcedure Code 1974 provides that :-

"Where the person summoned is in theactive service of the Railways, the Courtissuing the summons shall ordinarily send itin duplicate to the Head of the Office in whichsuch person is employed; and the Head of theoffice shall thereupon cause the summons tobe served in the manner provided by Section62 and shall return it to the Court with theendorsement required by the Section".

The Divisional Engineer or AssistantEngineer shall make necessary reliefarrangements timely in such cases.

1111 Prevention of Trespass

a) Trespass Notice Boards should beerected and maintained properly at necessary

187


locations. The Boards should indicate theconsequences of trespass.

b) Stray cattle found grazing in the railwaylimits may be sent to the cattle pound.

c) Whenever dead bodies of the cattleetc. are found in the railway colony, stationlimits, Medical Department may be promptlyadvised for their removal.

1112 Disposal of Human BodiesFound Run Over-

When the body of a person run over isfound between stations, the followingprocedure shall be adopted:-

a) If life is extinct, the body shall not bemoved more than is necessary to clear theline, until the arrival of the Police. The bodymay be left in charge of a Gangman, Gatemanor a villager. In all cases, a written memowith the following particulars shall be preparedby the Guard or if, there be no Guard, by theDriver of the train or other person finding thebody and be made over to the man placed incharge of the same to be given by him to thePolice Official -

(i) Position of body on the line.

(ii) Blood stains on track, ballast or engine,extent of injuries and whether seeminglyinflicted by a train or otherwise.

(iii) Position of any clothing, found on or nearthe rails.

b) If life is not extinct, the person shallbe conveyed to the next station as promptlyas practicable where medical aid shall bearranged by the Station Master.

c) A report shall be made by the SectionEngineer to the nearest Station Master and tothe Assistant Engineer in every such case.

In the case of such accidents occurringin station yards the Station Master will takerequisite action.

1113 Disposal of Cattle found Deadon the Line. -

When cattle are run over on the line, thecarcasses should be cleared sufficiently awayfrom the line.

1114 Miscellaneous.

a) Whenever an Engineering personnelis involved in a charge of commission of anoffence under RP(UP) Act, a report should besent to the Assistant/ Divisional Engineerimmediately for necessary action at theappropriate level. In this connection theprovisions of section 3 and 4 of RP(UP)Actare reproduced below:

SECTION 3:

Whoever is found, or is proved to havebeen in possession of any Railway propertyreasonably suspected of having been stolenor unlawfully obtained shall be punishable,unless he proves that the Railway propertycame into his possession lawfully.

SECTION 4:

Any owner or occupier of a land orbuilding, or any agent of such owner oroccupier incharge of the management of thatland or building, who connives with an offenceagainst the provisions of this Act, shall bepunishable with imprisonment for a term, which

188


may extend to five years or with fine or withboth.

b) Encroachments shall be got removedpromptly as per 814 of this manual. Necessaryhelp should be sought from GRP as well asR.P.F.

c) Whenever unauthorised occupationor subletting of quarters is noticed by theSection Engineer (Works) he will take

immediate action to report this to the allottmentauthority for taking action at that authority'send.

d) Engineering Supervisors should takenecessary care to ensure that issue ofmaterials is covered under a proper authorityto avoid attracting of RP(UP)Act. Suchauthority could be Issue Notes, Gate Passes,Railway Challans etc.

H H H H H H H

189



PROFORMA FOR LODGING FIR1. Name of Complainant

a) Permanent address in fullb) Nearest railway station to the permanent residence.c) Telephone No.

2. Date of Occurrence______________ 3. Time of Occurrence________

4. Place of Occurrence __________________Place where the complainant detected the occurrencea) Train No. and nameb) Bogie No.c) Class in which travelling(AC I class/AC 2 Tier sleeper/Sleeper Class/II Class/AC 3-Tier sleeper/General/ IIclass(Ladies)

5. Ticket No.

6. Names of Stations in between which occurrence took place_______________

7. Particulars of Property Looted or Stolen and Estimated cost thereof.a) Full description of identifiable property, if any.

8. Brief particulars of the incident (Theft/Robbery/Dacoity)

9. Name of person or persons suspected with descriptive role and name and address, if knowna) The station where the suspect entrainedb) The station where the suspect detrainedc) The station where such suspect wanted to go.

10. Did the suspect show sympathy towards you by providing seat or place to sleep or adviseto put the Box/attaches at a certain place.

Report No. Received On At Hrs.

Signature with name and designation of theDate: official who received the Report.__________________________________________________________________________________________

H H H H H H H

190

BOOKS OF REFERENCE

CHAPTER XII

BOOKS OF REFERENCE

1201 Books of Reference - Books ofreference listed in Annexure 12.1 and otherpublications from R.D.S.O. and IRICEN/PUNEincluding Technical monograms consideredessential should be supplied to the officersand the Works Inspectors of each Division.

The offices of Chief Engineers andDivisional Engineers should be equipped withadequate number of copies of each publication.The publications should be accounted in theDead Stock Register. Officials for whosepersonal use publications are supplied shallbe responsible for their custody and handingthem over prior to retirement from service tothe office from where they retire.

1202 Circulation of Technical Papers- The Chief Engineer may arrange to circulatesufficient number of copies of the followingpublications and such other journals relatingto, Works as deemed necessary to theHeadquarters Officers and DivisionalEngineers who in turn should circulate themto their Assistant Engineers:-

(i) Technical papers pertaining to CivilEngineering published by the RailwayBoard from time to time.

(iii) Engineering Bulletins issued by ZontalRailways.

(iii) Monograms issued by RDSO.

191

BOOKS OF REFERENCE

Annexure 12.1.Para 1201

LIST OF BOOKS OF REFERENCE.

Office which should be quippedwith a copy of the publication

Item Publications Divl./ Dy. AEN Sr.SectionNo. Chief Engineer Engineer

(Works)

1 Act, Indian Railway 1 1 1

2 Act, Land Acquisition and 1 1 -State Govt. Publications.

3 Act, Payment of wages, with notification 1 1 1as issued

4 Act. Forest, Center and State Government 1 - -

5 Act, Workmen's Compensation 1 1 1

6 Asphabetical list of Railway

7 Circulars - Statement Governmenta) Re: Construction near railway limits 1 1 1b) Sales Tax on Works Contracts Royalty

on minerals

8 Circulars, State Government or Joint, re: 1 1 1Tanks affecting railway line.

9 Code, Indian Railways, for the Engineering 1 1 1Department

10 Code, Indian Railways, for the StoresDeptt. 1 - -

11 Code, Indian Railway for the Mechanical 1 - -Department.

12 Code, Indian Railways for the Accounts 1 - -Department

13 Code, Indian Railways Establishment 1 1 1

14 Codes, Indian Railway General 1 - -

15 Codes, Indian Railways Standard, for 1 - -Bridges, Structures and other subjects

16 Engineering Formulae Pocket Book 1 1 -

17 Engineering Standing Orders 1 - -

192

BOOKS OF REFERENCE



(Works)

18 Manual, Permanent Way 1 1 1

19 Manual, Signalling and Interlocking 1 1 -

2021 Manual , Bridge 1 1 122 Manual, Works 1 1 123 Manual, Accident or circulars pertaining 1 1 1

to accidents.

24 Price lists of Stores and Stores nomen- 1 1 1clature and circulars as applicable.

25 Regulations, Hours of Employment, with 1 1 1notifications as issued

26 Regulations, Income Tax (where applicable) 1 1 1

27 Regulations government the placing of 1 1 1electric transmission lines across andunderground cables under railway track

28 Rules, General and Subsidiary Parts I and II 1 1 129 Rules, re.Leave, Passes & PTOs 1 1 130 "Safety First", Rules 1 1 131 Schedule of Dimensions 1 1 132 Schedule of Powers in Estt. and other 1 1 1

than establishment matters.

33 Chief Engineer's circular-Engineering 1 1 1Department

34 General conditions of Contract 1 1 -

35 Water supply for Railway Emgomeers - 1 1 1 IRICEN Publication.

36 Works Hand Book of specifications for 1 1 1materials and works

37 Working Time Table and Appendix thereto 1 1 1

38 Working of Cranes and Hoists as issued - 1 - -Technical Monograms issued by Rly.Board/RDSO

193

BOOKS OF REFERENCE



(Works)

39 Biolatrines 1 1 1

40 Economy in Water Supply 1 1 1

42 Prestressed Concrete Manual 1 1 1

43 Guidelines for Earthwork Compaction 1 - -

44 * Technical Monograms 1 - *

* Copies may be supplied to AEN/Sr.Section Engineer (Works) as required).

H H H H H H H

C O N C O R D A N C E

Concordance showing the paragraphs in the Draft Works Manual dated 5.10.99 and the correspondingparagraphs in the IRWWM, 1967 Edition.

Paragraph in Draft Paragraph in the IRWWM, Remarks

Works Manual 1967 Edition

(1) (2) (3)

101 101A Modified

102 101D Modified

103 101B ---

104 102 ---

105 110 Modified

106 -- New para

107 106 Modified

108 107 ---

109 109(a) ---

110 --- New para

111 112 ---

112 104 Modified

113 105 Modified

114 111 Modified

115 113 Modified

116 303 Modified

117 301 Modified

118 302 Modified

119 304 Modified & Amplified

120 305 Modified

121 306 Modified

122 --- New para

i

(1) (2) (3)

123 307 ---

124 308 Modified

125 309 Modified

126 310 Modified

127 311 ---

128 312 Modified

129 313 ---

130 314 Modified



203 --- New Para

204 2307 Modified


206 --- New Para

207 --- New Para


209 --- New Para

210 2316 Modified

211 2311 Modified

212 --- New Para

213 2310 Modified

214 --- New Para

215 --- New Para

216 --- New Para

217 2312 Modified

218 2302 Modified

219 2303 ---

220 2305 ---


ii

(1) (2) (3)

222 2306 ---

223 2318 ---



226 2321 Modified

227 2322 Modified

228 2323 Modified

229 2324 Modified

230 2325 ---

231 --- New Para

232 --- New Para

301 2308

2201 Modified

302 2401 Modified

303 2402 -----

304 2403 Modified

305 2404 Modified

306 2405 Modified

307 2406

2407

2408 Modified & Amplified

308 2409 Modified

309 2412 Modified

401 ---- New Para

402 ---- New Para

403 ---- New Para

404 ---- New Para

405 ---- New Para

406 ---- New Para

iii

(1) (2) (3)

407 ---- New Para

408 ---- New Para

409 2218 Amplified

410 2219 Amplified

411 2203 Amplified

412 2224 Amplified

413 2209

2214 Amplified414 2206 Amplified

415 2207 Amplified

416 2213 Amplified

417 2215 Amplified

418 2219 Amplified

419 ---- New Para

420 ---- New Para

421 ---- New Para

422 ---- New Para

423 ---- New Para

424 2208 Amplified

425 2212 Amplified

426 2217 ----

427 ---- New Para

428 ---- New Para


430 2222 Amplified

501 ---- New Para

502 ---- New Para

503 ---- New Para

504 2531 Modified

iv

(1) (2) (3)

505 ---- New Para

506 2503 ----

507 2504 ----

508 2506 ----

509 2507 Amplified

510 2508 ----

511 2509 Amplified

512 ---- New Para

513 ---- New Para

514 ---- New Para

515 2510 Modified

516 2511 Modified

517 2513 Modified

518 ---- New Para

519

to ---- New Para

522

523 2534 ----

524 2505

2521 Modified

525 2522 Amplified

526 2523 Amplified

527 2514B Modified

528 2527 Modified

529 2524

2526 Amplified

530 2525 ----

531 ---- New Para

532 2502 Modified

v

(1) (2) (3)

533to --- New Para

535

536 2517 ----

537 2518 ----

538 2519 ----

539 2520 ----

540 ---- New Para

541 2532 ----

542 2528 ----

543 2529 Amplified

544 2530 Amplified

545 ---- New Para

546 ---- New Para

547 ---- New Para

548 ---- New Para

549 2535 Modified

550 2536 Modified

551 ---- New Para

552 2537 ----

553 2533 Amplified

554 2538 Modified

601 ---- New Para

602 ---- New Para

603 2602 Modified

604 ---- New Para

605 ---- New Para

606 2603 Modified

607 2607 Modified

vi

(1) (2) (3)

608 2608(d) Modified

609 --- New Para

610 2603 Modified

611 ---- New Para612 2604 Amplified

613 ---- New Para

614 2605 Amplified

615 2606 Modified

616 2613(c) Amplified

617 ---- New Para

618 --- New Para

619 ---- New Para

620 ---- New Para

621 ---- New Para

622 2615 Modified

623 2616 -----

624 2617 ----

625 2618 Modified

626 2619 ----

627 2620 Modified

628 ----- New Para

629 2615 Modified

630 --- New Para

631 ---- New Para

632 2621 Modified

701 3801 Modified

702 ---- New Para

703 3802 Modified

704 3804 ----

vii

(1) (2) (3)

705 3805 Modified

706 3806 Modified

707 3807 Modified

708 3809 Modified709 3810 Modified

710 3812 Modified

711 3813 Modified

712 3814 Modified

713 3815 ----

714 ---- New Para

715 3816 Modified

716 3817 Modified

717 3818 ----

718 3819 ----

719 ---- New Para

720 ---- New Para

721 ---- New Para

722 ---- New Para

723 --- New Para

801 3701 Modified

802 3702 Modified

803 3706 Amplified

804 3706 Amplified

805 3712 Modified

806 3713 Amplified

807 3714 Amplified

808 3715 Modified

809 3716 Modified

810 3717 ----

811 3718 Amplified

viii

(1) (2) (3)

812 3719 Amplified

813 3720 Modified

814 ---- New Para815 ---- New Para

816 ---- New Para

817 3721 Modified

818 3722 Modified819 3723(a) Modified

820 3723 Modified

821 ---- New Para

822 ---- New Para

823 ---- New Para

824 ---- New Para


826 3727 Modified

827 3728 Modified

828 ---- New Para

829 ---- New Para

901 2801 Modified

902 2802 Modified

903 2803 Modified

904 2804 Modified

905 2805 Modified

906 2806 Modified

907 2807 Modified

908 2808 Modified

909 2809 Modified

910 2810 Modified

911 2811 Modified

912 2812 Modified

ix

(1) (2) (3)

1001 ---- New Para

1002 3601 Modified

1003 3602 Modified

1004 3603 Modified1005 3616 Modified

1006 3617 ----

1007 3618 ----

1008 ---- New Para

1009 3619 ----

1101 --- New Para

1102 ---- New Para


1104 3903 Modified

1105 3904 Modified

1106 3905 Modified

1107 3906 Modified

1108 3907 Modified

1109 3908 Modified

1110 3909 Modified

1111 3910 Modified

1112 3911 ----

1113 3912 ----

1114 ---- New Para

H H H H H H H

x

‘ERRATA’

INDIAN RAILWAYS WORKS MANUAL 2000

Page No. Para / Line Existing Read as(1) (2) (3) (4)

CORRECTION SLIPS (C.S.)

S. No. C. S. No. & Date Reference

NOTES

irwm

Documents

fibre glass

improved aqua

dark battleship

collect complete

retail oil

glazed stoneware

leak proof

automatic